CONTENTS

Unit / Lesson Title Page No.

No.
Unit - I Dewey Decimal Classification (20th Edition)
Lesson – 1 Introduction to DDC 20th edition 1.1.1 – 1.1.29
Lesson – 2 Subject Determination of the Document 1.2.1 – 1.2.11
Lesson – 3 Relative Index and Manual 1.3.1 – 1.3.7
Lesson – 4 Class number Building Practices 1.4.1 – 1.4.10
Lesson – 5 Use of Table – 1: Standard Subdivisions 1.5.1 – 1.5.9
Lesson – 6 Use of Table – 2: Areas 1.6.1 – 1.6.11
Lesson – 7 Use of Table – 3 1.7.1 – 1.7.8
Lesson – 8 Use of Tables 4 & 6 1.8.1 – 1.8.8
Lesson – 9 Use of Tables 5 & 7 1.9.1 – 1.9.10
Lesson - 10 Web Dewey 1.10.1 – 1.10.3
Unit – II Colon Classification
Lesson – 1 Introduction to Colon Classification (6th Edition) 2.1.1 – 2.1.8
Lesson – 2 Rounds and Levels; Cluttering of Symbols; Common 2.2.1 – 2.2.10
Schedules of Space and Time
Lesson – 3 Devices, Systems and Specials 2.3.1 – 2.3.11
Lesson – 4 Common Isolates 2.4.1 – 2.4.9
Lesson – 5 Phase Relations 2.5.1 – 2.5.8
Lesson – 6 Examples from Main Class Generalia, Library 2.6.1 – 2.6.7
Science, and Mathematics

Lesson – 7 Examples from Main Classes of Physical Science 2.7.1 – 2.7.12

Lesson – 8 Examples from Main Classes of Biological Sciences 2.8.1 – 2.8.13
Lesson – 9 Examples from Main Classes of Humanities 2.9.1 – 2.9.15
Lesson – 10 Examples from Main Classes of Social Sciences 2.10.1 – 2.10.14
 BACHELOR OF LIBRARY INFORMATION SCEINCE ([Link].)

BLIS – VI: LIBRARY CLASSIFICATION – PRACTICE (D.D.C.)

Classification of Documents by DDC (20th Edition) : Introduction to DDC 19th Edition

– Ascertaining Specific Subject of a document; Use of relative Index – Class number
building practices – Use of Table – 1 : Standard Sub-divisions – Use of Table-2 : Areas
– Use of Table-3 – Use of Table- 4 to 7 – Multiple Synthesis and Order of Precedence

BLIS – VI: LIBRARY CLASSIFICATION – PRACTICE (C.C.)

Classification of Documents by CC (Ed. 6) : Introduction to Colon Classification (Ed

6) – Rounds and levels; cluttering of connecting Symbols – Devices; Systems and
Specials – Common Isolates – Phase Relation – Examples from Main Classes;
Generalia, Library Science and Miscellaneous Classes – Examples from Main Classes :
Physical Sciences – Examples from Main Classes : Biological Sciences – Examples
from Main Classes : Humanities – Examples from Main Classes : Social Sciences
 LIBRARY CLASSIFICATION PRACTICE

Classification provides a system for organizing a universe of documents.

Libraries usually arrange their collections according to the systematic structure of library
classification schemes. Each document is assigned a call number usually consisting of
the notation for its class accompanied by a book number. The call number provides a
unique identifying code that is used as an “address” on the shelf. This paper of Bachelor
of Library & Information Science course, of Centre for Distance Education, Acharya
Nagarjuna University deals with classification practice.

The existing Library classification schemes are broadly classified into two
categories. One is ‘Enumerative Classification schemes and the other is Analytico-
synthetic classification schemes. The syllabus of this paper includes ‘Dewey Decimal
Classification’ which is an enumerative classification scheme and ‘Colon Classification’
which is an Analytico-synthetic classification scheme. As per the syllabus prescribed
and for the sake of convenience of explaining the subject this book is divided into two
units. The unit - 1 dealt with Dewey Decimal Classification and the Unit – 2 deals with
Colon Classification
 UNIT - 1 Dewey Decimal Classification
Practice

The Dewey Decimal Classification (DDC) is the most used Library

Classification System in the world. It is used in more than 135 countries and has
been translated into over 30 languages. The DDC was conceived by Melvil
Dewey in 1873 and first published in the year 1876. The latest edition is DDC
23rd published in the year 2010.

The DDC 20th edition published in the year 1989 is prescribed for your
syllabus. The Unit – 1 of this book explains the procedures, rules, instructions
provided in the Dewey Decimal Classification System. For the convenience of
explanation this unit is divided into 9 lessons. Each lesson was explained with
illustrative examples. The lesson – 1 explains the overview of DDC and its
features etc. The lesson – 2 explains the structure of DDC. Lessons 3 and 4
discussed the relative index number building procedure as per DDC rules.
Lessons 5 to 8 explained the usage of tables provided by DDC to build
exhaustive class number. Lesson 9 introduced you to the Web Dewey
Library Classification Practice 1.1.1 Introduction to Dewey Decimal..

UNIT – I
Lesson 1

Introduction to Dewey Decimal Classification

(20th edition)
1.1.0 Aims and Objectives:
The aim of this lesson is to introduce the student to library classification schemes,
especially to Dewey Decimal Classification (20th edition), its structure and principles etc.
This lesson enables the student to understand
- the salient features of DDC
- the structure of DDC
- the notation used in the DDC and
- the utility of different volumes of DDC

STRUCTURE

1.1.1 Introduction
1.1.2 Library Classification Systems
[Link] Notation
1.1.3 Dewey Decimal Classification
[Link] History
[Link] Need to understand the Dewey Decimal Classification system
[Link] Merits of DDC
[Link] Demerits of DDC
1.1.4 The Structure of DDC 20th Edition
1.1.5 Summary

1.1.1 Introduction
A library classification is a process of coding and organizing library materials (books,
serials, audiovisual materials, computer files, maps, manuscripts, etc.) according to their
subject. A classification scheme consists of schedules used to assign a class number to each
item being classified, based on that item's subject. The main aim of the library classification is to
arrange the documents on the shelves in some helpful order.

1.1.2 Library Classification Systems

Library classification forms part of the field of library and information science. It goes
hand in hand with library (descriptive) cataloging under the rubric of cataloging and
classification. The library professional who engages in the process of cataloging and classifying
library materials is called a cataloger or catalog librarian
Centre for Distance Education 1.1.2 Acharya Nagarjuna University

Classification provides a system for organizing knowledge. Classification may be used to

organize knowledge represented in any form, e.g., books, documents, electronic resources.

There are two main types of classification systems:

1. Enumerative Classification: This type of classification Schemes identify the

subjects in the universe of knowledge and arrange them in some helpful order
with assigned numbers.

2. Faceted or analytico-synthetic Classification: This type of classification

schemes first analyse the subject into isolates or concepts and then synthesize
according to the canons, principles, laws etc. prescribed by the scheme.

1.1.2 Notation:

Notation is the system of symbols used to represent the subjects or classes in a

classification system. The notation gives both the unique meaning of the class and its relation to
other classes. The notation provides a universal language to identify the class and related
classes, regardless of the fact that different words or languages may be used to describe the
subject. There are two types of notation systems employed in library classification schemes.
They are pure notation and mixed notation. In the Dewey Decimal Classification, the notation
employed is of pure notation expressed in Arabic numerals. In Colon Classification mixed
notation is employed consisting of roman alphabets, numerals and some special characters.

1.1.3 Dewey Decimal Classification (DDC)

DDC is one of the systems used in libraries for organizing documents according to
subject by assigning corresponding three-digit numerals, with further specification expressed by
numerals following a decimal point. The Dewey Decimal Classification (DDC), also called the
Dewey Decimal System is a system of library classification developed by Melvil Dewey in
1876, and since greatly modified and expanded through twenty-three major revisions, the most
recent in 2010. Every seven years, a new print edition of the Dewey Decimal Classification is
published.

The new edition, DDC 23, arrived in July2010. DDC 23 features many new numbers and
topics The new edition provided significant updates to several schedules, including 004-006
Computer science, 200 Religion, 305-306 Social groups and institutions, 340 Law, 510
Mathematics and 610 Medicine and health. Another major change is provision of a streamlined
Manual and the replacement of Table 7 with direct use of notation already available elsewhere
in the DDC.

The DDC System is a numeric system used by most libraries to organise their
information resources (books, journals, etc.) in certain subject groups, so that they are easily
accessible to users. In other words, these numbers on the items (books, magazines, audio-
visual, etc.) are there to help you find them among all the other items in the Library. For
example take the documents dealing with the subject sociology. Since all the books on
sociology will have the number 301, the books will all be at the same shelf location. This means
that you can go to that shelf location and browse all the sociology books easily. When you
search on the OPAC (the Library online catalogue), next to each record the location of the item
on the shelves is given.
Library Classification Practice 1.1.3 Introduction to Dewey Decimal..

[Link] History

The history of the Dewey Decimal Classification System (DDC) dates back to the very
beginning of the modern library movement in the nineteenth century. The classification
scheme’s progenitor was a man named Melvil Dewey who was born to a poor family in upstate
New York in 1851. His full name was Melville Louis Kossuth Dewey. Dewey had a profound
effect on the library movement in America. He originated the DDC in 1873 and had it published
and patented in 1876. There has been some speculation that Dewey synthesized ideas from a
number of sources and coordinated them into a unified system. There is some evidence to
suggest that Dewey may have been introduced to the idea of a decimal classification by a
pamphlet written by Nathaniel Shurtlaff in 1856. The DDC may also have been partly adapted
from a scheme that William Lorrey Harris had formed basing on the structure expressed by Sir
Francis Bacon, and refined by the German philosopher G. W. F. Hegel. Regardless of where
the scheme emerged from, however, Dewey was the first person to properly expand on and
define his ideas concerning a classification that placed books into a relative order based on
disciplines rather than an alphabetical order. The DDC was the first timely modern system that
introduced features like relative locations and a relative index. This enables books to be placed
in stacks based on their relationships to one another. The system grew from its first edition in
1876 to its 23rd edition in 2010 and has been translated into over 30 languages.

While the DDC was Melvil Dewey’s most significant creation it was not his only creation.
He also helped to establish the very first library school at Columbia University in 1887, and
worked to allow women admittance to the program. Dewey also helped establish the American
Library Association in 1876, and became the director of the New York State Library until 1906.
Melvil Dewey finally died in 1931, but not before helping to clearly establish the significance of
librarians, their profession, and the cataloguing system that still bears his namesake.

[Link] Need to understand the Dewey Decimal Classification system

You need to understand the basics of the DDC system to be able to find the items in the
Library that you are looking for. The DDC attempts to organize all knowledge into ten main
classes that, excluding the first class (000 Computers, information and general reference),
proceed from the divine (philosophy & religion) to the mundane (history & geography). DDC's
cleverness is in choosing decimals for its categories; this allows it to be both purely numerical
and infinitely hierarchical. It also shows the features of faceted classification, with provisions to
combine elements from different parts of the schedule to construct a number representing the
subject content (often combining two subject elements with linking numbers and geographical
and temporal elements) and form of an item rather than drawing upon a list containing each
class and its meaning.

Except for general works and fiction, works are classified principally by subject, with
extensions for subject relationships, place, time or type of material, producing classification
numbers of not less than three digits but otherwise of indeterminate length with a decimal point
before the fourth digit, where present (e.g. 330 for economics + 94 for Europe = 330.94
European economy; 973 for History of United States + 005 form division for periodicals =
973.005, periodicals concerning the History of United States generally); classmarks are to be
read as numbers, in the order: 050, 220, 330.973, 331 etc. Any letter should be read as
preceding any number that might have occupied the same character position, so "330.94A"
would come before 330.943. The system uses ten main classes, which are then further
subdivided. Each main class has ten divisions and each division has ten sections. Hence the
Centre for Distance Education 1.1.4 Acharya Nagarjuna University

system can be neatly summarized in 10 main classes, 100 divisions and 1000 sections. It is a
common misconception that all books in the DDC are non-fiction. However, the DDC has a
number for all books, including those that generally become their own section of fiction. If DDC
rules are strictly followed, American fiction is classified in 813. Some libraries create a separate
fiction section because of the space that would be taken up in the 800s

[Link] Merits of DDC

1. Provides a logical system for organizing every item in the library’s unique collection
2. Offer library users familiarity and consistency of a time-honored classification system
used worldwide
3. Integrate updates to the DDC almost as soon as they happen through quarterly,
electronic updates to web-Dewey and abridged web-Dewey.

[Link] Demerits of DDC

1. There is a bias towards Protestant/American aspects prevalent in both the history and
religion disciplines. These problems are being addressed in each new revision and
edition.
2. There is the potential for very large classification call numbers as a result of number
building, and the need for extreme accuracy by some libraries.
3. The DDC does not work as well as other classification systems for large academic
institutions, although attempts have been made at some.
4. The DDC is not as easily expandable as classification systems like the Library of
Congress Classification system when new subjects or technologies emerge.
5. Sections of library catalogues can require significant revisions when new editions come
out, and catalogue divisions in many libraries may need to undertake a great deal of
additional work to move from one edition of the DDC to the next.
6. The DDC is constantly undergoing revisions. (Note, this can also be considered a merit.)
7. Within the DDC there are some disciplines that are closely related, yet quite separate
numerically like literature 800-899 and languages 400-499.
8. Within the DDC there are also some classes like ‘Technology,’ in the 600s in which the
call numbers are very crowded.

The DDC is built on sound principles that make it ideal tool to organize knowledge with
meaningful notation in universally recognized Arabic numerals, well-defined categories, well-
developed hierarchies, and a rich network of relationships among topics. In the DDC, basic
classes are organized by disciplines or fields of study. At the broadest level, the DDC is divided
into ten main classes, which together cover the entire world of knowledge. Each main class is
further divided into ten divisions, and each division into ten sections (not all the numbers for the
divisions and sections have been used). The main structure of the DDC is presented in the DDC
Summaries following this introduction. The headings associated with the numbers in the
summaries have been edited for browsing purposes, and do not necessarily match the
complete headings found in the schedules.

The first summary contains the ten main classes. The first digit in each three-digit
number represents the main class. For example, in main class 600 ‘6’ represents technology.
Library Classification Practice 1.1.5 Introduction to Dewey Decimal..

The second summary contains the hundred divisions. The second digit in each three-
digit number indicates the division. For example, 600 is used for works on technology, while 610
for medicine and health, 620 for engineering, 630 for agriculture.

The third summary contains the thousand sections. The third digit in each three-digit
number indicates the section. Thus, 610 is used for works on medicine and health, while 611 for
human anatomy, 612 for human physiology, 613 for personal health and safety.

Arabic numerals are used to represent each class in the DDC. A decimal point follows
the third digit in a class number, after which division by ten continues to the specific degree of
classification needed.

A subject may appear in more than one discipline. For example, “clothing” has aspects
that fall under several disciplines. The psychological influence of clothing belongs in 155.95 as
part of the discipline of psychology; customs associated with clothing belong to 391 as part of
the discipline of customs; and clothing in the sense of fashion design belongs in 746.92 as part
of the discipline of the arts.

Hierarchy in the DDC is expressed through structure and notation. Structural hierarchy
means that all topics (aside from the ten main classes) are part of all the broader topics above
them. Any note regarding the nature of a class holds true for all the subordinate classes,
including logically subordinate topics classed at coordinate numbers. Notational hierarchy is
expressed by length of notation. Numbers at any given level are usually subordinate to a class
whose notation is one digit shorter; coordinate with a class whose notation has the same
number of significant digits.

The DDC uses primarily Arabic numerals. It is divided into hierarchies of disciplines.
There are ten main disciplines or classes that are broken down further into ten divisions each.
Each division can be broken down in to 10 sections.

First Summary

The Ten Main Classes

000 Computer science, information & general works

100 Philosophy & psychology
200 Religion
300 Social sciences
400 Language
500 Science
600 Technology
700 Arts & recreation
800 Literature
900 History & geography

There are some sections that have still not been assigned, or have been reassigned in
previous DDC revisions. All together, this forms a set of approximately 1000 sections of
knowledge.(Appendix – 1) It is important to note that it is possible for subjects to appear in more
than one class. A guide to the Dewey Decimal Classification Scheme
Centre for Distance Education 1.1.6 Acharya Nagarjuna University

This library uses the Dewey Decimal Classification scheme (DDC) to arrange books and
other library materials on the shelves so they may be easily retrieved. It is used in many
libraries and allows items about the same subject to be shelved together.

Working of Dewey Decimal system

DDC is a hierarchical number system that organises all human knowledge into ten main
categories. These are:

000 Generalities (includes computing)

100 Philosophy
200 Religion
300 Social sciences
400 Languages
500 Natural sciences and mathematics
600 Technology (applied science)
700 The arts
800 Literature
900 Geography and history

Each main category is then divided into ten sub-categories. For example:

500 Natural sciences and mathematics

510 Mathematics
520 Astronomy
530 Physics
540 Chemistry
550 Earth sciences
560 Paleontology
570 Life sciences
580 Plants
590 Animals

Each sub-category is then also divided into ten specific topics. For example:

530 Physics
531 Solid mechanics
532 Fluid mechanics
533 Pneumatics
534 Sound
535 Light
536 Heat
537 Electricity
538 Magnetism
539 Modern physics

Each of these topics may be further divided into more specific subject areas. A decimal
point is used after the first three digits to separate the specific subjects - it also makes the
numbers easier to read. You will see that as the subject becomes more specific, so does the
numbering. For example:
Library Classification Practice 1.1.7 Introduction to Dewey Decimal..

534 Sound
534.1 Generation of sound
534.2 Transmission of sound
534.22 Transmission of sound in solids
534.23 Transmission of sound in liquids

When an item arrives in the library it is assigned a DDC number, often called the “class
mark” or “shelf mark”. Each of the numbers in this shelf mark has a meaning and is not
assigned randomly.

For example, the book “The Royal doctors 1485-1714” by Elizabeth Furdell has been
assigned the shelf mark 610.6952094205 FUR. These numerals indicate:

610 = Medical sciences

610.6 = Professions
610.69 = Medical personnel
610.695 = Specific kinds of medical personnel
610.6952 = Physicians
610.69520942 = Physicians in England and Wales
610.6952094205 = Physicians in England and Wales 1485-1603
FUR = author indication for Furdell, Elizabeth. Some libraries use
cutter author table to denote number for the author

Most items will also be assigned some letters at the end of the numerals, “FUR” in the
above example. These are taken from the author’s surname or the first word of the title.

There are also occasions where number building using one of the seven tables created
in the DDC is necessary. The tables include:

- Table 1: Standard Subdivisions

- Table 2: Geographic Areas, Historical Periods, Persons
- Table 3: Subdivision for the Arts, for Individual Literatures, for Specific Literary Forms
- Table 4: Subdivision of Individual Languages and Language Families
- Table 5: Racial, Ethnic, National Groups
- Table 6: Languages
- Table 7: Groups of Persons

An example of where the tables may be used would be a book of poetry written by
various poets from around the world. It may require the reference and utilization of several
tables to construct appropriate call numbers. The DDC call numbers can be easily reduced to
less specific numbers depending on the needs and size of the library. Large libraries with
specific cataloguing; however, can have very long DDC call numbers at times.

The DDC is continuously undergoing updates, even on a weekly basis, and enjoys a
status of being one of the most widely used classification systems in the world. Some of the
places it is not widely used are Eastern Europe and the former Soviet Union which uses the
11
Universal Decimal Classification system instead. The UDC was based on the DDC, and was
produced with Dewey’s permission around the turn of the century. The DDC, which is published
12
by Forest Press, became a part of the Online Computer Library Centre (OCLC) in 1988. The
system is also maintained by the Library of Congress (LOC), and within the Decimal
Centre for Distance Education 1.1.8 Acharya Nagarjuna University

13
Classification Division in LOC there is located a Dewey Editorial Office. The office assigns
110,000 DDC numbers to catalogued works annually, and prepares modifications and
14
expansions to the DDC schedules. In the more recent versions of the DDC there has been a
strong effort to remove American and Christian bias and to make the DDC more applicable to
other religions and works from other regions around the world. The DDC, together with LOC,
WorldCat, OCLC, and the Marc 21 format are making efforts towards rendering as many of the
world’s monographs, periodicals, and information materials available in as many different
formats as possible for use

Find a book on the shelf

To find an item (for example, a book) in the library, you need to use the OPAC. When
you have traced the book in the OPAC, you will find its call number (shelf address). The call
number appears in the spine label of the book and all the books in the library are arranged
according to the call numbers.

The shelf mark will always have at least three numbers, followed by some letters. It is
usually displayed on the spine of the item, but is sometimes placed on the front cover. Here are
some examples:

361. 382. 576 599. 647. 823.

3 63 JON 935 944 914
HIG COC PHI 21 BAI/B
LON
The DDC system places items about the same subject at the same number. This means
that once you have identified the DDC number for the subject you are interested in, you can
browse the shelves at that number.

On each shelf the items are arranged in a numerical sequence from left to right by their
DDC number. Where several items have an identical DDC number, the letters are used to
further arrange them. For example,

361. 361. 361. 363. 363. 363.

3 32 32 35 377 377
HIG BOR STO CIV PRE PRO
Library Classification Practice 1.1.9 Introduction to Dewey Decimal..

This gives you an idea of what the sequence of call numbers look like on a shelf.

1.1.4 STRUCTURE AND ARRANGEMET OF DDC 20th EDITION

The print version of the full edition of the DDC, Edition 20, is composed of the following
major parts in four volumes:
Volume 1

(A) New Features in Edition 20: A brief explanation of the special features and changes in DDC
22

(B) Introduction: A description of the DDC and how to use it

(C) Glossary: Short definitions of terms used in the DDC

(D) Index to the Introduction and Glossary

(E) Publishing history of Dewey Decimal Classification

(F) Tables: Seven numbered tables of notation that can be added to class numbers to provide
greater specificity
Centre for Distance Education 1.1.10 Acharya Nagarjuna University

(G) Relocations and Reductions

(H) Comparative tables
(I) Equivalence tables

Volume 2

(J) DDC Summaries: The top three levels of the DDC

(K) Schedules: The organization of knowledge from 000–599

Volume 3

(L) Schedules: The organization of knowledge from 600–999

Volume 4

(M) Relative Index: An alphabetical list of subjects with the disciplines in which they are treated
sub arranged alphabetically under each entry.

(N) Manual:A guide to the use of the DDC that is made up primarily of extended discussions of
problem areas in the application of the DDC. Information in the Manual is arranged by the
numbers in the tables and schedules

(O) Appendix

VOLUME 1: INTRODUCTION AND TABLES

It is comparatively a thin volume containing prefatory material and seven auxiliary tables.
It gives a brief history of DDC in "Publisher's Foreword" ([Link]-xii), and has the preface ([Link]-
xv) by the Chairman of the Decimal Classification Editorial Policy Committee (DCEPC). This
preface describes the special features and policies of the 20th edition. It is followed by
acknowledgements (xvii) and new features in edition 20 (xix-xxiv). Many new features were
introduced in edition 20 for the convenience of user. Some of the main features of DDC 20th
edition are:
1. Manual is introduced to assist the user in application of DDC for classification of
documents. It offers advice on classifying in difficult areas, and explains how to
choose between related numbers.
2. Number of summaries has been increased.
3. There is a significant increase in the number of notes in the schedule and tables
to facilitate user. New kind of notes such as see-also note etc are introduced and
every add instruction is supplemented with examples for easy understanding.
4. Several areas of the schedule and tables are completely revised. For example -
011, -092 introduced in table 1; -43, -492, 493, and -52 of table 2 are revised and
expanded. Table 3 has been divided into three subdivisions (explained in later
lessons) to enable the classifier to follow instructions with less difficulty. Several
important areas of the schedule are also revised and expanded.
5. The size of the relative index is reduced by eliminating see references.

Then the volume 1 contains Editor's Introduction. It is a very important and useful part of
the system in all respects. The Editor's Introduction explains in details, the structure of the
scheme, its various plans, its fine features, and full instructions on its use. It also provides
Library Classification Practice 1.1.11 Introduction to Dewey Decimal..

guidance in determining the subject (doing subject analysis) of a book in general (p. xxix - xxxii),
and subsequently, in locating the appropriate class number. It also provides rules and
procedure for number building to expand a number either from the schedules or from any of the
auxiliary tables or by both for close classification of the document.

Auxiliary Tables

Virtually the second or main part of the Volume 1 is devoted to-the seven auxiliary
tables. These are:
1. Standard Subdivisions,
2. Areas,
3. Subdivisions of Individual Literatures,
4. Subdivisions of Individual Languages,
5. Racial, Ethnic, National Groups,
6. Languages, and
7. Persons.
Use of these tables will be explained to you in next lessons.

1.1.5 Summaries
Quite important are the so called Three Summaries of the DDC Classification
System (on pages ix-xx of, Volume 2). These are three outlines of the scheme given in the
order of their increasing details. Detailed summaries are given as Annexure to this lesson.

The First Summary, also called the Ten Main Classes (p. ix), is the broadest and the
first outline of the division of the entire universe of knowledge as per this system. You can
remember this summary even on first reading.

The Second Summary: On the following page, i.e p. x, you can find that each of these
ten main classes have further been divided into ten branches called divisions. Hence, there are
10x10 = 100 divisions in all. This is called the Second Summary or The 100 Divisions of DDC.
It is useful to remember this summary also. The extract from the Second Summary is
reproduced below:

Second Summary of the Main Class 300 Social Sciences, as an example, is as follows:
310 General Statistics
320 Political science
330 Economics
340 Law
350 Public administration
360 Social Services; association
370 Education
380 Commerce, communications, transport
390 Customs, etiquette, folklore

The Third Summary (p. xi) divides each of the 100 divisions into ten parts called
sections. Hence, there are 100x10=1000 sections in all. These 1000 Sections are called Third
Summary. These 1000 sections enumerate and elaborate the scope of the above 100 divisions
Centre for Distance Education 1.1.12 Acharya Nagarjuna University

or 10 main classes. There is no need to remember all these 1000 sections, unless you want to
become a super expert.

Third Summary of the Division 330 Economic is as follows:

330 Economics
331 Labor economics
332 Financial economics
333 Land economics
334 Cooperatives
335 Socialism & related systems
336 Public finance
337 International economics
338 Production
339 Macroeconomics & related topics

Each of these sections further divided successively into ten subdivisions to form notation
of the schedules to accommodate subjects.

Hierarchy

Hierarchy means the sequence of subjects in their successive subordination. Hierarchy

also means the arrangement as per the increasing specificity of subjects as we go down the
chain. This whole-part relationship or increasing specificity of subjects is shown by the addition
of a digit to the number on the left side and the shift of indention of the verbal heading to the
right side.

For Example:
300 Social Sciences
330 Economics
332 Financial Economics
332.4 Money
332.41 Value of money
332.414 Factors affecting fluctuations
in value

In the above case each heading is subordinated to the immediate upper heading.
Note the lengthening of the chain by a digit in the number column on the left and the shift in
(typo-graphical) indention on the right in the corresponding headings,

Sequence of Numbers

The entire schedule has been arranged in a single numerical sequence from 001-999.
As the value and the ascending order of decimal fractions has already been explained in the
earlier lesson. So it should not be difficult for you to reach and locate a desired number. To
reach any number the usual page numbers do not help. Here one has to proceed through the
numerical order of decimal fractions. For the convenience of the users, the three-digit section
number is always written on both the top corners of the pages in the schedule. It has immense
location value. For example, if we are to reach the class number 333, the broader course will
be:300, – 310, -320, -330, - 331, - 332, - 333, Similarly, 333.915 will be reached as:- 330 – 333,
- 333.0, - 333.9, – 333.91,- 333.915.
Library Classification Practice 1.1.13 Introduction to Dewey Decimal..

Understanding the Schedules

Making use of the hierarchical principle, the corresponding heading against every
number does not describe the full subject, but a term most specific to that digit in the chain of
numbers used to denote subjects. Therefore, to understand the full meaning of every heading in
the schedule, it is to be read in the context of its immediate upper heading, and simultaneously
in the still broader context of the whole discipline. Take, for example, a class number:

342.052 Powers, functions, duties

If this entry is taken by itself, one may not understand as to whose "powers, functions,
duties" these refer to. But, if we read it in conjunction with (or in the context of) its immediately
upper number in the hierarchy, then its meaning becomes abundantly clear, viz., "powers,
functions, duties of the legislative branch of the government" (342.05). This can further be read
in the context of its still higher number, i.e., 342 (constitutional and administrative law). Then it
will mean "Powers, functions and duties of the legislative branch of the government in
constitutional and administrative law".

Now take one more example:

546.342 Simple salts

One may not understand what the adjective "simple" stands for here. But, reading it in
the context of its upper number, viz., 546.34 (Salt), it means simple salt which is quite clear. But
when you read further in the context of its still upper class, 546 (Inorganic chemistry), then it
becomes totally clear to mean Inorganic Simple Salts.

VOLUME 4: RELATIVE- INDEX AND MANUAL

Relative Index:
Volume 4 of the DDC set is devoted to the Relative Index. The index is always an
important part of any classification system. In DDC it is called Relative Index, which is better
than other alphabetical indexes and is considered an important and enduring contribution of
Melvil Dewey to library classification. Relative Index is a kind of index which not only arranges
the concepts and their terms in an alphabetical sequence but also shows the relation-ship
between the terms, and the contexts in which the subjects appear in the schedule and tables. It
is not only a key to the classified schedules, but also makes an independent approach to
classification. Thus, it is not an optional part but an integral part of DDC.

TRANSCRIPTION OF A CLASS NUMBER

As you already know:
i) The numbers used in DDC are decimal fractions,
ii) No class number consists of less than three digits; e.g., 5 is written as 500 and 53 as 530,
iii) When a class number extends beyond three digits, a dot is put between the third and fourth
digits, e.g., 324.3, 362.14, 386.242
iv) When a class number extends beyond six digits, to break the monotony and to aid
memory, a space is used after every third digit. This is further explained below.

Dot: It is essential to remember that the dot used is not a decimal point as it might be
thought to be. Mathematically it is absurd; a decimal fraction cannot be divided again decimally.
It is simply a psychological pause to break the monotony of numerical digits. It helps to ease the
transcription, copying and remembering of the class number for a short while. Educational
psychologists believe that 324.12 is more easily remembered than 32412. Hence this dot has
Centre for Distance Education 1.1.14 Acharya Nagarjuna University

no function other than to reinforce memory.

Spaces: If a class number extends beyond six digits then after every three digits, a
space is left. In other words after the sixth digit the remaining digits are transcribed in `groups of
three', leaving a space between two groups. This space serves exactly the same purpose as
the dot, viz. ease in transcription, copying and remembering of the class number. For example,
the number 384.1065 “Telegraph companies”; in actual practice, transcribed in the schedules
as: 384.106 5 leaving a space between the sixth and the seventh digits.

Similarly, the class number:

621.38800287 TV testing technique

It is actually transcribed as 621.388 002 87 leaving spaces between the sixth and the seventh
digits and between the ninth and tenth digits. Such spaces can be extended to any extent if
necessary. To repeat, the dot and spaces in a class number are devoid of any substantive
meaning. These are not connecting symbols either.

Entries: Entries in the schedules and tables are composed of a DDC number in the
number column (the column at the left margin), a heading describing the class that the number
represents, and often one or more notes. All entries (numbers, headings, and notes) should be
read in the context of the hierarchy.

In the print version of the DDC, the first three digits of schedule numbers (main classes,
divisions, sections) appear only once in the number column, when first used. They are repeated
at the top of each page where their subdivisions continue. Subordinate numbers appear in the
number column, beginning with a decimal point, with the initial three digits understood.

Some numbers in the schedules and tables are enclosed in parentheses or square
brackets. Numbers and notes in parentheses provide options to standard practice. Numbers in
square brackets represent topics that have been relocated or discontinued, or are unassigned.
Square brackets are also used for standard subdivision concepts that are represented in
another location. Numbers in square brackets are never used.

ANNEXURE
SUMMARIES

First Summary
The Ten Main Classes

000 Computer science, information & general works

100 Philosophy & psychology
200 Religion
300 Social sciences
400 Language
500 Science
600 Technology
700 Arts & recreation
800 Literature
900 History & geography
Library Classification Practice 1.1.15 Introduction to Dewey Decimal..

Second Summary
The Hundred Divisions
Computer science, knowledge &
000 systems 500 Science
010 Bibliographies 510 Mathematics
020 Library & information sciences 520 Astronomy
030 Encyclopedias & books of facts 530 Physics
040 [Unassigned] 540 Chemistry
050 Magazines, journals & serials 550 Earth sciences & geology
Associations, organizations &
060 museums 560 Fossils & prehistoric life
070 News media, journalism & publishing 570 Life sciences; biology
080 Quotations 580 Plants (Botany)
090 Manuscripts & rare books 590 Animals (Zoology)
100 Philosophy 600 Technology
110 Metaphysics 610 Medicine & health
120 Epistemology 620 Engineering
130 Parapsychology & occultism 630 Agriculture
140 Philosophical schools of thought 640 Home & family management
150 Psychology 650 Management & public relations
160 Logic 660 Chemical engineering
170 Ethics 670 Manufacturing
180 Ancient, medieval & eastern philosophy 680 Manufacture for specific uses
190 Modern western philosophy 690 Building & construction

200 Religion 700 Arts

210 Philosophy & theory of religion 710 Landscaping & area planning
220 The Bible 720 Architecture
230 Christianity & Christian theology 730 Sculpture, ceramics & metalwork
240 Christian practice & observance 740 Drawing & decorative arts
Christian pastoral practice & religious
250 orders 750 Painting
260 Christian organization, social work & worship 760 Graphic arts
270 History of Christianity 770 Photography & computer art
280 Christian denominations 780 Music
290 Other religions 790 Sports, games & entertainment

300 Social sciences, sociology & anthropology 800 Literature, rhetoric & criticism
310 Statistics 810 American literature in English
320 Political science 820 English & Old English literatures
330 Economics 830 German & related literatures
340 Law 840 French & related literatures
350 Public administration & military science 850 Italian, Romanian & related literatures
360 Social problems & social services 860 Spanish & Portuguese literatures
370 Education 870 Latin & Italic literatures
380 Commerce, communications & transportation 880 Classical & modern Greek literatures
390 Customs, etiquette & folklore 890 Other literatures
Centre for Distance Education 1.1.16 Acharya Nagarjuna University

400 Language 900 History

410 Linguistics 910 Geography & travel
420 English & Old English languages 920 Biography & genealogy
430 German & related languages 930 History of ancient world (to ca. 499)
440 French & related languages 940 History of Europe
450 Italian, Romanian & related languages 950 History of Asia
460 Spanish & Portuguese languages 960 History of Africa
470 Latin & Italic languages 970 History of North America
480 Classical & modern Greek languages 980 History of South America
490 Other languages 990 History of other areas

Third Summary
The Thousand Sections
Computer science, information &
000 general works 050 General serial publications
001 Knowledge 051 Serials in American English
002 The book 052 Serials in English
003 Systems 053 Serials in other Germanic languages
Data processing & computer
004 science 054 Serials in French, Occitan & Catalan
Computer programming, programs
005 & data 055 In Italian, Romanian & related languages
006 Special computer methods 056 Serials in Spanish & Portuguese
007 [Unassigned] 057 Serials in Slavic languages
008 [Unassigned] 058 Serials in Scandinavian languages
009 [Unassigned] 059 Serials in other languages
General organizations & museum
010 Bibliography 060 science
011 Bibliographies 061 Organizations in North America
012 Bibliographies of individuals 062 Organizations in British Isles; in England
Organizations in central Europe; in
013 [Unassigned] 063 Germany
Of anonymous & pseudonymous
014 works 064 Organizations in France & Monaco
Bibliographies of works from
015 specific places 065 Organizations in Italy & adjacent islands
Bibliographies of works on specific
016 subjects 066 In Iberian Peninsula & adjacent islands
Organizations in eastern Europe; in
017 General subject catalogs 067 Russia
Catalogs arranged by author, date,
018 etc. 068 Organizations in other geographic areas
019 Dictionary catalogs 069 Museum science
020 Library & information sciences 070 News media, journalism & publishing
021 Library relationships 071 Newspapers in North America
022 Administration of physical plant 072 Newspapers in British Isles; in England
Newspapers in central Europe; in
023 Personnel management 073 Germany
024 [Unassigned] 074 Newspapers in France & Monaco
025 Library operations 075 Newspapers in Italy & adjacent islands
Library Classification Practice 1.1.17 Introduction to Dewey Decimal..

026 Libraries for specific subjects 076 In Iberian Peninsula & adjacent islands
Newspapers in eastern Europe; in
027 General libraries 077 Russia
Reading & use of other information
028 media 078 Newspapers in Scandinavia
029 [Unassigned] 079 Newspapers in other geographic areas
030 General encyclopedic works 080 General collections
031 Encyclopedias in American English 081 Collections in American English
032 Encyclopedias in English 082 Collections in English
033 In other Germanic languages 083 Collections in other Germanic languages
Encyclopedias in French, Occitan &
034 Catalan 084 Collections in French, Occitan & Catalan
In Italian, Romanian & related
035 languages 085 In Italian, Romanian & related languages
Encyclopedias in Spanish &
036 Portuguese 086 Collections in Spanish & Portuguese
037 Encyclopedias in Slavic languages 087 Collections in Slavic languages
Encyclopedias in Scandinavian
038 languages 088 Collections in Scandinavian languages
039 Encyclopedias in other languages 089 Collections in other languages
040 [Unassigned] 090 Manuscripts & rare books
041 [Unassigned] 091 Manuscripts
042 [Unassigned] 092 Block books
043 [Unassigned] 093 Incunabula
044 [Unassigned] 094 Printed books
045 [Unassigned] 095 Books notable for bindings
046 [Unassigned] 096 Books notable for illustrations
047 [Unassigned] 097 Books notable for ownership or origin
048 [Unassigned] 098 Prohibited works, forgeries & hoaxes
049 [Unassigned] 099 Books notable for format

100 Philosophy & psychology 150 Psychology

101 Theory of philosophy 151 [Unassigned]
Perception, movement,
102 Miscellany 152 emotions & drives
Mental processes &
103 Dictionaries & encyclopedias 153 intelligence
104 [Unassigned] 154 Subconscious & altered states
Differential & developmental
105 Serial publications 155 psychology
106 Organizations & management 156 Comparative psychology
Education, research & related
107 topics 157 [Unassigned]
108 Kinds of persons treatment 158 Applied psychology
Historical & collected persons
109 treatment 159 [Unassigned]
110 Metaphysics 160 Logic
111 Ontology 161 Induction
112 [Unassigned] 162 Deduction
113 Cosmology 163 [Unassigned]
Centre for Distance Education 1.1.18 Acharya Nagarjuna University

114 Space 164 [Unassigned]

115 Time 165 Fallacies & sources of error
116 Change 166 Syllogisms
117 Structure 167 Hypotheses
118 Force & energy 168 Argument & persuasion
119 Number & quantity 169 Analogy
Epistemology, causation &
120 humankind 170 Ethics
121 Epistemology 171 Ethical systems
122 Causation 172 Political ethics
123 Determinism & indeterminism 173 Ethics of family relationships
124 Teleology 174 Occupational ethics
125 [Unassigned] 175 Ethics of recreation & leisure
126 The self 176 Ethics of sex & reproduction
The unconscious & the
127 subconscious 177 Ethics of social relations
128 Humankind 178 Ethics of consumption
Origin & destiny of individual
129 souls 179 Other ethical norms
Ancient, medieval & eastern
130 Parapsychology & occultism 180 philosophy
Parapsychological & occult
131 methods 181 Eastern philosophy
Pre-Socratic Greek
132 [Unassigned] 182 philosophies
Specific topics in parapsychology Socratic & related
133 & occultism 183 philosophies
134 [Unassigned] 184 Platonic philosophy
135 Dreams & mysteries 185 Aristotelian philosophy
Skeptic & Neoplatonic
136 [Unassigned] 186 philosophies
137 Divinatory graphology 187 Epicurean philosophy
138 Physiognomy 188 Stoic philosophy
139 Phrenology 189 Medieval western philosophy
140 Specific philosophical schools 190 Modern western philosophy
Philosophy of United States &
141 Idealism & related systems 191 Canada
142 Critical philosophy 192 Philosophy of British Isles
Philosophy of Germany &
143 Bergsonism & intuitionism 193 Austria
144 Humanism & related systems 194 Philosophy of France
145 Sensationalism 195 Philosophy of Italy
Philosophy of Spain &
146 Naturalism & related systems 196 Portugal
Philosophy of former Soviet
147 Pantheism & related systems 197 Union
Eclecticism, liberalism &
148 traditionalism 198 Philosophy of Scandinavia
Philosophy in other
149 Other philosophical systems 199 geographic areas
Library Classification Practice 1.1.19 Introduction to Dewey Decimal..

200

200 Religion 250 Christian orders & local church

Religious mythology & social
201 theology 251 Preaching
202 Doctrines 252 Texts of sermons
203 Public worship & other practices 253 Pastoral office & work
Religious experience, life &
204 practice 254 Parish administration
Religious congregations &
205 Religious ethics 255 orders
206 Leaders & organization 256 [Unassigned]
207 Missions & religious education 257 [Unassigned]
208 Sources 258 [Unassigned]
Pastoral care of families &
209 Sects & reform movements 259 kinds of persons
Social & ecclesiastical
210 Philosophy & theory of religion 260 theology
211 Concepts of God 261 Social theology
Existence, knowability & attributes
212 of God 262 Ecclesiology
Days, times & places of
213 Creation 263 observance
214 Theodicy 264 Public worship
215 Science & religion 265 Sacraments, other rites & acts
216 [Unassigned] 266 Missions
217 [Unassigned] 267 Associations for religious work
218 Humankind 268 Religious education
219 [Unassigned] 269 Spiritual renewal
History of Christianity &
220 Bible 270 Christian church
Religious orders in church
221 Old Testament (Tanakh) 271 history
222 Historical books of Old Testament 272 Persecutions in church history
Doctrinal controversies &
223 Poetic books of Old Testament 273 heresies
History of Christianity in
224 Prophetic books of Old Testament 274 Europe
225 New Testament 275 History of Christianity in Asia
226 Gospels & Acts 276 History of Christianity in Africa
History of Christianity in North
227 Epistles 277 America
History of Christianity in South
228 Revelation (Apocalypse) 278 America
History of Christianity in other
229 Apocrypha & pseudepigrapha 279 areas
Christian denominations &
230 Christianity & Christian theology 280 sects
Early church & Eastern
231 God 281 churches
Centre for Distance Education 1.1.20 Acharya Nagarjuna University

232 Jesus Christ & his family 282 Roman Catholic Church
233 Humankind 283 Anglican churches
Protestants of Continental
234 Salvation & grace 284 origin
Presbyterian, Reformed &
235 Spiritual beings 285 Congregational
Baptist, Disciples of Christ &
236 Eschatology 286 Adventist
237 [Unassigned] 287 Methodist & related churches
238 Creeds & catechisms 288 [Unassigned]
239 Apologetics & polemics 289 Other denominations & sects
Christian moral & devotional
240 theology 290 Other religions
241 Christian ethics 291 [Unassigned]
242 Devotional literature 292 Greek & Roman religion
243 Evangelistic writings for individuals 293 Germanic religion
244 [Unassigned] 294 Religions of Indic origin
245 [Unassigned] 295 Zoroastrianism
246 Use of art in Christianity 296 Judaism
247 Church furnishings & articles 297 Islam, Babism & Bahai Faith
Christian experience, practice &
248 life 298 (Optional number)
Religions not provided for
249 Christian observances in family life 299 elsewhere

300
Public administration & military
300 Social sciences 350 science
301 Sociology & anthropology 351 Public administration
General considerations of public
302 Social interaction 352 administration
303 Social processes 353 Specific fields of public administration
Administration of economy &
304 Factors affecting social behavior 354 environment
305 Social groups 355 Military science
306 Culture & institutions 356 Infantry forces & warfare
307 Communities 357 Mounted forces & warfare
308 [Unassigned] 358 Air & other specialized forces
309 [Unassigned] 359 Sea forces & warfare
Social problems & services;
310 Collections of general statistics 360 associations
Social problems & social welfare in
311 [Unassigned] 361 general
312 [Unassigned] 362 Social welfare problems & services
313 [Unassigned] 363 Other social problems & services
314 General statistics of Europe 364 Criminology
315 General statistics of Asia 365 Penal & related institutions
316 General statistics of Africa 366 Associations
317 General statistics of North America 367 General clubs
318 General statistics of South America 368 Insurance
319 General statistics of other areas 369 Miscellaneous kinds of associations
Library Classification Practice 1.1.21 Introduction to Dewey Decimal..

320 Political science 370 Education

Schools & their activities; special
321 Systems of governments & states 371 education
322 Relation of state to organized groups 372 Elementary education
323 Civil & political rights 373 Secondary education
324 The political process 374 Adult education
325 International migration & colonization 375 Curricula
326 Slavery & emancipation 376 [Unassigned]
327 International relations 377 [Unassigned]
328 The legislative process 378 Higher education
329 [Unassigned] 379 Public policy issues in education
Commerce, communications &
330 Economics 380 transportation
331 Labor economics 381 Commerce
332 Financial economics 382 International commerce
333 Economics of land & energy 383 Postal communication
334 Cooperatives 384 Communications; telecommunication
335 Socialism & related systems 385 Railroad transportation
Inland waterway & ferry
336 Public finance 386 transportation
337 International economics 387 Water, air & space transportation
338 Production 388 Transportation; ground transportation
339 Macroeconomics & related topics 389 Metrology & standardization
340 Law 390 Customs, etiquette & folklore
341 Law of nations 391 Costume & personal appearance
342 Constitutional & administrative law 392 Customs of life cycle & domestic life
343 Military, tax, trade & industrial law 393 Death customs
344 Labor, social, education & cultural law 394 General customs
345 Criminal law 395 Etiquette (Manners)
346 Private law 396 [Unassigned]
347 Civil procedure & courts 397 [Unassigned]
348 Laws, regulations & cases 398 Folklore
349 Law of specific jurisdictions & areas 399 Customs of war & diplomacy
400

400 Language 450 Italian, Romanian & related languages

401 Philosophy & theory 451 Italian writing systems & phonology
402 Miscellany 452 Italian etymology
403 Dictionaries & encyclopedias 453 Italian dictionaries
404 Special topics 454 [Unassigned]
405 Serial publications 455 Italian grammar
406 Organizations & management 456 [Unassigned]
407 Education, research & related topics 457 Italian language variations
408 Kinds of persons treatment 458 Standard Italian usage
409 Geographic & persons treatment 459 Romanian & related languages
410 Linguistics 460 Spanish & Portuguese languages
411 Writing systems 461 Spanish writing systems & phonology
412 Etymology 462 Spanish etymology
413 Dictionaries 463 Spanish dictionaries
414 Phonology & phonetics 464 [Unassigned]
Centre for Distance Education 1.1.22 Acharya Nagarjuna University

415 Grammar 465 Spanish grammar

416 [Unassigned] 466 [Unassigned]
417 Dialectology & historical linguistics 467 Spanish language variations
418 Standard usage & applied linguistics 468 Standard Spanish usage
419 Sign languages 469 Portuguese
420 English & Old English 470 Italic languages; Latin
421 English writing system & phonology 471 Classical Latin writing & phonology
422 English etymology 472 Classical Latin etymology
423 English dictionaries 473 Classical Latin dictionaries
424 [Unassigned] 474 [Unassigned]
425 English grammar 475 Classical Latin grammar
426 [Unassigned] 476 [Unassigned]
427 English language variations 477 Old, postclassical & Vulgar Latin
428 Standard English usage 478 Classical Latin usage
429 Old English (Anglo-Saxon) 479 Other Italic languages
430 Germanic languages; German 480 Hellenic languages; classical Greek
431 German writing systems & phonology 481 Classical Greek writing & phonology
432 German etymology 482 Classical Greek etymology
433 German dictionaries 483 Classical Greek dictionaries
434 [Unassigned] 484 [Unassigned]
435 German grammar 485 Classical Greek grammar
436 [Unassigned] 486 [Unassigned]
437 German language variations 487 Preclassical & postclassical Greek
438 Standard German usage 488 Classical Greek usage
439 Other Germanic languages 489 Other Hellenic languages
440 Romance languages; French 490 Other languages
East Indo-European & Celtic
441 French writing systems & phonology 491 languages
Afro-Asiatic languages; Semitic
442 French etymology 492 languages
443 French dictionaries 493 Non-Semitic Afro-Asiatic languages
Altaic, Uralic, Hyperborean &
444 [Unassigned] 494 Dravidian
445 French grammar 495 Languages of East & Southeast Asia
446 [Unassigned] 496 African languages
447 French language variations 497 North American native languages
448 Standard French usage 498 South American native languages
449 Occitan & Catalan 499 Austronesian & other languages

500
Natural sciences &
500 mathematics 550 Earth sciences
Geology, hydrology &
501 Philosophy & theory 551 meteorology
502 Miscellany 552 Petrology
503 Dictionaries & encyclopedias 553 Economic geology
504 [Unassigned] 554 Earth sciences of Europe
505 Serial publications 555 Earth sciences of Asia
Organizations &
506 management 556 Earth sciences of Africa
Library Classification Practice 1.1.23 Introduction to Dewey Decimal..

Education, research & Earth sciences of North

507 related topics 557 America
Earth sciences of South
508 Natural history 558 America
Historical, geographic & Earth sciences of other
509 persons treatment 559 areas
510 Mathematics 560 Paleontology; paleozoology
General principles of Paleobotany; fossil
511 mathematics 561 microorganisms
512 Algebra 562 Fossil invertebrates
Fossil marine & seashore
513 Arithmetic 563 invertebrates
Fossil mollusks &
514 Topology 564 molluscoids
515 Analysis 565 Fossil arthropods
516 Geometry 566 Fossil chordates
Fossil cold-blooded
517 [Unassigned] 567 vertebrates; fossil fishes
518 Numerical analysis 568 Fossil birds
Probabilities & applied
519 mathematics 569 Fossil mammals
520 Astronomy & allied sciences 570 Life sciences; biology
Physiology & related
521 Celestial mechanics 571 subjects
Techniques, equipment &
522 materials 572 Biochemistry
Specific celestial bodies & Specific physiological
523 phenomena 573 systems in animals
524 [Unassigned] 574 [Unassigned]
Earth (Astronomical Specific parts of & systems
525 geography) 575 in plants
526 Mathematical geography 576 Genetics & evolution
527 Celestial navigation 577 Ecology
528 Ephemerides 578 Natural history of organisms
Microorganisms, fungi &
529 Chronology 579 algae
530 Physics 580 Plants (Botany)
Classical mechanics; solid Specific topics in natural
531 mechanics 581 history
Fluid mechanics; liquid Plants noted for
532 mechanics 582 characteristics & flowers
533 Gas mechanics 583 Dicotyledons
534 Sound & related vibrations 584 Monocotyledons
Light & infrared & ultraviolet
535 phenomena 585 Gymnosperms; conifers
536 Heat 586 Seedless plants
537 Electricity & electronics 587 Vascular seedless plants
538 Magnetism 588 Bryophytes
539 Modern physics 589 [Unassigned]
Centre for Distance Education 1.1.24 Acharya Nagarjuna University

540 Chemistry & allied sciences 590 Animals (Zoology)

Specific topics in natural
541 Physical chemistry 591 history
Techniques, equipment &
542 materials 592 Invertebrates
Marine & seashore
543 Analytical chemistry 593 invertebrates
544 [Unassigned] 594 Mollusks & molluscoids
545 [Unassigned] 595 Arthropods
546 Inorganic chemistry 596 Chordates
Cold-blooded vertebrates;
547 Organic chemistry 597 fishes
548 Crystallography 598 Birds
549 Mineralogy 599 Mammals
600

600 Technology 650 Management & auxiliary services

601 Philosophy & theory 651 Office services
Processes of written
602 Miscellany 652 communication
603 Dictionaries & encyclopedias 653 Shorthand
604 Special topics 654 [Unassigned]
605 Serial publications 655 [Unassigned]
606 Organizations 656 [Unassigned]
607 Education, research & related topics 657 Accounting

608 Inventions & patents 658 General management

Historical, geographic & persons
609 treatment 659 Advertising & public relations
610 Medicine & health 660 Chemical engineering
611 Human anatomy, cytology & histology 661 Industrial chemicals
612 Human physiology 662 Explosives, fuels & related products
613 Personal health & safety 663 Beverage technology
614 Incidence & prevention of disease 664 Food technology
615 Pharmacology & therapeutics 665 Industrial oils, fats, waxes & gases
616 Diseases 666 Ceramic & allied technologies
617 Surgery & related medical specialties 667 Cleaning, color & coating technologies
Gynecology, obstetrics, pediatrics &
618 geriatrics 668 Technology of other organic products
619 [Unassigned] 669 Metallurgy
620 Engineering & allied operations 670 Manufacturing
621 Applied physics 671 Metalworking & primary metal products
622 Mining & related operations 672 Iron, steel & other iron alloys
623 Military & nautical engineering 673 Nonferrous metals
624 Civil engineering 674 Lumber processing, wood products & cork
625 Engineering of railroads & roads 675 Leather & fur processing
626 [Unassigned] 676 Pulp & paper technology
627 Hydraulic engineering 677 Textiles
628 Sanitary & municipal engineering 678 Elastomers & elastomer products
629 Other branches of engineering 679 Other products of specific materials
Library Classification Practice 1.1.25 Introduction to Dewey Decimal..

630 Agriculture & related technologies 680 Manufacture for specific uses
631 Techniques, equipment & materials 681 Precision instruments & other devices
632 Plant injuries, diseases & pests 682 Small forge work (Blacksmithing)
633 Field & plantation crops 683 Hardware & household appliances
634 Orchards, fruits & forestry 684 Furnishings & home workshops
635 Garden crops (Horticulture) 685 Leather, fur goods & related products
636 Animal husbandry 686 Printing & related activities
637 Processing dairy & related products 687 Clothing & accessories
638 Insect culture 688 Other final products & packaging
639 Hunting, fishing & conservation 689 [Unassigned]
640 Home & family management 690 Buildings
641 Food & drink 691 Building materials
642 Meals & table service 692 Auxiliary construction practices
643 Housing & household equipment 693 Specific materials & purposes
644 Household utilities 694 Wood construction & carpentry
645 Household furnishings 695 Roof covering
646 Sewing, clothing & personal living 696 Utilities
647 Management of public households 697 Heating, ventilating & air-conditioning
648 Housekeeping 698 Detail finishing
649 Child rearing & home care of persons 699 [Unassigned]

700

700 The arts; fine & decorative arts 750 Painting & paintings
Techniques, equipment, materials &
701 Philosophy of fine & decorative arts 751 forms
702 Miscellany of fine & decorative arts 752 Color
703 Dictionaries of fine & decorative arts 753 Symbolism, allegory, mythology & legend
704 Special topics in fine & decorative arts 754 Genre paintings
Serial publications of fine & decorative
705 arts 755 Religion
706 Organizations & management 756 [Unassigned]
707 Education, research & related topics 757 Human figures
708 Galleries, museums & private collections 758 Other subjects
Historical, geographic & persons Historical, geographic & persons
709 treatment 759 treatment
710 Civic & landscape art 760 Graphic arts; printmaking & prints
711 Area planning 761 Relief processes (Block printing)
712 Landscape architecture 762 [Unassigned]
713 Landscape architecture of trafficways 763 Lithographic processes
714 Water features 764 Chromolithography & serigraphy
715 Woody plants 765 Metal engraving
Mezzotinting, aquatinting & related
716 Herbaceous plants 766 processes
717 Structures in landscape architecture 767 Etching & drypoint
718 Landscape design of cemeteries 768 [Unassigned]
719 Natural landscapes 769 Prints
Photography, photographs & computer
720 Architecture 770 art
721 Architectural structure 771 Techniques, equipment & materials
Centre for Distance Education 1.1.26 Acharya Nagarjuna University

722 Architecture to ca. 300 772 Metallic salt processes

723 Architecture from ca. 300 to 1399 773 Pigment processes of printing
724 Architecture from 1400 774 Holography
725 Public structures 775 Digital photography
726 Buildings for religious purposes 776 Computer art (Digital art)
727 Buildings for education & research 777 [Unassigned]
728 Residential & related buildings 778 Fields & kinds of photography
729 Design & decoration 779 Photographs
730 Plastic arts; sculpture 780 Music
731 Processes, forms & subjects of sculpture 781 General principles & musical forms
732 Sculpture to ca. 500 782 Vocal music
733 Greek, Etruscan & Roman sculpture 783 Music for single voices; the voice
734 Sculpture from ca. 500 to 1399 784 Instruments & instrumental ensembles
735 Sculpture from 1400 785 Ensembles with one instrument per part
736 Carving & carvings 786 Keyboard & other instruments
737 Numismatics & sigillography 787 Stringed instruments
738 Ceramic arts 788 Wind instruments
739 Art metalwork 789 (Optional number)
740 Drawing & decorative arts 790 Recreational & performing arts
741 Drawing & drawings 791 Public performances
742 Perspective 792 Stage presentations
743 Drawing & drawings by subject 793 Indoor games & amusements
744 [Unassigned] 794 Indoor games of skill
745 Decorative arts 795 Games of chance
746 Textile arts 796 Athletic & outdoor sports & games
747 Interior decoration 797 Aquatic & air sports
748 Glass 798 Equestrian sports & animal racing
749 Furniture & accessories 799 Fishing, hunting & shooting

800
Italian, Romanian & related
800 Literature & rhetoric 850 literatures
801 Philosophy & theory 851 Italian poetry
802 Miscellany 852 Italian drama
803 Dictionaries & encyclopedias 853 Italian fiction
804 [Unassigned] 854 Italian essays
805 Serial publications 855 Italian speeches
806 Organizations & management 856 Italian letters
Education, research & related
807 topics 857 Italian humor & satire
Rhetoric & collections of
808 literature 858 Italian miscellaneous writings
809 History, description & criticism 859 Romanian & related literatures
810 American literature in English 860 Spanish & Portuguese literatures
811 American poetry in English 861 Spanish poetry
812 American drama in English 862 Spanish drama
813 American fiction in English 863 Spanish fiction
814 American essays in English 864 Spanish essays
815 American speeches in English 865 Spanish speeches
816 American letters in English 866 Spanish letters
Library Classification Practice 1.1.27 Introduction to Dewey Decimal..

American humor & satire in

817 English 867 Spanish humor & satire
American miscellaneous
818 writings 868 Spanish miscellaneous writings
819 (Optional number) 869 Portuguese literature
English & Old English
820 literatures 870 Italic literatures; Latin literature
821 English poetry 871 Latin poetry
822 English drama 872 Latin dramatic poetry & drama
823 English fiction 873 Latin epic poetry & fiction
824 English essays 874 Latin lyric poetry
825 English speeches 875 Latin speeches
826 English letters 876 Latin letters
827 English humor & satire 877 Latin humor & satire
828 English miscellaneous writings 878 Latin miscellaneous writings
Literatures of other Italic
829 Old English (Anglo-Saxon) 879 languages
Literatures of Germanic Hellenic literatures; classical
830 languages 880 Greek
831 German poetry 881 Classical Greek poetry
Classical Greek dramatic poetry
832 German drama 882 & drama
Classical Greek epic poetry &
833 German fiction 883 fiction
834 German essays 884 Classical Greek lyric poetry
835 German speeches 885 Classical Greek speeches
836 German letters 886 Classical Greek letters
837 German humor & satire 887 Classical Greek humor & satire
German miscellaneous Classical Greek miscellaneous
838 writings 888 writings
839 Other Germanic literatures 889 Modern Greek literature
Literatures of Romance
840 languages 890 Literatures of other languages
East Indo-European & Celtic
841 French poetry 891 literatures
Afro-Asiatic literatures; Semitic
842 French drama 892 literatures
Non-Semitic Afro-Asiatic
843 French fiction 893 literatures
Altaic, Uralic, Hyperborean &
844 French essays 894 Dravidian
Literatures of East & Southeast
845 French speeches 895 Asia
846 French letters 896 African literatures
847 French humor & satire 897 North American native literatures
848 French miscellaneous writings 898 South American native literatures
849 Occitan & Catalan literatures 899 Austronesian & other literatures

900

900 History & geography 950 History of Asia; Far East

Centre for Distance Education 1.1.28 Acharya Nagarjuna University

901 Philosophy & theory 951 China & adjacent areas

902 Miscellany 952 Japan
Arabian Peninsula & adjacent
903 Dictionaries & encyclopedias 953 areas
904 Collected accounts of events 954 South Asia; India
905 Serial publications 955 Iran
906 Organizations & management 956 Middle East (Near East)
Education, research & related
907 topics 957 Siberia (Asiatic Russia)
908 Kinds of persons treatment 958 Central Asia
909 World history 959 Southeast Asia
910 Geography & travel 960 History of Africa
911 Historical geography 961 Tunisia & Libya
912 Atlases, maps, charts & plans 962 Egypt & Sudan
Geography of & travel in ancient
913 world 963 Ethiopia & Eritrea
Northwest African coast & offshore
914 Geography of & travel in Europe 964 islands
915 Geography of & travel in Asia 965 Algeria
916 Geography of & travel in Africa 966 West Africa & offshore islands
Geography of & travel in North
917 America 967 Central Africa & offshore islands
Geography of & travel in South Southern Africa; Republic of South
918 America 968 Africa
Geography of & travel in other
919 areas 969 South Indian Ocean islands
920 Biography, genealogy & insignia 970 History of North America
921 (Optional number) 971 Canada
922 (Optional number) 972 Middle America; Mexico
923 (Optional number) 973 United States
924 (Optional number) 974 Northeastern United States
925 (Optional number) 975 Southeastern United States
926 (Optional number) 976 South central United States
927 (Optional number) 977 North central United States
928 (Optional number) 978 Western United States
929 Genealogy, names & insignia 979 Great Basin & Pacific Slope region
History of ancient world to ca.
930 499 980 History of South America
931 China to 420 981 Brazil
932 Egypt to 640 982 Argentina
933 Palestine to 70 983 Chile
934 India to 647 984 Bolivia
Mesopotamia & Iranian Plateau
935 to 637 985 Peru
Europe north & west of Italy to
936 ca. 499 986 Colombia & Ecuador
937 Italy & adjacent territories to 476 987 Venezuela
938 Greece to 323 988 Guiana
Other parts of ancient world to
939 ca. 640 989 Paraguay & Uruguay
Library Classification Practice 1.1.29 Introduction to Dewey Decimal..

940 History of Europe 990 History of other areas

941 British Isles 991 [Unassigned]
942 England & Wales 992 [Unassigned]
943 Central Europe; Germany 993 New Zealand
944 France & Monaco 994 Australia
945 Italian Peninsula & adjacent islands 995 Melanesia; New Guinea
Iberian Peninsula & adjacent Other parts of Pacific;
946 islands 996 Polynesia
947 Eastern Europe; Russia 997 Atlantic Ocean islands
948 Scandinavia 998 Arctic islands & Antarctica
949 Other parts of Europe 999 Extraterrestrial worlds
Library Classification Practice 1.2.1 Subject Determination of the …

UNIT – I
Lesson 2

SUBJECT DETERMINATION OF THE

DOCUMENT

1.2.0 Aim and Objective

This lesson presents the overview of Dewey decimal classification and explain the
determination of specific subject of the document to be classified.

This lesson explain

- Salient features of DDC inaddition to what has been explained in the earlier
lesson
- the terms subject, specific subject and discipline. and
- The procedure to determine the subject of the document

Structure
1.2.1 Introduction
1.2.2 Overview of the Dewey Decimal Classification
1.2.3 Steps in Classifying Documents
[Link] Determination of the Specific Subject of a Document
[Link].1 Procedure for Determining the Specific Subject of a
Document
[Link].2 Other Sources for Determining the Subject of a .Book
[Link] Determining the Subject of a Work
[Link] Determining the Discipline of a Work
[Link] More Than One Subject in the Same Discipline
[Link] More Than One Discipline
[Link] Table of Last Resort
[Link] Multi Level Summaries
1.2.4Summing Up

1.2.1 Introduction

Library classification deals with sorting of documents basing on the subject and
assigning notation prescribed by the Classification Scheme used. There are broadly two types
Centre for Distance Education 1.2.2 Acharya Nagarjuna University

of classification schemes which you have already know from the study of earlier lesson.
Whatever the type of classification scheme used the first step to classify a document is
determining the subject of the document to be classified using the sources prescribed.. After
identification of the subject the relative notation is to be found using the index of the scheme.
Then the document is assigned with class number constructed as per the instructions given in
the schedules of the classification scheme.

So the classification process involves both intelligence and mechanical work.

Identification and determination of the subject of the document is intelligence work and
assigning the class number as per the rules of the scheme used is mechanical work. So
Classification of documents involve both art and craft.

1.2.2 Overview of the Dewey Decimal Classification

The DDC is built on sound principles that make it ideal as a general knowledge
organization tool: meaningful notation in universally recognized Arabic numerals, well- defined
categories, well-developed hierarchies, and a rich network of relationships among topics. In the
DDC, basic classes are organized by disciplines or fields of study. At the broadest level, the
DDC is divided into ten main classes, which together cover the entire world of knowledge. Each
main class is further divided into ten divisions, and each division into ten sections (not all the
numbers for the divisions and sections have been used).

The main structure of the DDC is presented in the DDC Summaries in the beginning of
volume 2. The first summary contains the ten main classes. The second summary contains the
hundred divisions. The third summary contains the thousand sections. The first and second
summaries are provided for browsing purposes, and the headings do not necessarily match the
name of the sections found in the schedules.

4.3 The ten main classes are:

000 Computers, information & general reference

100 Philosophy & psychology
200 Religion
300 Social sciences
400 Language
500 Science
600 Technology
700 Arts & recreation
800 Literature
900 History & geography

Class 000 is the most general class, and is used for works not limited to any one
specific discipline, e.g., encyclopedias, newspapers, general periodicals. This class is also
used for certain specialized disciplines that deal with knowledge and information, e.g.,
computer science, library and information science, journalism. Each of the other main classes
(100 - 900) comprises a major discipline or group of related disciplines.

Class 100 covers philosophy, paranormal phenomena, and psychology.

Library Classification Practice 1.2.3 Subject Determination of the …

Class 200 is devoted to religion. Both philosophy and religion deal with the ultimate
nature of existence and relationships, but religion treats these topics within the context of
revelation, deity, and worship.

Class 300 covers the social sciences. Class 300 includes sociology, anthropology,
statistics, political science, economics, law, public administration, social problems and
services, education, commerce, communications, transportation, and customs.

Class 400 comprises language, linguistics, and specific languages. Literature, which
is arranged by language, is found in 800.

Class 500 is devoted to the natural sciences and mathematics. The natural sciences
(500) describe and attempt to explain the world in which we live.

Class 600 is technology. Technology consists of utilizing the sciences to harness

the natural world and its resources for the benefits of humankind.

Class 700 covers the arts: art in general, fine and decorative arts, music, and
the performing arts. Recreation, including sports and games, is also classed in 700.

Class 800 covers literature, and includes rhetoric, prose, poetry, drama, etc.
Folk literature is classed with customs in 300.

Class 900 is devoted to history and geography. When a work is a story of events that
have transpired or an account of existing conditions in a particular place or region, it is
classed in 900. A history of a specific subject is classed with the subject.

Since the parts of the DDC are arranged by discipline, not subject, a subject may
appear in more than one class. For example, "clothing" has aspects that fall under several
disciplines. The psychological influence of clothing belongs in 155.95 as part of the discipline
of psychology; customs associated with clothing belong in 391 as part of the discipline of
customs; and clothing in the sense of fashion design belongs in 746.92 as part of the discipline
of the arts.

Notation

Arabic numerals are used to represent each class in the DDC. The first digit in each
three-digit number represents the main class. For example, 500 represents science. The
second digit in each three-digit number indicates the division. For example, 500 is used for
general works on the sciences, 510 for mathematics, 520 for astronomy, 530 for physics. The
third digit in each three-digit number indicates the section. Thus, 530 is used for general works
on physics, 531 for classical mechanics, 532 for fluid mechanics, 533 for gas mechanics. The
DDC uses the convention that no number should have fewer than three digits; zeros are used
to fill out numbers.

A decimal point, or dot, follows the third digit in a class number, after which division by
ten continues to the specific degree of classification needed. The dot is not a decimal point in
the mathematical sense, but a psychological pause to break the monotony of numerical digits
and to ease the transcription and copying of the class number. A number should never end in a
0 anywhere to the right of the decimal point.
Centre for Distance Education 1.2.4 Acharya Nagarjuna University

Principle of Hierarchy

Hierarchy in the DDC is expressed through structure and notation.

Structural hierarchy means that all topics (aside from the ten main classes) are part of all the
broader topics above them. The corollary is also true: whatever is true of the whole is true of the
parts. This important concept is called hierarchical force. Certain notes regarding the nature of a
class hold true for all the subordinate classes, including logically subordinate topics classed at
coordinate numbers. (For a discussion of notes with hierarchical force, see paragraphs 7.10 -
7.17 and 7.20 - 7.22.)

Because of the principle of hierarchical force, hierarchical notes are usually given
only once—at the highest level of application. For example, the scope note at 700 applies to
730, to 736, and to 736.4. The words "Description, critical appraisal . . ." found in the scope
note at 700 also govern the critical appraisal of carving in 736 Carving and carvings, and of
wood carving in 736.4 Wood. In order to understand the structural hierarchy, the classifier
must read up and down the schedules (and remember to turn the page).

Notational hierarchy is expressed by length of notation. Numbers at any given level are
usually subordinate to a class whose notation is one digit shorter; coordinate with a class whose
notation has the same number of significant digits; and super-ordinate to a class with numbers
one or more digits longer. The underlined digits in the following example demonstrate this
notational hierarchy:

600 Technology (Applied Sciences)

630 Agriculture and related technologies
636 Animal Husbandry
636.7 Dogs
636.8 Cats

"Dogs" and "Cats" are more specific than (i.e., are subordinate to) "Animal husbandry"; they are
equally specific as (i.e., are coordinate with) each other; and "Animal husbandry" is less specific
than (i.e., is super ordinate to) "Dogs" and "Cats."

Options

¾ Some devices are required to enable the DDC to serve needs beyond those
represented in the standard English-language edition. At a number of places in the
schedules and tables, options are provided to give emphasis to an aspect in a
library's collection not given preferred treatment in the standard notation. In some
cases, options are also suggested to provide shorter notation for the aspect.

¾ Options are provided throughout the Classification to emphasize jurisdiction,

ethnic or national group, language, topic, or other characteristic.

¾ Options described in notes appear in parentheses and begin with "Option:". Options
that apply to the full entry appear at the end of the entry; options to a specific
Library Classification Practice 1.2.5 Subject Determination of the …

instruction in the entry are indented under the appropriate note. For example, the
following option appears at the end of the entry for 420 - 490:

ƒ (Option B: To give local emphasis and a shorter number to a specific

language, place it first by use of a letter or other symbol, e.g., Arabic
language 4A0 [preceding 420], for which the base number is 4A.
Option A is described under 410)

¾ Some optional numbers are enumerated in the schedules and tables and appear in
parentheses in the number column. A special optional arrangement (222) - (224) for
books of the Bible as arranged in Tanakh appears as a subsection of the Manual
note for 221.
¾ Arrange-alphabetically and arrange-chronologically notes are not placed in
parentheses, but are also options. They represent suggestions only; the
material need not be arranged alphabetically or chronologically. An example of
an arrange- alphabetically note is found at 005.133 Specific programming
languages: "Arrange alphabetically by name of programming language, e.g.,
C++."
¾ Most of the time, the responsibility for implementing an option rests with the
local library. Libraries should weigh the value of using an option against the
loss in interoperability of numbers. The library will not be able to use numbers
assigned by other libraries, and other libraries will not be able to use the
optional numbers. In addition, unless the option is widely used in a region,
users may be confused by the alternate notation.

Close and Broad Classification

¾ The Dewey Decimal Classification provides the basic option of close versus broad
classification. Close classification means that the content of a work is specified by
notation to the fullest extent possible. Broad classification means that the work is
placed in a broad class by use of notation that has been logically abridged. For
example, a work on French cooking is classed closely at 641.5944 (641.59 Cooking
by place + 44 France from Table 2), or broadly at 641.5 (Cooking).

¾ A library should base its decision on close versus broad classification on the size of
its collection and the needs of its users. For example, a work on the sociology of
sibling relationships in Canadian society would be most usefully classed in
306.8750971 (306.875 Sibling relationships + 09 Geographic treatment from Table 1
+ 71 Canada from Table 2) in a research library or large public library. A small
school library might prefer to class the same work in the broader number (306.875)
without including the geographic facet in the notation. An engineering library might
prefer close classification for works in engineering, but broad classification for
disciplines outside science and technology.

¾ The classifier should never reduce the notation to less than the most specific three-
digit number (no matter how small the library's collection). A number also must
never be reduced so that it ends in a 0 anywhere to the right of the decimal point.

¾ One aid to logical abridgment of DDC numbers is the segmentation device

provided by the Decimal Classification Division of the Library of Congress and
some other centralized cataloging services.
Centre for Distance Education 1.2.6 Acharya Nagarjuna University

¾ The abridged edition of the Dewey Decimal Classification is another source for
broad classification. It is intended for libraries with collections of 20,000 volumes or
less.

1.2.3. STEPS IN CLASSIFYING DOCUMENTS

Classifying documents is both a science and an art. In fact a classifier is a matchmaker.
A classier has two tasks to perform;

1) To determine the specific subject of the document to be classified.

2) To assign appropriate notation from the schedules and tables to the specific
subject.

[Link] Determination of the Specific Subject of a Document

A document is an embodiment of knowledge and is classified in accordance with its

subject contents. It may be clearly noted that the class number is assigned to the subject of the
book and not to the book as a physical entity. Determining the subject of a document is an
intellectual task. It is an art. Flair in classifying depends upon your knowledge of different
subjects. Your efficiency in determining the specific subject of the book increases with
experience. That is why it is called an art. However the specific subject of a book can be
determined by the following procedure.

[Link].1 Procedure for Determining the Specific Subject of a Document

First of all read the title. Most of the titles, if these are plain and straight forward, are
indicative of the subject contents of the book. For example, `.`Human anatomy", "Cost
accountancy" and "History of Moghul India" are the titles clearly indicative of the subject of the
book.

Some titles are fanciful or symbolic of the subject content of the book. The subject is
not clear from such titles: For Example:

1) Asian Drama
2) City of Joy
3) I dare
4) Green Wisdom by Arthur Galston

The first is a book on economics, second a book on Calcutta, the third the biography of
an Indian woman police officer Kiran Bedi, the fourth is on plant biology. This can be fairly
known by the subtitle. A subtitle always clarifies or delimits the title. Sometimes a title though
clear of the subject is vague:
For example: Shakespeare India

The first book is a biography of William Shakespeare. The second book is on the
culture of India, mostly in photographs. Therefore, it is clear that titles may be deceptive,
misleading or inadequate to know the exact subject of the book. Therefore the wise man's
golden advice to the classifier is: Never classify by the title alone.
Library Classification Practice 1.2.7 Subject Determination of the …

[Link].2 Other Sources for Determining the Subject of a .Book

Blurb: Next to the title, read tine blurb of the book, i.e., the customary "About the Book"
feature given on the book jacket or outer cover. It provides a brief introduction to the subject,
its importance and its treatment in the book. It is indispensable for determining the subject of
the book.

Preface: Reading the preface is indispensable for knowing the subject of the book and
its scope and limitations in details. Some authors also give a conspectus of each chapter in the
preface. Every classifier must read it between the lines to know the scope and limitations of the
book.

Other parts of the book: If the preface does not help fully, then you must glance
through the foreward, if any, the table of contents, and the text of the book here and there
especially the introductory chapter. Also look at the index of the book. The published review of
the book surely helps in determining its subject. The last resort is to consult a subject expert.
These efforts will yield the subject of the book.

[Link] Determining the Subject of a Work

Classifying a work properly depends first upon determining the subject of the work in hand. A
key element in determining the subject is the author’s intent.

(A) The title is often a clue to the subject, but should never be the sole source of
analysis. For example, Who Moved My Cheese? is a work on coping with
change, not a work related to the culinary arts. Likewise, a title with specific
terms that are subdivisions of a field may in fact use such terms symbolically to
represent the broader topic. For example, titles containing terms like
chromosomes, DNA, double helix, genes, and genomes may use these terms
symbolically to represent the whole subject of biochemical genetics.

(B) The table of contents may list the main topics discussed. Chapter headings
may substitute for the absence of a table of contents. Chapter subheadings
often prove useful.

(C) The preface or introduction usually states the author's purpose. If a foreword is
provided, it often indicates the subject of the work and suggests the place of the
work in the development of thought on the subject. The book jacket or
accompanying material may include a summary of the subject content.

(D) A scan of the text itself may provide further guidance or confirm preliminary
subject analysis.

(E) Bibliographical references and index entries are sources of subject information.

(F) Cataloging copy from centralized cataloging services is often helpful by

providing subject headings, classification numbers, and notes. Such copy
appears in online services, and on the verso of the title page of many U.S.,
Australian, British, and Canadian books as part of Cataloging-in-Publication
(CIP) data. Data from these sources should be verified with the book in hand,
since the cataloging record is based on prepublication information. .
Centre for Distance Education 1.2.8 Acharya Nagarjuna University

(G) Occasionally, consultation of outside sources such as reviews, reference works,

and subject experts may be required to determine the subject of the work.

[Link] Determining the Discipline of a Work

After determining the subject, the classifier must then select the proper discipline, or
field of study, of the work.

The guiding principle of the DDC is that a work is classed in the discipline for which it is
intended, rather than the discipline from which the work derives. This enables works that are
used together to be found together. For example, a general work by a zoologist on agricultural
pest control should be classed in agriculture, not zoology, along with other works on agricultural
pest control.

Once the subject has been determined, and information on the discipline has been
found, the classifier will turn to the schedules. The summaries are a good means of mental
navigation. The headings and notes in the schedules themselves and the Manual provide much
guidance. The Relative Index may help by suggesting the disciplines in which a subject is
normally treated.

If the Relative Index is used, the classifier must still rely on the structure of the
Classification and various aids throughout to arrive at the proper place to classify a work. Even
the most promising Relative Index citations must be verified in the schedules; the schedules are
the only place where all the information about coverage and use of the numbers may be found.

[Link] More Than One Subject in the Same Discipline

A work may include multiple subjects treated separately or in relation to one another
from the viewpoint of a single discipline. Use the following guidelines in determining the best
placement for the work:

(A) Class a work dealing with interrelated subjects with the subject that is being
acted upon. This is called the rule of application, and takes precedence over any
other rule. For instance, class an analytical work dealing with Shakespeare's
influence on Keats with Keats. Similarly, class a work on the influence of the
Great Depression on 20th century American art with American art.

(B) Class a work on two subjects with the subject receiving fuller treatment.

(C) If two subjects receive equal treatment, and are not used to introduce or
explain one another, class the work with the subject whose number comes
first in the DDC schedules. This is called the first-of-two rule. For example, a
history dealing equally with the United States and Japan, in which the United
States is discussed first and is given first in the title, is classed with the
history of Japan because 952 Japan precedes 973 United States.

Sometimes, specific instructions are given to use numbers that do not come first in the
schedules. For example, at 598, the note "class comprehensive works on warm-blooded
vertebrates in 599" tells the classifier to ignore the first-of-two rule and class a work on birds
Library Classification Practice 1.2.9 Subject Determination of the …

(598) and mammals (599) in 599, which is the comprehensive number for warm-blooded
vertebrates.

Also disregard the first-of-two rule when the two topics are the two major subdivisions
of a subject. For example, collection systems (628.142) and distribution systems (628.144)
taken together constitute 628.14 Collection and distribution systems. Works covering both of
these topics are classed in 628.14 (not 628.142).

Class a work on three or more subjects that are all subdivisions of a broader subject in
the first higher number that includes them all (unless one subject is treated more fully than the
others). This is called the rule of three. For example, a history of Portugal (946.9), Sweden
(948.5), and Greece (949.5) is classed with the history of Europe (940).

(D) Subdivisions beginning with zero should be avoided if there is a choice

between 0 and 1–9 at the same point in the hierarchy of the notation.
Similarly, subdivisions beginning with 00 should be avoided when there is a
choice between 00 and 0. This is called the rule of zero. For example, a
biography of an American Methodist missionary in China belongs in 266
Missions. The content of the work can be expressed in three different
numbers:

266.0092 biography of a missionary

266.02373051 foreign missions of the United States in China
266.76092 biography of a United Methodist Church missionary

The last number is used since it has no zero at the fourth position.

[Link] More Than One Discipline

Treating a subject from the point of view of more than one discipline is different from
treating several subjects in one discipline. Use the following guidelines in determining the
best placement for the work:

1. Use the interdisciplinary number provided in the schedules or Relative Index

if one is given. An important consideration in using such an interdisciplinary
number is that the work must contain significant material on the discipline in
which the interdisciplinary number is found. For example, 305.231 (a
sociology number) is provided for interdisciplinary works on child
development. However, if a work that is interdisciplinary with respect to child
development gives little emphasis to social development and a great deal of
emphasis to the psychological and physical development of the child (155.4
and 612.65, respectively), class it in

155.4 (the first number in the schedules of the next two obvious choices). In
short, interdisciplinary numbers are not absolute; they are to be used only when
applicable. (For a discussion of interdisciplinary numbers, see paragraphs 7.17,
7.20 - 7.21, and 11.8 - 11.9.)

2. Class works not given an interdisciplinary number in the discipline given the
fullest treatment in the work. For example, a work dealing with both the
Centre for Distance Education 1.2.10 Acharya Nagarjuna University

scientific and the engineering principles of electrodynamics is classed in

537.6 if the engineering aspects are introduced primarily for illustrative
purposes, but in 621.31 if the basic scientific theories are only preliminary to
the author's exposition of engineering principles and practices.

3. When classifying interdisciplinary works, do not overlook the possibilities

of main class 000 Computers, information & general reference, e.g., 080
for a collection of interviews of famous people from various disciplines.

[Link] Table of Last Resort

When several numbers have been found for the work in hand, and each seems as good
as the next, the following table of last resort (in order of preference) may be used as a guideline
in the absence of any other rule:

Table of last resort

(1) Kinds of things

(2) Parts of things
(3) Materials from which things, kinds, or parts are made
(4) Properties of things, kinds, parts, or materials
(5) Processes within things, kinds, parts, or materials
(6) Operations upon things, kinds, parts, or materials
(7) Instrumentalities for performing such operations

For example, surveillance by border patrols could be classed in either 363.285 Border
patrols, or 363.232 Patrol and surveillance. Choose 363.285 since border patrols are a kind
of police service, while patrol and surveillance are processes performed by police services.

Do not apply this table or any other guideline if it appears to disregard the author's
intention and emphasis.

[Link] Multi Level Summaries

Summaries provide an overview of classes and save the time of a classifier in flipping
through the pages. At a glance the classifier is able to select the appropriate class. Such
summaries provide a view of the structure of the class. Summaries at lower levels have been
carried on in some densely detailed classes. They are called multi-level summaries. These
may comprise 4 or 5 or even 6 digited numbers. For Example:

The summaries of 615 Pharmacology and therapeutics

615.1 Drugs (Materia inedica)

615.2 Inorganic drugs
615.3 Organic drugs
615.4 Practical pharmacy
615.5 Therapeutics
615.6 Methods of medication
615.7 Pharmacodynamics
Library Classification Practice 1.2.11 Subject Determination of the …

615.8 Physical and other therapies

615.9 Toxicology (poisons and poisoning)

The subsection 615.7 Pharmacodynamics has its own summary (p. 860, Vol. 2):

615.71 Drugs affecting cardiovascular system

615.72 Drugs affecting respiratory system
615.73 Drugs affecting digestive system and metabolism
615.74 Drugs affecting lymphatic and glandular systems
615.75 Antipyretics (Febrifuges)
615.76 Drugs affecting urogenital system
615.77 Drugs affecting motor and integumentary systems
615.78 Drugs affecting nervous system

To repeat, the summaries printed in bold face in the centre of the page provide a good
overview of the sub-divisions of various levels of hierarchy. To arrive at the desired number, by
moving down the hierarchy a classifier has not to look through every subdivision, nor does he
has to flip through every page. These summaries may also be helpful to libraries which prefer
broader numbers.

Three major summaries and numerous multi-level summaries are of immense help in
locating the desired number efficiently.

1.2.4 Summing Up
This lesson explained some of the salient features of DDC under “Over view of DDC’. It
also explained the determination of the subject of the document to be classified and the
procedure to be followed to classify a document.
Library Classification Practice 1.3.1 Relative Index and Manual

UNIT - I
Lesson 3
RELATIVE INDEX AND MANUAL
STRUCTURE

1.3.1. Introduction
1.3.2. The Relative Index
[Link] Scope of the Relative Index
[Link] Organisation of Relative Index
[Link] Arrangement and Format of the Relative Index
[Link] Interdisciplinary Numbers
[Link] Terms Included in the Relative Index
[Link] Terms Not Included in the Relative Index
1.3.3. Manual
1.3.4. Summary

1.3.1 Introduction
DDC is a classification by discipline. It means that subjects are classified in the context
of a discipline. In the schedules and in the various auxiliary tables all the concepts and subjects
have been arranged logically in their whole part relationship. That is also known as a systematic
arrangement proceeding from the general to the specific. To locate a desired subject and its
class number in the schedules, at least a preliminary knowledge of its position in the universe of
knowledge is necessary. In other words we should know the discipline. It is very difficult for any
person to have even a preliminary knowledge of all the subjects in the universe of knowledge.
Therefore all persons, whatever their knowledge, have to use at one time or the other a key to
the schedules. This key is the index called the Relative Index in DDC. A classifier may use the
Index for reasons which have been explained below.

Place of Some Subjects in DDC is Illogical

In DDC the position of some subjects is not `pro logical or as per universal consensus
among scholars. Some misplacement in the original plan of 1873-1876 continues to be so. At
later stages some new subjects have been adjusted here and there where no vacant numbers
available at their appropriate places. Now nobody defends the system for its logical structure.
As a result, the scheme has now a distorted structure. The number of illogically placed subjects
increases with new editions. Therefore, sometimes even a systematic approach to the
schedules may fail to locate a class number.
Centre for Distance Education 1.3.2 Acharya Nagarjuna University

Limited Knowledge of Classifiers

Besides the illogical structure of DDC, a classifier at times may not understand the
subject of the book to be classified. The term may be new to him or the classifier may
understand the subject but may not know of its location in the overall system. Let us consider
the example of the subject of "Birthday Cards". At first one may not even understand to which
Main Class it may belong. Some classes such as engineering are too crammed with topics to
locate the desired subject easily. For these reasons, at times the DDC Schedules (Volumes 2)
look like an impregnable fort. In some cases the hierarchical ladder leads to false ends or blind
alleys. There seems no way to break open the schedules to reach the desired subject. In such a
frustating situation, the Relative Index provides a royal road to the desired subject in the
schedules.

1.3.2. The Relative Index

The index is called the Relative Index. The approach of the Relative Index is entirely
opposite to the approach of the schedules. In the Relative Index all the entries have been
arranged in an alphabetical sequence. But more importantly, the disciplines are scattered by
subjects whereas in the schedules the subjects are scattered by the discipline. Thus the
Relative Index brings at one place all the related aspects of a subject scattered in the schedules
and tables (Volumes 1,2,3,). Its approach is, thus, complementary to that of the schedules.

This index is called relative because it shows a term and its various aspects in relation to
one another. Take for example, the subject, "Birth". It may have various aspects scattered in the
schedules. Some of its aspects such as customs, literature, obstetrics etc., are shown in the
following simplified entry from the Relative Index (p. 70).

Birth
Customs
Etiqette
Folklore
Sociology
Literature
Obstetrics

So, all the aspects of this subject, otherwise scattered in the schedules, have been
collected at one point through relative index. This will enable the classifier to study a given topic
from different angles and see its ramifications.

[Link] SCOPE OF THE RELATIVE INDEX

The Index consists of the following terms in a single alphabetical sequence:

1 All the key terms/concepts in the schedules.

2 All the examples and illustrations given under entries.
3 Some of the compound concepts which can be obtained by number
building notes.
4 All the concepts/entries given in all the seven auxiliary tables 1-7 (in
Volume 1).
5 Cross-Reference entries for synonymous terms, and cross-reference to
the related concepts, i.e., see and see also entries.
Library Classification Practice 1.3.3 Relative Index and Manual

The Index cannot be expected to contain the names of all persons, cities, organisations,
minerals, plants; animals, chemical compounds, drugs, manufactured articles, and similar
entities. Therefore, for specific names we should not consult the index, For example, if our title
is "A Biography of Pandit Ravi Shanker", it will not be fruitful to look into the Index for Ravi
Shanker. Instead we should look under the subject of biography, namely, musicians, biography.
Similarly, if our titles for classification are the Indian Library Association or Jawaharlal Nehru
University, we should not try to look up these names in the Index. We should rather look under
"library associations" and "universities" respectively.

[Link] ORGANISATIOIN OF RELATIVE INDEX

The Relative Index is so named because it relates subjects to disciplines. In the

schedules, subjects are distributed among disciplines; in the Relative Index, subjects are
arranged alphabetically, with terms identifying the disciplines in which they are treated sub
arranged alphabetically under them. For example:

Hospitals 362.11
accounting 657.832 2
animal husbandry 636.0832
architecture 725.51
armed forces 355.72
Civil War (United States) 973.776
landscape architecture 712.7
law 344.03211
liability law 346.031
social theology 206.76211
Christianity 261.83211
social welfare 362.11
United States Revolutionary War 973.376
World War I 940.476
World War II 940.5476
see also Health services

In some cases the term implies rather than states the discipline. In the example above,
the discipline of architecture is listed, but the discipline of military science is implied by "armed
forces."

The Relative Index is primarily an index to the DDC as a system. It includes most terms
found in the schedules and tables, and terms with literary warrant for concepts represented by
the schedules and tables. The Relative Index is not exhaustive. If the term sought is not found,
the classifier should try a broader term, or consult the schedules and tables directly. The
schedules and tables should always be consulted before a number found in the Relative Index
is applied.
Centre for Distance Education 1.3.4 Acharya Nagarjuna University

[Link] Arrangement and Format of the Relative Index

A. Index entries are arranged alphabetically word by word, e.g., Birth order precedes
Birthday. Terms indented below the main headings are alphabetized in one group even
though the may be a mixture of disciplines, topical subheadings, and words that, when
combined with main heading form phrases or inverted phrases. Terms qualified by
words in parenthesis file following words that are not so qualified. Initials and acronyms
are entered without punctuation and are filed as if spelled as one word. Hyphens are
ignored and treated as a space.

Observe the order of entries to understand the above explanation to understand the
method of entries in the relative index of DDC.
E.g. Mercury (Element) 669.71
Chemistry 546.663
Mining 622.3454
Toxicology 615.925663
Mercury (Planet) 523.41
Mercury (Plant) 583.95
Mercury Project 629.454
=====================
L.E.D (Diode) 621.381522
L.O.D 384.558

=====================
Nyiha Language 496.391
Nyika (Nika) Language 496.395
Nyika (Nyiha) Language 496.391
Nyika-Safwa Language 496.391
Nyika-Taita Language 496.395

B. Class numbers are listed in groups of three digits for ease of reading and copying. The
spaces are not part of the numbers and do not represent convenient places to abridge
the number.

C. See-also references are used for synonyms and for references to broader terms (but
only when three or more new numbers will be found at the synonym or broader term),
and for references to related terms (which may provide only one or two new numbers).

D. Numbers drawn from Tables 1 - 7 are prefixed by T1 through T7.

Eg.
Young Adults 305.235
T1 --083 5
T7 --055

[Link] Interdisciplinary Numbers

The first class number displayed in an index entry (the un indented term) is the
number for interdisciplinary works. If the entry term appears in a table, the table number
is listed next with prefix of table number, followed by other aspects of the term. The
Library Classification Practice 1.3.5 Relative Index and Manual

discipline of the interdisciplinary number may be repeated as a subentry if the discipline

is not clear. For example:

Adult education 374

T1 —0715
law 344.074
public Finance 379.114
law 344.076 85

Daughters 3.6.874
T-1 -085 4
T-7 -044 1
Family Relationship 306.874

¾ Interdisciplinary numbers are not provided for all topics in the Relative Index. They are
omitted when the index entry is ambiguous, does not have a disciplinary focus, or lacks
literary warrant. In such cases, there is no number opposite the un indented entry. For
example:

Coagulation
blood
human physiology 612.115

water supply treatment 628.162

[Link] Terms Included in the Relative Index

¾ The Relative Index contains most terms found in the headings and notes of the
schedules and tables, and synonyms and terms with literary warrant for concepts
represented by the schedules and tables. The Relative Index also contains terms for the
broad concepts covered in Manual notes.

¾ The following types of names from Table 2 Geographic Areas are included in the
Relative Index: (A) names of countries; (B) names of the states and provinces of most
countries; (C) names of the counties of the United States; (D) names of capital cities and
other important municipalities; and (E) names of certain important geographic features.

¾ Also included in the Relative Index are the personal names of the following groups of
persons: heads of state used to identify historical periods, e.g., Louis XIV; founders or
revealers of religions, e.g., Muhammad; initiators of schools of thought when used to
identify the school, e.g., Smith, Adam.

¾ Place names and other proper names are generally given in the form specified by the
second edition, 2002 revision, of the Anglo-American Cataloguing Rules (AACR2),
based on the names established in the Library of Congress authority files. If the AACR2
form is not the common English name, an entry is also included under the familiar form
Centre for Distance Education 1.3.6 Acharya Nagarjuna University

of the name.
¾ Plants and animals are indexed under their scientific and common names.

¾ The choice of singular form versus plural form follows ISO 999:1996,
Guidelines for the content, organization and presentation of indexes. Count nouns are
generally in the plural; noncount nouns and abstract concepts are generally in the
singular. Parts of the body are in the plural only when more than one occurs in a fully
formed organism (e.g., ears, hands, nose). Plants and animals follow scientific
convention in choice of singular form versus plural form, with the decision based on
whether the taxonomic class has more than one member (e.g., Horses, Lion, Lipizzaner
horse). Where usage varies across disciplines, the index entry reflects the form
preferred in the discipline where interdisciplinary works are classified.

[Link] Terms Not Included in the Relative Index

Terms usually not included in the Relative Index are:

o Phrases beginning with the adjectival form of countries, languages, nationalities,

religions, e.g., English poetry, French cooking, Italian architecture, and Hindu Prayer
Books.

o Phrases that contain general concepts represented by standard subdivisions such

as education, statistics, laboratories, and management; e.g., Art education,
Educational statistics, Medical laboratories, Bank management.

o When there is strong literary warrant for such a phrase heading as a sought term, it
may be included in the Relative Index, e.g., English literature. When the phrase
heading is a proper name or provides the only form of access to the topic, it may
also be included, e.g., English Channel, French horns, Amharic literature.

1.3.3. Manual
The most striking change in DDC 20th edition is inclusion of a Manual to guide the
classifier. The DDC started publishing manual as separate book along with DDC 19th edition.
DDC 2oth edition includes manual in its 4th volume starting from page number 731. The manual
describes the policies and practices of the Dewey Decimal Classification Division of the Library
of Congress. The manual offers advice on classifying difficult areas and explains how to choose
between related numbers. It helps the classifier resolve problems and applies DDC with greater
consistency.

The manual is arranged in numerical order of the tables and schedules For certain
classes there are several notes which are sub arranged in the following sequence:
a) Notes on problems common to more than one number (the notes for
numbers linked by “-“ or “and”, e.g. 580-590 or 380.1 and 381, 382)
b) Notes on problems involving only one number (or a single number and its
sub divisions).
c) Notes on differentiating numbers (the notes linked by “vs.,” e.g. 300 vs.
600)

These notes may contain sections on specific problems. E.g. the treatment of adaptations in
Library Classification Practice 1.3.7 Relative Index and Manual

800 literature.

1.3.4. Summary

This lesson explained the use of relative index and manual given in the 20th edition of DDC.
It clearly explained with examples how the entries are listed in the index and about their usage
as demanded by the subject content of the document being classified. The manual given at the
end of the 4th volume of DDC guides the classifier to resolve the problem in assigning numbers
and achieve consistency.
Library Classification Practice 1.4.1 Class Number Building Practices

Lesson – 4

CLASS NUMBER BUILDING PRACTICES

1.4.0 Aim and Objective

This lesson suggests techniques and explains the procedure to build class numbers to
the documents to be classified basing on Dewey Decimal Classification.

Study of this lesson enables the student to know how to construct class number for a
book to be classified basing on the rules and regulations stipulated by DDC. Different
techniques employed by DDC to construct the class number for the documents are also
explained.

STRUCTURE
1.4.1 Introduction
1.4.2 Class number building
1.4.3 Class number building for simple and specific subjects
1.4.4 Synthesis of class numbers
[Link] Base number
[Link] Types of Synthesis
[Link] Examples
1.4.5 Summary
1.4.6 References

1.4.1 Introduction

The task of the classifier is to classify the documents basing on certain scheme of
classification adopted by the library. So the classifier should acquire complete knowledge of the
structure, principles and features of the classification scheme. This Unit deals with Dewey
Decimal Classification. This lesson explains the features and guiding principles in constructing
the class number for the documents.

The first step to classify the document is to analyse the subject of the document basing
on title or contents or preface etc. Its form, point of view of its treatment etc are to be
determined. The common words in the title such as introduction, fundamentals, of, an, the etc
are to ignored while analyzing the title of the document. Then the analysed parts are to be
translated into the notation of the scheme. Let us see the procedure to be followed in class
number building.
Centre for Distance Education 1.4. 2 Acharya Nagarjuna University

1.4.2 Class Number Building

Class number building means identifying, constructing and assigning the notation of the
scheme to represent the subject of the document to be classified. According to DDC as you its
structure from the earlier lessons, each document will fit into one of the main classes, divisions,
sections enumerated by the scheme. DDC followed pure notation of Arabic numbers and
treated the numbers as ordinal numbers without any mathematical value though decimal point is
used after three digits. So the bare minimum digits to represent a document are three digits.
Even though 53 is for physics it is represented by 530 with additional zero.

Identifying the class number for the subject of the document may be through relative
index. An experienced classifier can approach the schedule concerned directly and find the
number. Again depending up on the form, approach etc of the document being classified
numbers from other parts of the schedule or tables are to be added to the schedule number by
the instructions given in the schedule. This is known as construction of number.

1.4.3 NUMBER BUILDING FOR SIMPLE AND SPECIFIC SUBJECTS

DDC is basically an enumerative scheme. It provides ready made numbers to most of

the simple and compound subjects. Simple subjects and many specific subjects have ready
made class numbers in the schedule. Following are some of the examples to illustrate the
availability of ready made numbers in the schedule:

Library Classification 025.42

Child Psychology 155.4
Shivaism 294.5513
A textbook of Urban Communities 307.76
Fundamentals of Solar energy 331.4.7923
A text book of Zoology 590
Selection of employees 658.3112
Swimming for fitness and fun 797.21
Telugu literature 894.827
The reign of Jawaharlal Nehru 954.042

Self Check exercises -1

(A) Find out the subjects of the following class numbers in DDC
a) 070.49
b) 155.532
c) 370.113
d) 530.42
e) 652.307
(b) Classify the following titles:
a) Plant Physiology
b) Magnetism
c) Import policy
d) Income Tax Rules in India
e) Indin Pharmacopea
Library Classification Practice 1.4.3 Class Number Building Practices

1.4.4 SYNTHESIS OF CLASS NUMBER

Unlike the subjects illustrated above some subjects are multi faceted. In such cases
DDC follows combination of numbers representing different subjects or ideas. This kind of
combination is called “syntheses”. Synthesis of notation means number building. Syntheses of
notation can be achieved according to instructions or directions of different kinds of notes given
at the respective class numbers in the schedules.

DDC indicated the base number to construct number for the multi faceted subjects. In
the absence of indication of base number, the class number, that is, the significant notation of
the class is to be used as it is.

[Link] BASE NUMBER

DDC has provided base number as a part in a sequence of numbers. It does not change
but remains the same in each member of the sequence. Instructions are given to add digits from
the tables or from another sequence in the schedules to the base number. Occasionally the
base number is less than three digits or more than three digits.

Examples
820 English literature
82 is the base number for English
894.827 Base number as well as schedule number for Telugu literature
9 base number for ‘history’
95 base number for ‘History of Asia’
954 base number for ‘history of India’

Through out the schedules of DDC where ever the “add” instruction is given base
number is clearly stated in the accompanying note.

[Link] TYPES OF SYNTHESIS

Many kinds of multiple syntheses with the help of “add” instruction are provided in the
schedules of DDC. Some times the facet indicator “0” (zero) is used to interpose between two
numbers to be added as per instruction when required. The different kinds of syntheses include:
I. Combining two main classes given in the schedules as per instructions given
under the host main class.
II. Combining main class number and part of another main class number in the
schedule according to the instructions given under the host main class.
III. Combining a main class with the parts of more than one main class in the
schedules as per instructions given under the host main class.
IV. Use of general aspects common to many subjects listed under the’ centered
headings’ here and there in the schedules.
V. Use of notations from an auxiliary tables or combination of notation from two
different tables with appropriate class numbers of the schedules.
The above listed of syntheses are explained with examples under each kind.
Centre for Distance Education 1.4. 4 Acharya Nagarjuna University

[Link] EXAMPLES TO ILLUSTRATE DIFFERENT KINDS OF SYNTHESIS

The following examples illustrate the use of above kinds of synthesis of class numbers.
The examples for synthesis of numbers from tables are dealt in the lessons discussed about
tables of DDC.

I. Examples of combination of two main classes given in schedule as per

instructions given under the host main class:

a) Classification of books on Zoology

025.46 classification of specific disciplines and subjects.
Add to base number 025.46 notation [Link] means any
number from the schedules can be added
591 class number for ‘Zoology’

025 + 591 = 025.465 91

b) Reporting Games News

070.4 Journalism
070.44 Features and special topics
070.449 Specific subjects
Add to base number 070.449 notation 001-999.
796 Sports and games
070.449 + 796 = 070.449 796

c) Unemployment in Library profession

331.137 81 unemployment in specific industries and occupations other than
extractive, manufacturing
027 General libraries etc.
331.137 81 + 027 = 331.137 810 27

d) Strikes in Hospitals
331.892 81 strikes in specific industries and occupations other than extractive,
manufacturing, construction
Add to base number 331.89281 notation 001-999.
362.11 Hospitals
331.892 81 + 362.11 = 331.892 813 621 1

e) Tourist industry
338.47 secondary industries
Add to base number 338.47 notation 001-999
910 Geography and travel (base number 91)
338.47 + 91 = 338.479 1

f) Student organizations in Social Work

371.84 student organizations in specific subjects
Add to base number 371.84 notation 001-999
361.3 Social work
371.84 + 361.3 = 371.843 613
Library Classification Practice 1.4.5 Class Number Building Practices

g) Curriculum in Biotechnology
375.05-.99 curriculums and courses of study in other specific subjects
Add to base number 375 notation 050-999
660.6 Biotechnology
375 + 660.6 = 375.660 6

h) Cotton trade
380.14 Trade of specific commodities and services
380.141 Products of agriculture
(Add to base number 380.141 the numbers following 63 in 633-638)
631.4.51 Cotton
380.141 + 631.4.51 = 380.141 351

i) Domestic trade of Cotton

381 Domestic trade
381.45 Specific commodities and services…
Add to base number 381.4 the numbers following380.14 in
380.141-380.145
380.141 351 Cotton trade (AS derived in the above example)
381.4 + 1351 (for cotton trade after omitting 380.14 by direction) = 381.41351

j) Photography of Marriage
778.538 Photography of specific subjects
Add to base number 778.538 notation 001-999
306.81 Marriage
778.538 + 306.81 = 778.538 306 81

II. Examples of combinations of a main class with a part of another main class according
to the instructions given under the host main class:

a) Bibliography of Programs for Super computers

011.77 General bibliographies of works having computer programs
Add to base number 011.77 the numbers following 005.3 in
005.31-005.39
005.31 Programs for super computers
011.77 + 1 = 011.771

b) Psychology of Blind students

155.45 psychologies of exceptional children
Add to base number 155.45 the numbers following 371.9 in
371.91-371.97
371.911 Blind students
155.45 + 11 = 155.451 1

c) Hindu Philosophy
181 oriental philosophies
181.04 – 09 philosophies of specific religions
Add to base number 181.0 the numbers following 29 in 294-299
294.5 Hinduism
181.0 + 45 = 181.045
Centre for Distance Education 1.4. 6 Acharya Nagarjuna University

d) Treatment of Animals in Hinduism

294.54 Religious experience, life, practice, moral theology in Hinduism
294.5486 Specific moral issues
Add to base number 294.5486 the numbers following 17 in 172-179
179.3 Treatment of animals
294.5486 + 93 = 294.5486 93

e) Price of wheat
338.1 Agriculture Economics
338.13 Financial aspects of agriculture
Add to base number 338.13 the numbers following 63 in 633-638
631.4.11 Wheat crop
338.13 + 311 = 338.133 11

f) Trade union law

344.01 Labour law
Add to base number 344.01 the numbers following 331 in 331.1-331.8
331.88 Trade unions
344.01 + 88 = 344.018 8

g) Trade union law in India

344.3-9 Labour law of specific jurisdictions
Add to base number 344 notation from table 2;then to the result
add the numbers following 344 in 344.001-344.099
-54 India (table 2)
344.54 Labour law in India
344.01 Labour law
Add to base number 344.01 the numbers following 331 in 331.1-
331.8
331.88 Trade unions
344 + 54 + 01 + 88 + 344.540188

h) Qualitative Analysis through Gas Chromatography

544 Qualitative Analysis
544.9 Other methods of qualitative analysis
544.92 Chromatographic analysis
Add to base number 544.92 the numbers following 54.089 in
541.4.0892-541.4.0896
541.4.0896 Gas Chromatography
544.92 + 6 = 544.926

i) Plant Pigments
581.19 Biophysics and biochemistry of plants
Add to base number 581.19 the numbers following 574.19 in 574.191-
574.192
574.19218 Pigments
581.19 + 218 = 581.192 18

j) Fungal diseases of Forest Plants

634.9 Forestry
634.96 injuries, diseases, pests, etc.
Library Classification Practice 1.4.7 Class Number Building Practices

Add to base number 634.96 the numbers following 632 in 632.1-632.9

632.4 Fungus diseases
634.96 + 4 = 634.964

III. Examples of combination of main class with parts of more than one main class in the
schedules as per instructions given under the host main class:

a) Buddhist view of women

294.33 Mythology, social theology etc.
Add to base number 294.33 the numbers following 291.1 in 291.13-
291.17
291.17834 Social structure
Add to base number 291.17834 the numbers following 305 in 305.2-305.8
305.4 women

294.33 + 7834 + 4 = 294.337 834 4

b) Rural Development
307.14 Development of communities
(the number is identified by asterisk, which directs to 307.1-307.3,
where add to instruction directs to add specific communities is
given)
1 Specific kinds of communities
Add to 1 the numbers following 307.7 in 307.72-307-77
307.72 Rural communities
307.14 + 1 + 2 = 307.141 2

c) Laws dealing with International Trade of cotton

341.4.08 regulation of trade
341.4.087 laws relating to foreign trade
341.4.0871-.0875 Specific commodities
Add to base number 341.4.087 the numbers following
380.14 in 380.141-380.145
380.141 trade of agricultural productions
380.141 - .145 specific products
Add to base number 380.141 the numbers
following 63 in 633-638
631.4.51 Cotton
341.4.087 + 1 + 351 = 341.4.087 135 1

d) Literary societies of Students in Higher Education

378 Higher Education
378.196 - .198 Physical plant, health and safety, the student
Add to base number 378.19 the numbers following 371 in
371.6-371.8
371.84 student organizations in specific fields
Add to base number 371.84 notation 001.999
800 Literature (base number is 8)
378.19 +84 + 8 = 378.198 48
Centre for Distance Education 1.4. 8 Acharya Nagarjuna University

e) Radiobiology of diseased plants

581.2 Pathology of plants
581.21 Pathological physiology
Add to base number 581.21 the numbers following 581 in
3581.11-581.19
581.19 Biophysics and biochemistry
Add to base number 581.19 the numbers following 574.19 in
574.191-574.192
574.1915 Radiobiology
581.21 + 19 + 15 = 581.211 915

f) Nutrition of Insects
595.7 Insects
595.701-.708 Process and parts
Add to base number 595.70 the numbers following 591 in 591.1-
591.8
591.1 Physiology of animals
591.11-.13 Circulation, respiration, nutrition, metabolism
Add to base number 591.1 the numbers following 574.1 in 574.11-
574.13
574.13 Nutrition
595.70 +1 + 3 = 595.701 3

g) Viral diseases of Turkey poultry

636.5 Poultry
636.592 turkeys
636.59201 – 59208 general principles
Add to base number 636.5920 the numbers
following 636.0 in 636.01-636.08
636.089 veterinary sciences
Add to base number 636.089 the numbers following 61 in 610-
619
616.925 Viral diseases
636.5920 + 89 + 6925 = 636.592 089 692 5

h) Air conditioning in Public Library buildings

697.93 Air conditioning
697.935 938 in specific types of buildings
Add to base number 697.93 the numbers following 72 in
725-728
727.8 Library buildings
727.82 General libraries
Add to base number 727.82 the numbers following 027 in 027.1-
027.8
027.4 Public libraries
697.93 + 78 + 4 = 697.937 84

IV. Examples of construction of numbers using general aspects common to many

subjects listed under the “Centered Headings”
a) Interpretation of Gospels
Library Classification Practice 1.4.9 Class Number Building Practices

226 gospels and acts

(the number is identified by asterisk, which directs to instructions
at 221-228)
001-08 Standard subdivisions and generalities
Add to 0 the numbers following 220 in 220.01-220.8
220.6 Interpretation and criticism

226 + 0 + 6 = 226.06

b) Community action against Narcotics addiction

362.293 Narcotics
(the number is identified by asterisk, which directs to instructions
at 362-363)
5 Social action
Add to 5 the numbers following 361 in 361.2-361.8
361.8 Community action

362.293 + 5 + 8 = 362.293 58

c) Public action against occupational and industrial hazards

361.4.11 occupational and industrial hazards
5 social action
361.6 public actions
31.4.1 + 5 + 6 = 361.4.115 6

d) Courses of study in social studies at elementary school level

372.83 social studies
043 courses of study
372.03 + 043 = 372.830 43

e) X-ray therapy for diseases of bronchi

616.23 bronchi
(the number is identified by asterisk, which directs to instructions
at 616.1-616.9)
062-069 other therapies
Add to 06 the numbers following 615.8 in 615.82-615.89
615.8422 X-ray therapy
616.23 + 06 + 422 + 616.230 642 2

f) Organic farming for Pineapples crop

634.774 Pineapples
(the number is identified by asterisk, which directs to instructions at 633-
635)
8 special cultivation methods
Add to 8 the numbers following 631.58 in 631.581-631.587
631.584 organic farming
634.774 + 8 + 4 = 634.774 84

g) Green manures for potato fields

635.21 Potatoes
Centre for Distance Education 1.4. 10 Acharya Nagarjuna University

(the number is identified by asterisk, which directs to

instructions at 633-.635)
633-635 Specific plant crops
89 fertilizers and soil conditioners
Add to 89 the numbers following 631.8 in 631.81-631.87
631.874 Green manure
635.21 +89 + 74 = 635.218 974

h) Respiratory organs of Amphibians

597.4 Amphibians
(this number is identified by asterisk, which directs to
instructions at 592-599.)
04 process and parts
Add to base number 04 the numbers following 591 in
591.1-591.8
591.11-.13 Circulation, respiration, nutrition, metabolism
Add to base number 591.1 the numbers following 574.1 in 574.11-
574.13
574.12 Respiration
597.4 + 04 + 1 + 2 + 597.404 12

V. Use of notations from an auxiliary table or combination of notation form two different
tables with the appropriate class numbers of the schedules:

The use of different numbers from tables to construct a class number for a given
document is clearly explained in the later lessons dealing with DDC tables.

1.4.5 Summary
This lesson introduced you to number building practices for simple and specific subjects
as well as syntheses of numbers for compound subjects. Class numbers in the schedule can be
extended by another number or a part of the number taken from the schedules or from any of
the seven auxiliary tables or a combination of the tables. ‘Add’ instructions are given at places
for synthesizing class numbers to represent the subject content of the document. Adding
numbers form the auxiliary tables is explained in detail in the following lessons.

1.4.6 References

1. Batty, C.D: An introduction to the nineteenth edition of the Dewey Decimal Classification.
2. London: Clive Bingley, 1981.
3. Albany, N.Y. : Dewey Decimal Classification and Relative Index. 19th edition.
4. Edited by Benjamin A Custer, Forest press, 1979.
5. Albany, N.Y.: Manual on the use of the Dewey decimal classification: 19th edition.
Forest press, 1982
6. Osborne, Jeanne: Dewey decimal classification: 19th edition: a study manual.
7. Littleton, Colo : Libraries unlimited, 1982.
Library Classification Practice 1.5.1 Use of Table 1 : Standard Subdivisions

Lesson – 5

Use of Table 1: Standard Subdivisions

1.5.0 Aims and objective

After reading and practicing this lesson, you can build the numbers having the isolates of
standard sub-divisions, which are given in the table -1 of volume 1 of Dewey decimal
classification.

STRUCTURE

1.5.1 Introduction
1.5.2 Identification of Standard Subdivisions
1.5.3 Adding Standard Subdivision Numbers
[Link] Adding Standard Subdivision to a Main Class Number
[Link] Adding Standard Subdivision to a Division Number
1.5.4. Variations in the number of zeros
1.5.5 Two or more standard subdivisions
1.5.6 When standard subdivision not to be used
[Link] Standard subdivisions printed in the schedules
[Link] Standard subdivisions not printed and no instructions given
1.5.7 Co-occurrence of Two or More Standard Subdivisions
1.5.8 Summing up
1.5.9 Self Check Exercise

1.5.1 Introduction

Auxiliary tables 1 through 7, found in volume 1 of DDC20, give the classifier a facility to
expand existing numbers in the schedules. The tables provide notation to build specific class
numbers. To a DDC number defined or provided for a subject in the schedules, the classifier
adds table notation to represent a subdivision of the class. The notation of the tables serves
only to extend schedule numbers. The numbers given in the table cannot be used alone to
classify an item. Each number in these tables is preceded by a dash to show that it cannot be
used alone as a classification number. The dash should be omitted when the number is
attached to a main class notation. Table 1 provides notation to various recurring physical forms
such as dictionary, periodical etc. and approaches such as research, history etc. applicable to
any subject in the schedule. Hence these may be attached to any number in the schedule
unless otherwise instructed in the schedule.
Centre for Distance Education 1.5.2 Acharya Nagarjuna University

1.5.2 Identification of Standard Subdivisions

The standard subdivisions (ss) are enumerated in Table 1 of volume one. These
generally consist of two or more digits of which the first digit is 0 (zero). These may be applied
wherever they are appropriate.

Let us look at the directions for using Table 1. It contains notations for what are
referred to as Standard Subdivisions. These notations are used to narrow a subject down more
specifically. Find the Summary from the first page of Table 1.
-01 Philosophy and theory
-02 Miscellany
-03 Dictionaries
-04 Essays
-05 Periodicals
-06 Societies
-07 Study and teaching
-08 History and description with respect to persons
-09 History, geography, persons treatment

Each of these areas on the Summary list may be further subdivided in the Table. These
are notations that may be added to any number in the DDC schedules, unless instructions in the
schedules state otherwise. For example, if the item being cataloged is a dictionary, the Standard
Subdivision –03 could be used with the notation for the subject to indicate this. An agricultural
journal can be indicated by using the correct notation for the subject from the schedules, and
adding the notation –05 from Table 1 to indicate journal. These numbers from Table 1 should
never be used by themselves, but always need to be added to a notation from the schedules to
provide detailed classification number.
—01 Philosophy and theory. An exposition of any subject treated from the
theoretical point of view.
Example: 701 Philosophy of the Arts
—03 Dictionaries, encyclopedias, concordances.
Example: 720.3 Dictionary of Architecture
—05 Serial publications. Used for publications in which the subject is treated in
articles, papers, etc.
Example: 720.5 Architectural Record
—08 History and description with respect to kinds of persons.
Example: 720.8 Architectural Adaptations for People with
Specific Needs
—09 Historical, geographic, persons treatment.
Example:720.9 Fletcher’s History of Architecture

Most of the standard subdivisions are further subdivided in Table 1. For example, under
–01 “Philosophy and theory” the following subtopics are listed:
—011 Systems
—012 Classification
—014 Language and communication
—015 Scientific principles
—019 Psychological principles

The –09 standard subdivision can be geographically divided, through the addition of
area digits from Table 2, e.g., “720.973 History of Architecture in the United States.” This is
Library Classification Practice 1.5.3 Use of Table 1 : Standard Subdivisions

explained in detail below in the section titled “Table 2. Geographic Areas, Historical Periods,
Persons.” Unless specific instructions indicate otherwise, standard subdivisions may be used
with any number if such application is meaningful. One specific instruction not to add standard
subdivisions is found only in the introduction in volume 1 and is often overlooked. When a work
does not “approximate the whole of the subject of the number,” the standard subdivision usually
should not be added. This was mentioned above in the discussion of notes that identify topics in
“standing room.” If, for example, a resource is about research on corporate name headings, it
should be given the number “025.322” for “Choice of entry and form of heading.” Because the
resource is not about research on forms of all kinds of headings, and because there is no
specific number for corporate headings, the standard subdivision

Standard subdivisions should not be used where redundant, i.e., where the subdivision
means the same as the base number, or where application of the standard subdivision would
needlessly segregate material by aspects not emphasized by the author. For example, do not
add notation 024694, which represents the subject for carpenters, to topics in 694 Carpentry,
since works on a subject are written primarily for its practitioners. Likewise, do not add notation
0905, which represents the state-of-the-art to general works on a subject because most users
will expect to find such works in the main number. Special care should be taken in adding
standard subdivisions to built numbers, since the standard subdivision applies to the whole
number and not just part of the number.
Some of the examples are:
1. Journal of physics
2. Journal of Chemistry
3. Journal of Public Administration
4. Dictionary of Astronomy
5. Dictionary of chemistry
6. Research on special libraries
7. Research on library and information sciences
8. Encyclopedia of science and technology
9. Economic theory
10. History of Business management

In the above examples, the underlined words such as Journal, dictionary, research,
encyclopedia, theory, and history are recurring representations either in physical form or
approach, and thus applicable to all classes or subjects.
Following are some of the worked out examples where standard subdivisions are
added
150.5 Periodical on psychology
230.003 Dictionary of Christianity
340.02573 Directory of lawyers in the U.S.
401 Philosophy of language
507.8 Use of apparatus and equipment in the study and teaching
of science, e.g., science fair projects
624.0285 Computer applications in civil engineering
796.912092 Biography of a figure skater
808.0071 Teaching of rhetoric
Centre for Distance Education 1.5.4 Acharya Nagarjuna University

1.5.3 Adding standard Subdivision Number:

Subject to the rules a standard subdivision may be added to any class number. The
most important caveat with respect to standard subdivisions is that they are added only for
works that cover or approximate the whole of the subject of the number. Notation from Table 1
Standard Subdivisions may be added to any number in the schedules unless there is a specific
instruction to the contrary. The classifier should never use more than one zero in applying a
standard subdivision unless instructed to do so. If more than one zero is needed, the number of
zeros is always indicated in the schedules. When using standard subdivisions with numbers
built by adding from or other parts of the schedules, be sure to check the table or schedule used
for the segment preceding the standard subdivision for special instructions on the number of
zeros

The first step to classify a document is to identify the specific subject of the document.
The next step is to decide the appropriate main class number from the schedules. The the
classifier shoud consider whether the document requires any further specification as regards its
form or treatment etc. If so what notation from the Standard Subdivision (Table – 1) is required.
The relative index of DDC directs the user to the notation of the tables also.

Here is an example from the schedules using Table 1. Assuming we have an item to
catalog with the subject AGRICULTURAL DICTIONARY, we can find in the index that
Agriculture is given notation 630. When we go to 630 in the schedule the summary given there
shows that 630.1-.9 are meant for standard subdivisions. So the class number for
AGRICULTURAL DICTIONARY is 630.3. Another example of the use of the Standard
Subdivisions can be found in the section from the schedules on Economics. Looking in the
index leads the user to notation 330. When we go to 330 in the schedule it is noted that, the
standard subdivisions can be placed in number ranges 330.01-.9. So the JOURNAL OF
ECONOMICS can be classified as 330.05. Some examples will give you an idea how to use the
standard subdivisions. Below are given five titles and the numbers are also worked out.
a) Encyclopedia of Hinduism
b) Study and teaching of international relations
c) Journal of Chemistry
d) Research in Library Classification

a) Encyclopedia of Hinduism: The tile of the document deals with Hinduism and the
main class is religion. Whole going through the schedules you will come across
the number 294.5 given for Hinduism. This particular document needs to be
separated form other books on Hinduism because it has a different form and
calls for special treatment. In this case the document is presented in an
encyclopedic form. Here we find the need to add standard subdivision -03
encyclopedias. The number then for “Encyclopedia of Hinduism” will be 294.503.
b) Study and teaching of international relations: the subject of the book is
international relations is 327. Study and teaching is enumerated as a standard
sub -DIvison in table – 1 and given the number -07. The class number for the title
is 327.07.
c) Journal of Chemistry: Chemistry is the specific subject of the document and its
number in the schedules is 540. The term used for journal in standard
subdivisions is serial and its number is -05. The class number for journal for
botany is 540.5.
Library Classification Practice 1.5.5 Use of Table 1 : Standard Subdivisions

d) Research in Library Classification: The number for library classification is 025.42

in the schedule. The number for research in the standard subdivisions is -072.
Hence the number for Research in Library Classification is 025.42072

Where: 025.42 Library classification

-072 Research (ss)

025.42 + 072 = 025.420 72

If the ultimate class number is a main class or a division ends with two zeroes or
one zero, the zeroes filling the vacant space are to be removed before adding a standard
subdivision; and the digits are reshuffled that the dot is put after the first three digits .

[Link] Adding Standard Subdivision to a Main Class Number

The standard subdivision consists of at least tow digits of which initial digit is a zero.
This zero is a facet indicator. One should not add a standard subdivision number directly to a
main class. If you add so sometimes it may lead to an incorrect class number. The DDC
prescribes minimum of three digits to represent any subject of the document. For example 500
for science, 600 for technology and 900 for history and geography are the notations provided in
the DDC. The DDC states the base number for each main class. For example 5 is the base for
science and 6 is the base for technology and 9 for history.
For example
Encyclopedia of history
900 history
-03 encyclopedia
900 + 03 = 900.03
It is not a correct number. Remember the base number for history is only
9 and it has been made 900 to make it a three digit minimum. Therefore two zeros are to
be dropped form the main class and then add -03 to 9. So the class number for
encyclopedia of history will be 903.
a) Dictionary of philosophy
100 + 03 = 1 + 03 = 103
b) Study and teaching of science
500 + 07 = 5 + 073 = 507
c) Philosophy of languages
400 + 01 = 4 + 017 = 401
d) Journal of technology
600 + 05 = 6 + 05 = 605

[Link] Adding Standard Subdivision to a Division Number

The second digit in the DDC notation of the main classes represents subdivision of the
main class. For example the main class 500 science is divided into 510 mathematics, 530
physics, 540 chemistry, 580 botany and 590 zoology. While adding standard subdivision to the
subjects represented by two digits and the third digit is filled with zero for the sake of getting
minimum of three digits to represent the subjects. In such cases the initial zero is to be droped.
For example:
Journal of Oriental Philosophy
Centre for Distance Education 1.5.6 Acharya Nagarjuna University

The subject of the document is Oriental Philosophy and the number for it is 180. The
document is not a book. It is a serial publication which is published at regular intervals and
hence requires different treatment. In Standard subdivisions (table – 1) serial is represented by -
05. The number becomes 180 + 05 = 180 + 5 = [Link] adding standard subdivision we
have realigned the digits in the final number putting the dot after the third digit.

Similarly,
a) Encyclopedia of Astronomy
520 + 03 = 520 + 3 = 520.3
b) Symbols and abbreviations in chemistry
540 + 0148 = 540 + 148 = 540.148
c) Dictionary of Agriculture
620 + 03 = 620 + 3 = 620.3
d) Study and teaching of Medical Sciences
610 + 07 = 610 + 7 = 610.7
e) History of Chemistry 19th century
540 + 09034 = 540 + 9034 = 540.9034
f) History of Painting
750 + 09 = 7850+ 9 = 750.9

1.5.4. Variations in the number of Zeros (0)

You have observed that the notation of Standard subdivision starts with 0 (zero) and
prefixed by – (Hyphen). The numbers are never to be used alone and hyphen is omitted while
attaching to main class notation. Although in the table each number is preceded by a single
zero, e.g., “–03 Dictionaries, etc.,” it is sometimes necessary in the schedules to apply a double
or triple zero to introduce the subdivision. This happens when single zero subdivisions are
already appropriated in the schedules for special purposes. The instructions that cover such
situations are explicit and should be followed carefully. The DDC besides enumerating the
recurring occurrences of form or approach in standard subdivisions table, it also enumerates
some common things in the beginning of some main classes in the schedule. To avoid
confusion DDC gave provision that if any given number, there are subdivisions having a
notation beginning with 0 for special purpose, use 001-009 for standard subdivisions. That
means in such case there will be two zeros before standard subdivision notation. If notations in
the schedule beginning with 0 and 00 both have special purposes, use 0001-0009 for standard
subdivisions. That means in such case there will be three zeros before standard subdivision
number.

a) 0-divisions used for a specific purpose; standard subdivision to be

introduced by a double-0

An example of the double-0 appears at “271 Religious congregations and orders in

church history.” Single-0 subdivisions are used for specific kinds of religious congregations, e.g.,
“271.01Contemplative religious orders,” “271.03 Teaching orders,” “271.04 Preaching orders,”
etc. Here the instruction is to use 271.001–271.009 for standard subdivisions. Therefore, an
encyclopedia of religious congregations and orders in general is classed in 271.003.

Eg. Encyclopaedia of Adult Education

374 Adult Education
-03 Encyclopaedioa in Table -1
Library Classification Practice 1.5.7 Use of Table 1 : Standard Subdivisions

Under 374 Adult Education in the Schedule the summary states

that 374-001- 374-008 are used for standard subdivisions
Hence the number for the Encyclopaedia of Adult Education is 374.003

b) 00-divisions used for special purposes; standard subdivisions to be

introduced by a triple-0
An example of the triple-0 appears at “230 Christianity Christian theology.”
Single-0 Numbers 230.1–230.9 are reserved for “Doctrines of specific denominations and sects.
Double-0 numbers 230.01–230.09 are reserved for “Standard subdivisions of Christian
theology.” Therefore 230.001-230.009 (triple-0) are used for “Standard subdivisions of
Christianity.” An encyclopedia of Christianity would be classed as 230.003.
Eg. Encyclopaedia of Pediatrics
618.92 Pediatrics
- 03 Encyclopaedia
618.920003 Encylopaedia of Pediatrics asince the number 618.92 is
further divided using two zeros.

1.5.5 Two or more standard subdivisions

The table of preference at the beginning of Table 1 yields to two other rules, the rule of
application and the rule of zero. By the rule of application, teaching financial management in
hospital administration is classed in 362.110681, not 362.11071, even though notation 07 is
above notation 068 in the table of preference. The rule of zero overrides the table of preference
when standard subdivisions are displaced to nonzero positions, e.g., management of prisons in
Great Britain 365.941068, not 365.068 as would be the case if prisons in Great Britain were
classed in 365.0941. There is no mention of the Standard Subdivisions under the notes for this
section, but a clue to their use is given under notation 170 with the further breakdown ‘.92
Persons’.

Standard subdivisions are not usually listed in the schedules except where needed to fill
out three-digit numbers, e.g., 605 Serial publications, and in a few other instances. Standard
subdivisions may be listed in the schedules when the subdivisions have special meanings,
when extended notation is required for the topic in question, or when notes are required. The
rest of standard subdivisions from Table 1 may be used with their regular meanings.

“Standard-subdivisions are added” notes indicate which topics in a multi-term heading

may have standard subdivisions added for them because the designated topics are considered
to approximate the whole of the subject.

For example:
639.2 Commercial fishing, whaling, sealing
639.201 - .209 Standard subdivisions are added for commercial fishing, whaling, sealing

1.5.6 When Standard Subdivision not to be used

You have understood by this time that Standard subdivision numbers (table – 1) can be
attached if required to any number in the main schedules. But there are some exceptions. Some
times standard subdivisions are enumerated as part of the main subject in the schedules. For
example Indian History is denoted by 954 not 954.09 or 954.009. the Number for English
dictionary is 423 Standard Subdivision number should not be added in the following two cases.
Centre for Distance Education 1.5.8 Acharya Nagarjuna University

[Link] Standard subdivisions printed in the schedules

In some parts of the schedules a concept that is ordinarily expressed as a standard
subdivision is printed with its own number. For example, “805 Serial publications” is printed in
the schedule following “800 Literature . . .” Therefore, this is the number used for a serial about
literature, not 800.5 or 800.05. Likewise, “501 Philosophy and theory” is printed after “500
Natural sciences and mathematics.” None of the standard subdivision breakdown for –01 found
in Table 1 is printed after “501,” but one can use this breakdown at this number if appropriate.
Thus, a work on the concept of theoretical classification in the natural sciences would be
classed “501.2.”

[Link] Standard subdivisions not printed and no instructions given

The most common situation is that in which standard subdivisions are not printed and no
instructions are given. In such cases a single 0 introduces the standard subdivision. For
example, the schedules give the number “371.4” for student guidance and counseling. A work
on the philosophy and theory of student guidance and counseling would be given the class
number “371.401.”

Some numbers in the schedules and tables are enclosed in parentheses or square
brackets. Numbers and notes in parentheses provide options to standard practice. Numbers in
square brackets represent topics that have been relocated or discontinued, or are unassigned.
Square brackets are also used for standard subdivision concepts that are represented in
another location. Bracketed numbers should never be used.

Standard subdivisions are also bracketed under a hook number, that is, a number
that has no meaning in itself, but is used to introduce specific examples of a topic. Hook
numbers have headings that begin with "Miscellaneous," "Other," or "Specific"; and do not
contain add notes, including notes, or class-here notes. For example:
652.3 Typing
652.302 Specific levels of skill
Use 652.3001 – 3009 for Standard subdivisions

1.5.7 Co-occurrence of Two or More Standard Subdivisions

Certain documents to be classified may require adding of two or more standard
subdivision numbers. The DDC does not allow adding one standard subdivision number to the
other. To resolve such problems the DDC has given table of precedence at the beginning of
Table – 1. Following that only one standard subdivision is to be used.

For example number for the document “Journal of Economic Philosophy” is 330.01, even
though the standard subdivision number for journal is -05, we have taken philosophy number -
01 as per table of precedence.

Here are a few examples with the standard subdivision concept underlined (in some
cases an extra 0 precedes the standard subdivision according to instructions found in the
schedules)

1.5.8 Summing up
This lesson explained the concept of standard sub-divisions. Some concepts or view
points or form etc are recurring for all the subjects. The DDC has given separate notation in
table – 1 to denote such recurring concepts. These standard subdivision numbers can be
Library Classification Practice 1.5.9 Use of Table 1 : Standard Subdivisions

attached to any main class numbers in the schedule with or without instruction in the schedule.
But there are some exceptions which are explained.

1.5.9 Self Check Exercise

For each of the following, add a standard subdivision from Table 1 to the class from the
Schedules.
1. Use of computers in technical drawing ________
2. Hydraulic engineering as a profession ________
3. The philosophy of industrial psychology ________
4. Dictionary of human reproduction ________
5. Journal of Aquatic ecology ________
6. Folk art museums ________
7. Teaching swimming and diving ________
8. Handicrafts for people with disabilities ________
9. A sales catalog of model trains ________
10. Biographies of 10 great artists ________
11. Fund raising for political action groups ________
12. Insurance for young people twelve to twenty ________
13. Illustrations of design and construction of buildings ______
14. Theory of the solar system ________
15. Equipment used in puppetry ________
16. Adult education in electronics ______
17. Social work with unmarried mothers ________
18. Automobile museums ________
19. Management of marketing _______
20. Membership lists of physicians ________
Answers:
1. 604.20285
2. 627.023
3. 158.701
4. 612.6003
5. 577.605
6. 745.074
7. 797.20071
8. 745.5087
9. 625.10029
10. 700.92
11. 322.4068
12. 368.00835
13. 690.022
14. 523.201
15. 791.5028
16. 621.381071
17. 361.3086
18. 388.3074
19. 380.1068
20. 610.69025
Library Classification Practice 1.6.1 Use of Table – 2 : Areas

Lesson – 6
Use of table – 2: Areas
1.6.0 Aims and Objective

This lesson helps the student to know the use of table – 2 of the DDC which enumerated
the Areas, regions and places in general.

The detailed explanations of the lesson enable the student to

- understand the structure of Area table
- building class numbers by adding area numbers in different ways
- identify the subject numbers where area number is part of class number

STRUCTURE

1.6.1 Introduction
1.6.2 Structure of the Areas table
[Link] Areas, Regions, Places in general
[Link] Persons
[Link] Ancient world
[Link] Modern world
1.6.3 Application of Area Notation
[Link] Area Number already a part of the class number
[Link] Area number application through standard subdivision
[Link] Area number by ‘Add to’ instruction
1.6.4 Adding two Ares numbers
1.6.5 Interposing of Area number between two subject numbers
1.6.6 Extending a number from table -2 with another number from Area
table - 2
1.6.7 Adding Areas notation to a standard subdivision numbers in 01 – 08
of table -1
1.6.8 Application of Standard subdivision after an Area number
1.6.9 Summary
1.6.10 Exercises
Centre for Distance Education 1.6.2 Acharya Nagarjuna University

1.6.1 Introduction
As stated in the earlier lessons DDC provided seven tables for assigning class numbers
to different subjects. Table 2 enumerates areas in the first volume of DDC. It is one of the
important and frequently used tables in DDC for synthesizing a class number. Table 2 includes
areas, regions, places in general (-1) which include physiographical features, population
clusters, political and economic groups. It also includes places in general (-2), ancient world (-3)
and modern world (-4 to -9). Table 2 numbers are never used alone. These are to be used by
the direction from the schedule or by interposing 09 from table 1. Some times these numbers
are also used when so noted from other tables. The major use of Table 2 is with notation 09
from Table 1, where it can be added to every number in the schedule unless there are specific
instructions to the contrary. For example, reading instruction in the primary schools of Australia
is 372.40994 (372.4 Reading instruction in primary schools + 09 Historical, geographic, persons
treatment from Table 1 + 94 Australia from Table 2).

The following types of names from Table 2 Geographic Areas are included in the
Relative Index:

A) Names of countries;
B) Names of the states and provinces of most countries;
C) Names of the counties of the United States;
D) Names of capital cities and other important municipalities; and
E) Names of certain important geographic features

1.6.2 Structure of the Areas table

The summary of Area table is as follows

-1 Areas, Regions, Places in general

-2 Persons
-3 Ancient world
-4 to -9 Modern world

[Link] Areas, Regions, Places in general

Numbers from -1 to -19 are allocated for representing places not limited by continent,
country and locality. DDC worked out the numbers on the lines of zones, land forms, regions
and space. The details of the divisions are:

-11 to -13 zones

-14 Land forms
-15 to -18 Regions by vegetation, air, water, socioeconomic and others
-19 space

Eg. Frigid zone -11

Torrid zone -13
Tundra -145
Forests -152
Black sea -16389
Urban regions -1732
Pacific region -1823
Library Classification Practice 1.6.3 Use of Table – 2 : Areas

Outer space -19

[Link] Persons
Numbers -2 and -22 are used for representing the documents that deal with biographies
and autobiographies of persons regardless of area, regions and places. Collected biographies
of persons of a country can be represented by adding country number 3-9 to -22.

Eg. Collected biographies Indians -2254 (here 54 for India)

Biographies of eminent Librarians of India 027.02254

27 General Libraries
027.01 – 09 Geographical treatment.(Add areas notation -1 to -9 from
table 2 to base number 027.0)
-22 collected persons (add areas notation -3 to -9 from table 2 to base
number -22
-54 India

[Link] Ancient World

All the countries in the ancient world are enumerated in -3. It is optional to use
number to denote country from numbers taken from ancient or modern world (-4 to -9)
Eg. Ancient India -34
Ethiopia -3978

[Link] Modern World

All the countries in the modern world are enumerated here with numbers -4 to -9.
It has been divided on the basis of continents. _4 for Europe, -5 for Asia, -6 for Africa, -7 for
North America, -8 for South America and -9 for other parts of the world. Each digit is further
divided to represent countries and states etc.

Eg. India -54

-5482 for Tamilnadu
-5484 for Andhra Pradesh

United States -73

-755 for Virginia
-773 for Illinois
-77311 for Chicago

Louisiana -763
Moon -991

1.6.3 Application of Area Notation

From the above description about the Are table you have noticed that all the area
numbers start with hyphen (-). It indicates that these numbers should not be used alone to
represent the subjects. These are to be attached to the numbers from the schedule omitting the
hyphen (-). Three different methods are followed in DDC to use the Are notation. They are as
follows:

1. Area Number already a part of the class number

Centre for Distance Education 1.6.4 Acharya Nagarjuna University

2. Area number application through standard subdivision

3. Area number application by ‘Add to’ instruction

[Link] Area Number already a part of the class number

In subjects like History, Geography, Statistics, etc. where the area form the part of it, the
subject is divided geographically and organized.

For example the following main classes are divided geographically:

270 church history

274 churches in Europe
275 churches in Asia
276 churches in Africa
310 General statistics
315 statistics of Asia
316 statistics of Africa
Similarly the main class 550 (Earth Sciences), 9 (History) and 91 (Geography) are divided

Examples

General statistics of Asia 315

Statistics of India 315.4, where -54 from table 2
General Statistics of Andhra Pradesh 31 + 5484 = 315.484
Geology of India 555.4 (here 55 is the base number from 555
earth science of Asia and 54 is from table 3
for India)
Geography of travel in Japan 91 + 52 = 915.2
History of Andhra Pradesh 9 + 5484 = 954.84

[Link] Area number application through standard subdivision

While classifying the documents of certain subjects we may require area number where
the DDC has not given provision to do so. In such cases we can go to 09 of table 1 and the add
area notation taken from table 2.

In table 1 Standard subdivisions you can find the following instruction:

-09 Treatment by areas, regions, places in general

(Add to base number -091 the numbers following -1 in -11 to -19
from table 2 ‘Areas’).
-093-099 Treatment by specific continents, countries, localities etc.
(Add to base number 09 notation -3-9 from table 2.)

Examples

1) Harvesting of Wheat in India 633.1150954

Wheat 633.11
Harvesting 631.55 (the numbers after 631.5 only to be
taken by the direction in the schedule)
Library Classification Practice 1.6.5 Use of Table – 2 : Areas

India 54 (since there is no direction to add from

area table it is added via 09 from standard
subdivision)
2) Industrial banks in India 332.370954
Industrial Banks 332.37
India -54 (added with SS 09)
3) Women Labour in China 331.40951
Women labour 331.4
China -51 from table 2 added with 09 of table 1

[Link] Area number application by ‘Add to’ instruction

DDC provided ‘add to” instruction at several places in the tables and schedules for the
use of area subdivisions from table 2 to the base number.

For example:

373.3–373.9 Secondary education in specific continents, countries, localities

Add to base number 373 notation 3–9 from Table 2, e.g., secondary
schools of Australia 373.94

These instructions are given in different ways at different places of the schedule as detailed
below:

Add ‘Areas’ notation -1-9 from table 2 to the base number…

Add ‘Areas’ notation -3-9 from table 2 to the base number…
Add ‘Areas’ notation -4-9 from table 2 to the base number…

Examples

1. Elementary Education in India 372.954

372 = Elementary Education
372.91-.99 = Geographical Treatment (Add areas
notation -1-9 from table 2 to base
number 372.9)
54 = India from table 2

2. Libraries in India 027.054

027.01 - .09 geographical treatment
(Add to base number 027.0, notation 1 – 9 from Table
Thus ; 027.0 + 54 = 027.054

3. Foreign policy of India 327.54

(327.3 - .9 for foreign policies and foreign relation
between specific countries. Here the direction reads
“Add areas notation 3-9 from table 2 to base number
327. So, -54 for India from table 2)

4. Public libraries in India 027.454

Centre for Distance Education 1.6.6 Acharya Nagarjuna University

027.4 Public libraries

027.43-.49 Treatment y specific continents, countries, localities
(Add to base number 027.4 notation 3-9 from table 2.)
Thus, 027.454 Public libraries in India

5. Unemployment in India 331.1379 +54 = 331.137 954

331 Labour economics
331.137 Unemployment
331.1379 Historical, Geographical and Persons Treatment
(Add to base number 331.1379 notation 01-99
from table 2.)
-54 India in table 2
Thus, 331.137954 Unemployment in India

6. Foreign policy of India 327 + 54 = 327.54

Exercise:
1. Political Rights in Iran
2. Child labour in developing countries
3. Income tax in India
4. Costumes of Kerala
5. Naval Forces in India
6. Prices in Pakistan – an economic study

1.6.4 Adding Two area Numbers

DDC has provided provision for using two Area Numbers together under certain class
numbers. Such instances may occur in the case of documents dealing with foreign trade,
international relations, treatises, emigrations, etc. Usually the two area numbers are connected
by a zero. For example

a) Foreign relations between India and China 327.54051

327 Foreign relations
-54 India (from table 2
-51 China (from table 2)
327.54 foreign policy of India
Add zero to the above number to attach the second country number,
the result will be 327.54051

b) Trade relations between India and United States 382.54073

382 International Trade
54 India from table 2
0 Connecting digit
73 United States from table 2

c) Emigration from Bangladesh to India 325.254920954

325.23-.29 Emigration from specific continents, countries, localities
(Add to base number325.2 notation 3-9 from table 2. to the result
add 0 (zero) and then the second country number)
325.25492 emigration from Bangladesh
Library Classification Practice 1.6.7 Use of Table – 2 : Areas

0 connecting digit
325.5492054 Emigration from Bangladesh to India

d) Economic assistance by America to India 338.9173054

338.911-.919 Economic assistance by specific jurisdictions
338.9173 Economic assistance by America
338.91730 Zero (0) connecting digit
338.9173054 Economic assistance by America to India

e) British Companies in India 338.88941054

338.889 Foreign owned enterprises by owner
338.88941 British Companies
338.889410 Connecting digit zero to add another country
338.88941054 British companies in India

f) Private libraries in Rural Areas of Asia 027.117 340 54

027.1 private libraries
-17 34 Rural regions
-0 interposing zero
- 54 India
027.1+17 34+0 + 54 = 027.117 340 54

g) Study and teaching of economics in France 330.070 44

Where; 330 economics
-07 study and teaching (ss.)
-0 interposing zero
-44 France
330. +07+0 +44 = 330.070 44

h) Research on economic Geography of India 330.954 072

Where 330 economics
-09 Geographical treatment (ss)
-54 India (table 2)
-072 research

1.6.5 Interposing of Area number between two subject numbers

Some subjects like Law, Public Administration, Political Science etc. require Area
number as intermediary facet between two subject numbers. In the case of subject Law the
class numbers are further extended after adding area number taken from the table 2.

The main class law is divided as follows:

340 International Law
341 International Law
342 Constitutional and Administrative law
343 Military, tax, trade, industrial law
344 Social, labour, welfare etc
345 Criminal law
346 Private law
347 Civil procedure
Centre for Distance Education 1.6.8 Acharya Nagarjuna University

348 Laws, regulations and cases

349 Law of specific jurisdictions and areas

Here 34 is the base number for Law. The third digit 2 to 8 represent specific branch of
law. Each branch of law is further divided with topics subordinate to branch of law. These topics
are denoted by a group of digits beginning with 0 (zero). DDC provided different options to
classify the documents of the subject Law.

Option 1: Arrangements of elements in the following sequence

1. Base Number +
2. Notation for the branch of law +
3. Notation from table 2 for jurisdiction or place +
4. Notation for the subordinate topic in the branch of law
Eg. Labour law in India 344.5401

34 Base number of law

3 Social, labour, welfare law
54 India from table 2
01 Labour

Option II: Arrangements of elements

1. Base number 34
2. Notation from table 2 followed by a 0 (zero)
3. Notation for the branch of law i.e. the digit after in 34 in
342-348
4. Notation for the subordinate topic omitting initial zero (0)
Eg. Labour law in India 345.4041

34 Base number for Law

54 India from table 2 followed by zero (0)
4 Branch of law omitting initial 34 as per instruction (344-
social, labour etc law)
1 Subordinate topic labour discarding the initial zero (0)

Option III: Classifying the documents of law of specific subjects with the
specific subject or discipline using notation 026 from table 1.

Eg. Education law in India 370.2654

(Explanation: 370-1-.9 allocated for standard subdivisions. So 26
is added from -026 of table 1. Then by the direction at the -026
India number 54 from table 2 is added)

Generally in most of the libraries option-I is followed in classifying the documents of law
since law differs from place to place. The following examples are illustrated basing on the
option-I.

Exercises:

a) Constitutional law of India 342.54

Library Classification Practice 1.6.9 Use of Table – 2 : Areas

342 Constitutional law

54 India from table 2
b) Income tax law in India 343.54052
343 Military, tax, trade, industrial law
54 India
052 Income tax

c) Law of public health in India 344.5404

d) Trade union law in India 344.540188
344 Social, labour, welfare law
54 India from table 2
01 Labour
88 for trade union in 331.88 omitting 331 by the
direction in 344.01
e) Criminal procedure code of India 345.5405
f) Marriage law in India 346.54016
g) Law of evidence in India 347.5406
h) Selected laws of India 348.54024

In main class political science and public administration the DDC gave provision to
interpose area number between two subject numbers. Following are some examples:

a) Corruption in Indian Government 354.5400994

354 Administration of specific central governments
54 India from table 2 by the direction at 354.3-.9
009 Malfunctioning of administration as per table
under 354.3-.9
94 Taken the digits after 351.994 for corruption
351.994 by direction at 009 of the table under
354.3-.9

b) Civil Services Examinations in India 354.54003

354.54 Indian government (explanation is as that of
above example)
001- 008 Government service etc.
3 taken the digits after 351 in 351.3 and
added to 00 for civil service examinations
by the direction at 001-008 under 354.3-.9

c) Communist party of India 324.254075

324.24-.29 Political Parties
Here the instruction reads “add to base
number 324.2, notation 4-9 from table 2.
Hence 324.254 Political parties in India
The instruction stated above also directs to
add further from the table given there.
Hence 324.254075 Communist party of India
Centre for Distance Education 1.6.10 Acharya Nagarjuna University

1.6.6 Extending a number from table -2 with another number from

Area table
DDC also gave provision to extend an area number by another are number from table 2
whenever required. Following are some examples:

a) Urban regions of India -1732054

-1732 urban regions from table 2
(Note under -1 Areas, regions etc. directs to
add 0 (zero) to the base number and
then the add notation 3-9 from table
2.)
Hence -1732054 urban regions of India
b) Coastal regions of Andhra Pradesh -14605484
c) Water falls in Maharashtra -169405479
d) French communities in Pondicherry --17124405486
-1712 Noncontiguous empires and political unions
-171244 French Communities (by direction at
-1712 notation 3-9 added)
-17124405486 Pondicherry number added after interposing
0 (zero)

1.6.7 Adding Areas notation to a standard subdivision numbers in 01

– 08
DDC also gave provision to add area table from standard subdivisions (table 1) through
some numbers other than -09, whenever required. Following are some numbers of the table 1
where instruction is given to add area number:
-025
-0294
-296
-0603-0609
-07101-07109
-0711
-079

Examples
a) National organizations of social work in India 361.306054
b) Law schools in India 340.071054
c) Biotechnology courses in Indian Universities 660.6071154
d) Research on Agriculture in India 630.72054

1.6.8 Application of Standard subdivision after an Area number

So far you have learned the use of area table number at different places by different
methods. You have also learnt from the earlier lessons that the numbers of table 1 can be
added to any schedule number even without direction. Some times it is required to add standard
subdivision number from table 1 after the area number. But the caution here is you should not
Library Classification Practice 1.6.11 Use of Table – 2 : Areas

add standard subdivision number when the area number is added through -09 of table 1. In
such case the table of precedence given at the beginning of the table 1 should be followed.
Following are some examples where standard subdivision number is added after area number:

a) Report on Land reforms in India 333.315406

333.31 Land reform
-54 India from table 2 by direction
-06 Report from table 1 without direction

b) Research in Adult Education in India 374.954072

374 Adult education
374.9 Geographical treatment
374.954 Adult education in India
-072 Research from table 1.

1.6.9 Summary

This lesson explained the use of area table in Dewey Decimal Classification. The
structure of the table 2 is illustrated. The application of area number by different means is
clearly explained with examples.

1.6.10 EXERCISES
a. Trade agreement between France and Australia
b. Treatises between India and united kingdom
c. US economic Aid to Kuwait
d. Immigrant workers from China in California
e. Women workers in India
f. Civil rights in communist countries
g. Political rights in India
h. Textile production in Kerala
i. Journal of Indian Ethanobotany
j. Conference on Academic libraries in India
k. Commercial banks in India
l. Trade Unions in India
m. Strikes in India
n. Financing of Agriculture in India
o. Hindu temples in Jammu
p. International relations between Russia and India
q. Migration from India to United states
r. Russian aid to India
s. Bharatiya Janata Party
t. Rivers in north India
u. Indian property law
Library Classification Practice 1.7.1 Use of Table 3

Lesson – 7
USE OF TABLE 3
1.7.0 Aim and Objective:
This lesson explains the student the use of table 3 of DDC which contain notation to expand
the class numbers of 800 Literature in the schedule.

Study of this lesson enables you to:

- identify the areas of schedules and tables that require the notation from table 3;
- find and attach the notation of table 3, 3A, 3B and 3C to expand the notation for
general literature and individual literatures.

STRUCTURE
1.7.1 Introduction
1.7.2 Use of Table 3
[Link] Division of Main Class: 800 Literature
[Link] Sub-divisions of specific literatures in 800 literatures
[Link] Summary of table – 3
1.7.3 Number Building
A) General Literature Displaying Specific Themes
B) Anthologies and critical appraisals
C) Classifying literary works of individual authors
1.7.4 Summary
1.7.5 Exercise

1.7.1 Introduction
The DDC allocated notation 800 for accommodating the documents relating to
literature. The discipline 800 literature has been divided into subdivisions of individual
literature from 810 to 890. Rarely is a class number found readymade in the schedule of 800
Literature. The literature is found in different forms such as poetry, drama etc. To denote
these forms, themes and other recurring topics applicable to any literature, DDC has
provided separate notation in table 3 of volume 1. Notation from table 3 is never used alone.
Class numbers for literary work have to be constructed with the help of table 3 as per
instructions given in the main class 800. When required these are to be used with base
number of the individual literatures 810-890 identified by * (asterisk) taken from the
schedule. The notation of table 3 is also used for the schedule numbers 808-809 where
instructed. Table 3 is further divided into three sub tables as detailed below:

Table 3-A: contains subdivisions for works by or about individual authors.

Centre for Distance Education 1.7.2 Acharya Nagarjuna University

Table 3-B: contains subdivisions for works by or about more than one author
Table 3-C: notation to be added where instructed in table 3-B and in 808-809.

1.7.2 Use of Table 3

As stated above, the table 3 of DDC provided notation for denoting forms, themes
and other recurring topics applicable to individual literatures. The notation of table 3 is
always to be used with number from 800-899.

[Link] Division of Main Class 800 Literature

The main class 800 literature has been divided into divisions on the basis of broad
language groups.
800 Literature
810 American literature
820 English, Anglo-Saxon literature
830 Literatures in German languages
840 Literature of Roman languages
850 Italian Romanian, Rhaeto-Romanic
860 Spanish & Portuguese literature
870 Italic literatures Latin
880 Hellenic literatures Greek
890 Literature of other languages

The numbers in 801-809 are enumerated for general topics of the literature. Majority
of the subdivisions are based on standard subdivisions given in table 1 of DDC.

For example:
801 Philosophy and theory
802 Miscellany about literature
805 Serial publications
808 Rhetoric and collections
809 History, critical appraisal etc.

The class 808 has been further divided to accommodate all forms and provision to
use notation from table 3.

[Link] Sub-divisions of specific literatures in 800 literatures

810 American literature in English

811 American poetry in English
812 American drama in English
813 American fiction in English
814 American essays in English
815 American speeches in English
816 American letters in English
817 American humor & satire in English
818 American miscellaneous writings
819 (Optional number)

820 English & Old English literatures

821 English poetry
822 English drama
823 English fiction
824 English essays
825 English speeches
826 English letters
827 English humor & satire
828 English miscellaneous writings
829 Old English (Anglo-Saxon)

830 Literatures of Germanic languages

831 German poetry
832 German drama
833 German fiction
834 German essays
835 German speeches
836 German letters
837 German humor & satire
838 German miscellaneous writings
839 Other Germanic literatures

840 Literatures of Romance languages

841 French poetry
842 French drama
843 French fiction
844 French essays
845 French speeches
846 French letters
847 French humor & satire
848 French miscellaneous writings
849 Occitan & Catalan literatures

850 Italian, Romanian & related literatures

851 Italian poetry
852 Italian drama
853 Italian fiction
854 Italian essays
855 Italian speeches
856 Italian letters
857 Italian humor & satire
858 Italian miscellaneous writings
859 Romanian & related literatures

860 Spanish & Portuguese literatures

861 Spanish poetry
862 Spanish drama
863 Spanish fiction
864 Spanish essays
865 Spanish speeches
866 Spanish letters
867 Spanish humor & satire
868 Spanish miscellaneous writings
869 Portuguese literature

870 Italic literatures; Latin literature

871 Latin poetry
872 Latin dramatic poetry & drama
873 Latin epic poetry & fiction
Centre for Distance Education 1.7.4 Acharya Nagarjuna University

874 Latin lyric poetry

875 Latin speeches
876 Latin letters
877 Latin humor & satire
878 Latin miscellaneous writings
879 Literatures of other Italic languages

880 Hellenic literatures; classical Greek

881 Classical Greek poetry
882 Classical Greek dramatic poetry & drama
883 Classical Greek epic poetry & fiction
884 Classical Greek lyric poetry
885 Classical Greek speeches
886 Classical Greek letters
887 Classical Greek humor & satire
888 Classical Greek miscellaneous writings
889 Modern Greek literature

890 Literatures of other languages

891 East Indo-European & Celtic literatures
892 Afro-Asiatic literatures; Semitic literatures
893 Non-Semitic Afro-Asiatic literatures
894 Altaic, Uralic, Hyperborean & Dravidian
895 Literatures of East & Southeast Asia
896 African literatures
897 North American native literatures
898 South American native literatures
899 Australasian & other literatures

[Link] Summary of table – 3

Table 3-A enumerates different forms of literature as given below:

-1 Poetry
-2 Drama
-3 Fiction
-4 Essays
-5 Speeches
-6 Letters
-7 Satire and humour
-8 Miscellaneous writings

Table 3-B enumerates subdivisions for works by or about more than one author.

-01 - 09 standard Subdivisions

-1 Poetry
-2 Drama
-3 Fiction
-4 Essays
-5 Speeches
-6 Letters
-7 Satire and humor
-8 Miscellaneous writings
 Table 3-C Following is the extract of summary given

-001-009 Standard subdivisions

-01-09 Specific periods
-1 Literature displaying special qualities
-4 Literature emphasizing subjects

Each of the literary form mentioned in the above summaries are further
divided to accommodate standard subdivisions, varieties of the literary form and period to be
taken from that of the individual literature given in the schedule.

1.7.3 Number Building

DDC has given procedure for building the number for a literary work. The procedure
consists of number of steps as detailed below:

Procedure for building number for individual authors:

1. Find the base number of the literature in the schedule. The base numbers for most
of the literatures is given separately under each literature. If the base number is not
given separately take the whole number representing the individual literature as
base number. For example the base number for English literature is 82 out of 820.
For Telugu literature the base number is 894.827.

2. Find the correct subdivision from table 3-A for the literary form. For example
notation for poetry is -1, and for drama is -2. Addition of this form number to base
number becomes full class number. So the notation 821 represents English
poetry.

3. If period is to be represented for classifying the literary work on hand, the period
notation is to be taken from the schedule under individual literature and to be
added to the number already derived in above steps. The number for English
poetry of 15th century is 821.2

Procedure for building number for works by or about more than one author
1 Find the base number of the individual literature from 810-890 of the schedule
2 Find the correct subdivision for the literary form from table 3-B and add to number
derived in step1.
3 Find the period number from the period table given in the respective literature
numbers in the schedule and add the same to the number derived in the step2.
4 If the number taken from table 3-B is identified with asterisk follow the instructions
and add notation from table 3-C, to the number derived in step 3 above for expansion
of the notation to represent specific features of the literary work.

Examples:

A) General Literature Displaying Specific Themes

1. Literary collections featuring social themes 808.80355

808 = Collections
808.801-.803 = Collections displaying special features
Centre for Distance Education 1.7.6 Acharya Nagarjuna University

Add to base number 808.80 notation 1-3

from table 3-C
-355 = Social themes

2. Collection of Poetry depicting Love 808.819354

808.819 = Poetry displaying special features

Add to base number 808.819 the notation
from table 3-C
-354 = love

3. Critical Appraisal of 16th century literature 809.031

809 = History, criticism etc,

809.01-.05 = Literature from specific periods
Add to base number 809.0 the numbers
following -090 in notation from 0901-0905
of table 1.
-09031 = 16th century
So 809.0 + 31 = 809.031

B) Anthologies and critical appraisals

1. Anthology of literature 808.8

2. Anthology of 20th century literature 808.8004

(As per an add instruction under 808.8001-.8005 to add period

Numbers following 090 from 0901-0905 of table 1).

3. Anthology of English Literature displaying romanticism 820.80145

82 = English literature
-08 = Collections
Add 0 to -08 then to the result add notation
001-99 from table 3-C
-145 = Romanticism (table 3-C)
82 + 08+ 0 + 145 820.80145

4. History of 20th century literature 809.04

(As per instruction under 809.01-.05)

5. Anthology of English literature 820.8

82 = Base number for English 820

08 = collection from table 3

6. History of 17th century English literature 820.9004

82 = English
09001-.09009 = Literature from specific periods
(As per add instruction to the number -0900 the
notation from period table of English is added)
 7. History of Telugu poetry in19th century 894.8271409
894.827 = Telugu literature
-11-.19 = poetry from table 3 (instructed here to add period
from respective literature to the base number
-1 and then expanding the notation if required with
interposing 0 (zero))
4 = period number given under Telugu literature
9 - History added after 0 as per instruction

8. Critical study of Characters in English Literature 820.927

82 English literature
-09 History
-27 characters
82 + 09 + 27 = 820.927

9. Critical appraisal of Russian Literature for children 891.7099282

891.7 Russian literature
-09 critical appraisal
-9282 children
891.7+ 09 +9282 = 891.7099282

C) Classifying literary works of individual authors:

Class numbers for some English writers:

1. Paradise lost by John Milton (1608-1674) 821.4

82 = Base number for English literature
-1 = Poetry from (table 3)
4 = Period given under 820
So 82 + 1 + 4 = 821.4

2. Poetry of John Keats (1795-1821) 821.7

82 = Base number for English literature
-1 = poetry from (table 3)
7 = period given under 820
So 82 + 1 + 7 = 821.7

Class numbers of some American English writers;

1. The wings of dove: a novel by Henry James (1843-1916) 813.4

81 + 3 (fiction) + 4 (period) = 813.4

2. The Sonnet by Wallace Stevens ( 1979 ) 811.52

81 + 1 (poetry) + 52 (period) = 811.52

Class numbers of some Indo-European and Dravidian Literature writers;

1. Hindi poetry of Jai Shankar Prasad (1930-) 891.4316

891.43 = Base number for Hindi literature
-1 = Poetry
6 = Period given under Modern Indic literatures

2. Godan by Prem Chand (1880-1936) 891.4334

891.43 = Hindi literature
Centre for Distance Education 1.7.8 Acharya Nagarjuna University

-3 = Fiction
4 = Period

3. Bengali play of Tagore (1861-1941) 891.4424

891.44 = Bengali literature
-2 = Drama
4 = period

4. Muthuhalam: a poem by Shankar G. Kurup (1921-), malayali poet

894.81216
894.812 = Malayalam literature
-1 = Poetry
6 = period given under Dravidian literature

5. Pakudu rallu: a telugu drama by Rama Rao (1975-) 894.82727

894.827 = Telugu literature
-2 = Drama
6 = Period from Dravidian literature

6. Collection of Hindi Literature with love theme 891.4308354

891.43 Hindi literature
-08 collections
-354 love
891.43 + 08 +354 = 891.430 835 4

1.7.3 Summary

This lesson explained the use table 3A, 3B, & 3C and the procedure to attach this
table numbers to the schedule numbers of literature. The options available are explained
with detailed examples.

Exercise :

1. School for Husbands : Baptiste Poquelin (1622) : French Drama

2. Jane Austen’s Heroines : Intimacy in Human Relationships (1775)
3. The Poetry of Chauscer by John Champline (1933)
4. English poetry of Shelly (1567-1624)
5. History of Urdu Literature
6. Hindi epic poetry of 15th century
7. Anthology of Bengali Drama
8. Collection of poems by Tagore
9. Critical appraisal of Shakespeare Drama
10. Hamlet
11. Sakuntala by Kalidasa
Library Classification Practice 1.8.1 Use of Tables 4 & 6

Lesson – 8
USE OF TABLES 4 & 6
1.8.1 AIMS AND OBJECTIVE
The aim of this lesson is to introduce the student to the Tables 4 and 6 of DDC and
explain the instructions given in the schedule and tables regarding the use of these tables.

Study of this lesson enables the student to:

‐ Locate the areas in the schedules and tables requiring the use of Tables 4 and 6
‐ Know about how to make use of Table-4 in classifying works on Linguistics
‐ Know about how to make use of Table-6 in extending the class numbers

STRUCTURE

1.8.1 Introduction
1.8.2 Use of Table-4
1.8.3 Use of Table-6
[Link] Adding Notation from Table-6 to Schedule Number
[Link] Adding Notation from Table-6 and Table-2 Schedule Number
[Link] Use of Table-4 and 6 Together
1.8.4. Summing up

1.8.1 INTRODUCTION
In the previous lessons Table-1 Standard subdivision, Table-2: Areas and Table-3: Sub-
divisions of individual literatures are explained. This lesson explained Tables 4 and 6
consecutively as these two tables deal with language umbers.

Table-4 : Subdivisions of Individual Languages

Table-6 : Languages

You already know from the earlier lessons that table -1 notation can be used even
without instruction. Table - 2 is used with instruction from the schedule and through -09 of table
- 1, when there is no instruction. Table - 3 is exclusively used to extend the numbers of main
class 800 Literature. Table - 4 is used to extend the number for the main class 400 Languages.
Table - 6 is used to extend the number as per instructions in the schedules and in some case to
extend the number from table – 4 depending up on the subject of the document to be classified.

1.8.2 USE OF TABLE- 4:SUB-DIVISIONS OF INDIVIDUAL LANGUAGES

Table 4 contains the notation to represent regularly recurring topics applicable to any
language. Notation of table 4 is never used alone, but may be used as required with the base
Library Classification Practice 1.8.2 Introduction to Dewey Decimal..

numbers of individual languages identified by asterisk (*) as explained in the schedule under
420-490. Following is the summary of the Table 4 which gives an idea of the nature and its
contents:

-01-09 Standard subdivisions

-1 Writing systems and phonology of the standard form of the language
-2 Etymology of the standard form of the language
-3 Dictionaries of the standard form of the language
-5 Structural system (Grammar) of the standard form of the language
-7 Historical and geographical variations, modern nongeographical variations
-8 Standard usage of the language (Prescriptive Linguistics) Applied Linguistics

Instructions to use these numbers and their sub-divisions are provided in the schedule
under 420 – 490.

[Link] Using Table-4 Notation:

In the schedule main class 400 deals with Language numbers. The numbers 420 to 490
describes individual languages. The instruction was given under 420-490 in the schedule to use
the notation from table 4, if required. The instruction says that add to base number for each
individual language identified by * (Asterisk), notation 01-86 from table 4. The base number is
the number given for the language in the schedule unless there is a specific different number to
be used as base number. The classifier should verify whether or not a specific languages
enumerated under 420 – 490 is identified by asterisk or not. The notation of table 4 is directly
applicable when the individual language number in the schedule is identified by asterisk

Following Table illustrates the use of different notation from Table-4

Language Base number Etymology Dictionary Grammar Readers
-2 -3 -5 -86
English 42 422 423 425 428.6
German 43 432 433 435 438.6
French 44 442 443 445 448.6
Latin 47 472 473 475 478.6
Sanskrit 491.2 491.22 491.23 491.25 491.258 6
Tamil 494.811 494.811 2 494.8113 494.8115 494.811 6
Telugu 494.827 494.827 2 494.827 3 491.827 5 494.827 86

For example:
a) English Grammar 425
420 English and Anglo-Saxon Languages
42 Base number for English
Grammar is a linguistic aspect whose number is to be taken from Table-4
-5 Structural System(Grammar) of the standard form of the language (Table-4)

So 42(Base Number) + 5(Table-4) = 425

b) Hindi Grammar 491.435

491.43 Western Hindi languages Hindi
-5 Grammar (Table-4)
491.3 + 5 = 491.465
Library Classification Practice 1.8.3 Use of Tables 4 & 6

c) Sanskrit Dictionary

491.2 Sanskrit
-3 Dictionary (Table-4)
491.2 + 3 = 491.463

d) German Reader 438.6

430 Germanic Languages
43 Base number for German
-86 Readers (table 4)
43 + 86 = 438.6

[Link] Instances where Table-4 notation cannot be used:

You are aware from the above discussion that the numbers in the main class 420 -490
which are identified by asterisk (*) can be extended by the notation from table 4. Otherwise a
number in 420 – 490 without an asterisk (*) cannot be extended by Table-4.

For example:

e) Dictionary of Konkani
The number for Konkani language in the schedule is 491.467. It is not an asterisked
number. The notation for grammar form Table-4 cannot be added. So the Class number
for the above title is 491.467 not 491.4673
f) Grammar of Kashmiri language 491.499 only not 491.4995
g) Etymology of East Germanic languages 439.9 not 439.92

[Link] Extending Table-4 Notation with notation from Table-6

DDC provided instructions at some places of table 4 to further extend the number by
using table 6. Such areas in table 4 are:

-32 -39 Bilingual Dictionaries

-802 Translation to and from other languages
-824 Structural approach to expression for those whose native language is
different
-834 Audio-lingual approach to expression for those whose national language
is different
-864 Readers for those whose native language is different

At all the notations of table 4 stated above instructions are provided to add “Language”
notation 2 – 9 from Table-6 to the designated base number.

Classify the following titles:

a) Grammar of Malayalam language
b) A study of words of Bengali language
c) Punctuation in Hindi language
d) Marathi Paleography
e) Readers of French Language
f) Etymology of Assamese Language
g) Vocabulary of Sanskrit language
Library Classification Practice 1.8.4 Introduction to Dewey Decimal..

h) Readers of Provencal French language

i) Structural system of the Hindi language

1.8.3 USE OF TABLE-6: LANGUAGES

Table-6 languages provide notation for specific languages to be used by add instructions
only, when required through out the schedules and auxiliary tables. The numbers in this table
do not necessarily correspond exactly to the numbers used for individual languages in 420 –
490 and in 810 – 890. For example the base number for English under 420 is 42, but in table 6
it is 21 not 2.

Please find the summary of Table-6 reproduced below:

-1 Indo-European (Indo-Germanic) Languages

-2 English and Old English (Anglo-Saxon)
-3 Germanic (Teutonic) languages
-4 Romance languages
-5 Italian, Romanian, Rhaeto-Romanic
-6 Spanish and Portuguese
-7 Italic languages
-8 Hellenic languages
-9 Other languages

Each of the above notations of table 6 are further subdivided hierarchically.

For example, the language family, -7 Italic Languages has been divided as follows:
-7 Italic Languages
-71 Latin
-79 Other Italic Languages
-797 Sabellian Languages
-797-9 Osco-Umbrian Languages

[Link] ADDING NOTATION FROM TABLE-6 TO SCHEDULE NUMBER

Examples:

a) Bible in Tamil 220.594 811

220 Bible
220.5 Modern versions or translations
220.53 –59 in other languages
“Add to base number 220.5 notations 3-9 from table 6”
94811 Tamil (Table-6)
220.5 + 94811 = 220.594 811
b) Bible in German Language 220.531
220.5(Bible) + 31 German (Table-6) = 220.531
c) Koran in Telugu language 297.122594827
297.1225 + 94827 Telugu (Table-6) = 297.122 594 827
d) General encyclopedia in Malayalam 039.94812
030 General encyclopedias
039 General Encyclopedias in Other languages
Add to base number 039 notation 309 from table 6
Library Classification Practice 1.8.5 Use of Tables 4 & 6

94812 Malayalam (Table-6)

039 + 94812 (Table-6) = 039.948 12

e) General Encyclopedia in Telugu

039 + 94827 Telugu (Table-6) = 039.948 27

f) General serials in Hindi 059.91431

050 General serial publications
059 General serial publications in other Languages
059.7 -.9 Add “Languages” notation 7-9 from Table-6 to base number 059
91431 Hindi language (Table-6)

05 9+ 91431 = 059.91431

g) A general periodical in French 054.41

054 General serial publications in French, Provencal, Catalon
Add “Language” notation 41 – 49 from Table – 6 to base number 05
41 French (Table-6)
05 + 41 (Table-6) = 054.1

Classify the following titles:

a) Scandinavian language encyclopedia
b) General encyclopedia in Telugu language
c) Bible in Hindi language
d) Bibliographies of Works in French language
e) English as a foreign language in elementary schools
f) Tamil proverbs
g) Sanskrit Calligraphy
h) A general periodical in Russian language

[Link] ADDING NOTATION FROM TABLE – 6 AND TABLE – 2 TOGETHER TO

SCHEDULE NUMBER

In the schedules of DDC you will find instructions at certan class numbers to add
notation from table – 6 and then areas notation from table – 2 with an interposing ‘

305 Social groups

305.7 Language groups
(Add “Languages” notation 1 – 9 from Table-6 to base number 305.7,
then add ‘0’ and to the result add notation -1 to -9 from table - 2)
.
Examples:

a) Telugu people in United States 305.794 827 073

305 Social Groups
305.7 Language groups
94827 Telugu (Table-6)
0 Interposing zero
73 United States (Table-2)
305.7 + 94827 + 0 + 73 = 305.794 827 073
Library Classification Practice 1.8.6 Introduction to Dewey Decimal..

b) German speaking people in England 305.731 042

305.7 Social stratification
31 German (Table-6)
0 Interposing zero
42 England (Table-2)

305.7 + 31 + 0 + 42 = 305.731 042

[Link] USE OF TABLE 4 AND 6 TOGETHER

[Link].1 Bilingual Dictionaries:

You have learnt from the explanation given for table – 4 in the earlier sections of this
lesson, how to classify a dictionary of a specific language using notation from Table-4. For
example English dictionary 423 (42 base number for English, -3 dictionaries in table 4). Bilingual
dictionary deals with two different languages. For example, English-Hindi dictionary is a
bilingual dictionary. It gives the words of English and its meaning in Hindi. DDC gave
instructions to use number for one language from 420 – 490 and for another language,
notations of Table-6. Such instruction in Table-4 Sub-divisions of individual languages is found
under the notation -32-39.

-32 – 39 Bilingual Dictionaries (Table-4)

Add “Languages” notation 2 – 9 from Table-6 to the base number -3,
e.g. dictionaries of the language and English -321;
e.g. French and English Dictionary 443.21
In essence, the formula for number building of bilingual dictionaries is
Base number of the language + 3 (Table-4) + 2 – 9 (Table-6)

In the above formula, base number is a language number and again 2 – 9 (Table-6) also
a language number. Then the problem arises which language number be treated first or taken
from schedule.

The instructions under 32-39 (Table-4) provide following options:

(1) Class a bilingual dictionary with the language in which entry words is found in the
dictionary. For example English-Telugu dictionary. In this entry words are in English.
Hence English language number is taken from the schedule. It is classed in 423.94827
(2) A bilingual dictionary with entry words in both languages is classed in the language it will
be the more useful, e.g. most libraries in English speaking regions will find English-
French dictionaries most useful classed with French in 443.21, Chinese-French
dictionaries with Chinese in 495.1341.
(3) If classification with either language is equally useful, class with the language coming
later in the sequence 420 – 490, e.g., French-German dictionaries 443.31.

Examples:
a) Hindi - Telugu dictionary 491.433
491.43 Hindi
3 Dictionary (Table-4)
-94827 Telugu (Table-6)
Library Classification Practice 1.8.7 Use of Tables 4 & 6

491.43 + 3 + 94827 = 491.43394827

b) Tamil-Malayalam dictionary 494.811 394 812

(Entry words are in Telugu only)
494.811 Tamil
3 Dictionary (Table-4)
94812 Malayalam (Table-6)

494.811 + 3 + 94812 = 494.827 394 812

c) Tamil-Malayalam Dictionary 494.812 394 811

(Entry words are in Malayalam)
494.812 Malayalam
-3 Dictionary
94811 Tamil (table 6)

d) French-Latin dictionary 473.41

47 Latin (base number)
3 Dictionary (Table-4)
41 French (Table-6)
(Latin 470, French 440; Latin comes later in the sequence. So classed with Latin
when two languages are important)

[Link].2 Language Works for those whose native language is different:

DDC provided instructions to use table 6 at following positions of table 4 if required to

extend the notation.

-24 Foreign elements

-824 Structural approach to expression for those whose native language is different
-834 Audio-lingual approach to expression for those whose native language is
different
-864 Readers (Primers) for those whose native language is different

Examples:

a) Sanskrit Phrases in Telugu language

494.827 Telugu (base number)
24 Foreign Elements (Table-4)
Add “Languages” notation 1 – 9 form Table 6 to -24
912 Sanskrit (Table-6)

494.827 + 24 (Table-4) + 912 (Table-6) = 494.827.24912

b) German elements in French language

44 + 24 (Table-4) + 31 (Table-6) = 442.431

c) Hindi words in Urdu Language

491.439 + 24 (Table-4) + 91431 (Table-6) = 491.439 2491431
d) French words in Tamil language
Library Classification Practice 1.8.8 Introduction to Dewey Decimal..

494.811 + 24 (table-4) + 41 (Table-6) = 494.811 244 1

Classify the following titles involving the simultaneous use of Tables 4 and 6:
a) Sanskrit – Telugu dictionary
b) Russian- Englis dictionary (Entry words are in Russian)
c) Tamil-English dictionary
d) Sanskrit Phrases in Telugu language
e) English words in Hindi language
f) Telugu words absorbed in Urdu language
g) Learning Latin through English
h) Chinese words and phrases used in English
i) English primer for Telugu speaking readers
j) Audio-lingual approach to German for Tamil speaking learners

1.8.4 Summing up
This lesson explained with examples the use of tables 4 and 6. Table 4 notations are
being used for extending the numbers of individual languages 420 -490 from the schedule.
Table 6 is being used by the numbers from certain places of the schedule and in classifying the
bilingual dictionaries. Hence the tables 4 and 6 are explained consecutively in this lesson.
Library Classification Practice 1.9.1 Use of Tables 5 & 7

Lesson – 9
USE OF TABLES 5 & 7
1.9 AIM AND OBJECTIVE
The aim of this lesson is to introduce the student to the Tables 5 and 7 of DDC and
explain the instructions given in the schedule and tables regarding the use of these tables.

Study of this lesson enables the student to:

‐ Locate the areas in the schedules and tables requiring the use of Tables 5 and 7
‐ Know about how to make use of Table-5 in extending the class numbers.
‐ Know about how to make use of Table-7 in extending the class numbers.

STRUCTURE
1.9.1 Introduction
1.9.2 Use of Table-5
[Link] Using Table-5 on Instruction in the Schedules
[Link] Using Table-5 through other Tables
[Link] Extending Table-5 notation from Table-2
1.9.3 Use of Table-7
[Link] Using Table-7 as per instructions in Schedules
[Link] Using Table-7 through Standard Sub-divisions
[Link] Using Table-7 in conjunctions with other Tables
1.9.4 Summing up

1.9.1 INTRODUCTION
In the previous lessons Table-1 Standard subdivision, Table-2: Areas and Table-3: Sub-
divisions of individual literatures, Table – 4: subdivisions of individual languages and Table – 6:
individual language numbers are explained. This lesson deals with the remaining two auxiliary
tables 5 and 7. Tables 4 and 6 are explained consecutively in the previous lesson as these two
tables deal with language umbers.

Table-5 : Racial, ethnic, national groups

Table-7 : Groups of Persons

You already know from the earlier lessons that table -1 notation can be used even
without instruction. Table - 2 is used with instruction from the schedule and through -09 of table
- 1, when there is no instruction. Table - 3 is exclusively used to extend the numbers of main
class 800 Literature. Tables 5 and 7 are used to extend the number as per instructions in the
schedules and other auxiliary tables of DDC through instructions.
Centre for Distance Education 1.9.2 Acharya Nagarjuna University

1.9.2 USE OF TABLE-5: RACIAL, ETHNIC, NATIONAL GROUPS

Table-5 contains notations designating specific, racial, ethnic or national groups.
Notation of this table is never used alone. These may be used as required either directly when
so noted in the schedule or through the interposition of notation -089 from table 1. The summary
of the Table-5 is reproduced below:

-1 North Americans
-2 British English Anglo-Saxons
-3 Nordic (Germanic) peoples
-4 Modern Latin people
-5 Italians, Romanians, related groups
-6 Spanish and Portuguese
-7 Other Italic peoples
-8 Greeks and related groups
-9 Other racial, ethnic, national groups

Each division of the above notation has been hierarchically divided.

For example:

-3 Nordic (Germanic) People

-39 Other Germanic People
- 393 Netherlands people
-393 1 Dutch

[Link] USING TABLE-5 ON INSTRUCTIONS IN THE SCHEDULES

DDC provided instructions to use Table-5 notation at certain class numbers in the
Schedules. Such instructions generally appear as follows:

“Add to base number xxxx notation 01 to -99 from table 5”

Examples:
a) Psychology of Indians 155.8491411
155.8 Ethno psychology and national psychology
155.84 Specific racial ethnic groups
Instructions are given to add notation 3-9 from table 5 to the base number
155.84
91411 Indians (Table-5)
155.84 + 91411 = 155.8491411

b) Psychology of Telugu people

155.84 + 94827 Telugu (Table-5) = 155.8494827
c) A social study of Malayalees
305.8 + 94812 (Table-5) = 305.894812
d) Social Welfare problems of young South Asians 362.797914
Library Classification Practice 1.9.3 Use of Tables 5 & 7

362.7 problems of and services to young people

362.797 young people of racial, ethnic, national groups
Add to base number 362.797 notations 3-9 from table 5.
362.797 + 914 South Asians (Table-5) = 362.797 914

e) Chinese Cooking 641.592 951

641.5 Cooking
641.592 Ethnic cooking
Add to base number 641.592 notations 03-9 from table 5.
951 Chinese (Table-5)
641.592 + 951 = 641.592 951

f) Nepalese Dishes 641.592 914 95

641.592 + 91495 Nepalese (Table-5) = 641.592 91495

g) Japanese method of preparing food

641.592 + 956 Japanese (Table-5) = 641.592 956

[Link] USING TABLE- 5 THROUGH OTHER TABLES

I) As already stated above DDC has made provision for using numbers of table – 5
through the interposition of “standard sub-divisions” notation -089 from Table-1 with
any number form the schedules;
II) Table 5 notation may also be used when so noted with numbers form table 2, “Areas”
notation -174.
III) Another provision to use Table-5 notation is given in Table-3C at -8 Literatures for and
by various specific, racial, ethnic, national groups.

I) Using Table-5 through Standard Sub-division

The 20th edition of DDC has made provision for freely using Table-5 through
Standard Sub-division notation -089 (table 1)
-089 Racial, ethnic, national groups
Add to base number -089 notations 01-99 from table 5
Examples:
a) Indian Women workers 331.408 991 411

331.4 Women workers

-089 Racial, ethnic, national groups (Table-1)
91411 Indians (Table-5)

331.31 + 089 + 91411 = 331.310 899 141 1

b) Development of Football among Italians

796.33 Football
089 Racial, ethnic, national groups (Table-1)
51 Italians (Table-5)
Centre for Distance Education 1.9.4 Acharya Nagarjuna University

796.33 + 089 + 51 = 796.330 895 1

c) Reading habits of English people

028.9 Reading habits
089 Racial, ethnic, national groups (Table-1)
21 English peoples (Table-5)

028.9 + 089 + 21 = 028.908 921

II) Using Table-5 through Table-2 Notation -174

Provision to use Table-5 has been made at the notation -174 of table 2.
-174 Regions where specific racial, ethnic, national groups predominate
Add to base number 174 notations 01-99 from table 5.

Examples

a) Role of Adult Education in the regions where Negroes predominate

374 Adult Education
374.9 Historical, geographical, persons treatment
-174 Regions where Racial, ethnic, national groups predominate (Table-2)
-96 Negroes (Table-5)
374.9 + 174 + 96 = 374.917 496

III) Using Table-5 through Table-3C

Notation of table 5 can be used at notation -8 of table 3-C in DDC 20th edition
- 8 Literature for and by various specific, racial, ethnic, national groups
Add to -8 notation 01-99 from table 5.
Examples:
a) A collection of English poetry by Bengalis
82 English literature (Base Number)
1 Poetry (Table-3B)
-08 Collections
Add o to -08; then to the result add notation 001-99 from table 3-
C.
-0808 Literatures for and by Racial, ethnic, national groups (Table-3C)
-9144 Bengalis (Table-5)
82 + 1 + 08 + 0 + 8 + 9144 = 821.080 891 44

b) A critical appraisal of American Drama composed by Bengalis

81 American literature
2 Drama
-091-099 Literature displaying specific features…(Table-3B)
Add to -09 notations 1-9 from table 3-C
-8 Literatures for and by Racial, ethnic, national groups (Tables-3C)
-9144 Bengalis (table 5)
81 + 2 + 09 + 8 + 9144 = 812.09 891 44

c) Critical appraisal of English Fiction composed by Africans

Library Classification Practice 1.9.5 Use of Tables 5 & 7

82 English literature
-3 Fiction
-091-099 Literature displaying specific features…(Table-3B)
Add to -09 notations 1-9 from table 3-C
-8 Literature for and by Racial, ethnic, national groups (Tables-3C)
-96 Africans (Table-5)
82 + 3 + 09 + 8 + 96 = 823.09 896

Classify the following titles using Table-5:

a) Reading habits of Tamilians in England

b) Critical appraisal of Urdu poetry composed by physically disabled poets
c) Trade Unions of Chinese in USA
d) Development of Polo among Indians
e) French poetry written by Indians – A Collection’
f) Collection of American poetry by Nepalis in India
g) Collection of Telugu poetry by Indians in UK
h) Critical appraisal of French poetry composed by Bengalis lining in UK

[Link] EXTENDING TABLE-5 NOTATION BY NOTATION FROM TABLE-2

DDC provided two methods for extending notation of Table-5 by that of Table-2 “Areas”.

1) Extending Table-5 using zero as facet indicator; and

2) Directly extending Table-5 by Table-2 through instructions

1. Extending Table -5 using zero as a facet indicator:

At the beginning of the table – 5 para -2 provide instruction to extend the notation of
table – 5 using ‘0’ as facet indicator. The instruction reads “Except where instructed otherwise,
and unless it is redundant add 0 to the number form this table and to the result add notation 1 –
9 from Table-2”.
French people in India -41054
-41 French people 9from Table-5)
0 Facet indicator
54 India (Table-2)

-41 + 0 + 54 = -41054 French people in India

Similarly,
Tamilians in UK -94811041
94811 Tamilians (Table-5) + 0 + 41 UK (Table-2) = -94811042
Examples:
a) A social study of Malayalis in the United States
305.8 Social stratification
94812 Malayalis (Table-5)
0 Facet indicator
41 United Kingdom (Table-2)

305.8 + 94812 + 0 + 41 = 305.894 812 041

b) French nationals in US
Centre for Distance Education 1.9.6 Acharya Nagarjuna University

305.8 + 41 French nationals (Table-5) + 0 + 73 United States (Table-2) = 305.841 073

c) Relation of State to Indians in Germany : A Political Study

323.11 + 91411(Table-5) + 0 + 43 Germany (Table-2) = 323.119 141 104 3

d) Indian labour in Qatar

331.11 + 91411 (Table-5) + 0 + 5363 Qatar (Table-2) = 331.119 141 105363

e) Education of Negroes in United States

371.97 + 96 Negroes (Table-5) + 0 + 73 (table-2) = 371.979 607 3

f) Education of Tibetans in Andhra Pradesh

371.97 + 954 Tibetans (Table-5) + 0 + 5484 A.P.(Table-2) = 371.979 54 054 84

g) Preparing Chinese dishes in India

641.592 + 951 (Table-5) + 0 + 54(Table-2) = 641.592 951 05 4

2. Directly Extending Table-5 by notation form Table-2:

At the following divisions in Table-5, instructions are provided to add “Areas” notation
from Table-2 to base number…

-687 -688 National Groups of Spanish and Portugese

-9275 -9276 National Groups of Arabs
-96073 Afro-Americans (United Stated Blacks)
-966 -968 National Groups in Africa
-969 Other National groups of largely African descent

For example number for Chileans in United States can be constructed like this:

-68 Spanish Americans

-687-688 National groups
Add to base number -68 notation 7-8 from table 2.
83 Chile (table 2)
-6883 Chileans
0 facet indicator
-73 United States (table 2)

Examples:
a) Psychology of Brazilians in Iraq

155.84 + 6881(Table-5) + 0 + 567(table-2) = 155.846 881 056 7

b) Cooking habits of Antiguans in America

Library Classification Practice 1.9.7 Use of Tables 5 & 7

641.592 + 96972974 + 0 + 73 = 641.592 969 729 740 73

1.9.3. USING TABLE- 7 PERSONS

Table 7 contains notations designating persons by specific occupations and other
classes. These notations are never used alone. These are to be used as required with any
number in the schedule. These may also be used as noted with numbers from tables. In any
case if the resultant number becomes redundant the numbers from this table are not to be used.

The summary given at the beginning of table 7 is reproduced here

-01 Individual persons

-02 Groups of persons
-03-08 Persons by various non occupational characteristics
-09 Persons by racial, ethnic, national background
-1-9 Specialists (persons occupied with specific disciplines,
subjects, activities as study, profession, vocation,
hobby, affiliation. In general the notations from -1
through -9 are developed from a reduction of numbers
from the whole classification. However it is advised that
the classifier should consult this table)

The summary of 1 to 9 is produced as below

-1 persons occupied with philosophy etc. (main class 100)

-2 persons occupied with religion etc. (main class 200)
-3 persons occupied with social sciences (main class 300)
-4 persons occupied with languages (main class 400)
-5 persons occupied with pure sciences (main class 500)
-6 persons occupied with applied sciences (main class 600)
-7 persons occupied with arts (main class 700)
-8 persons occupied with literature (main class 800)
-9 persons occupied with geography, history (main class 900)

DDC 20th edition provided the following ways to use notation from the table – 7

1. As per instructions in the schedules

2. Through interposition of -024 or -088 of standard subdivisions
3. In conjuction with other tables

[Link] Using table – 7 as per instruction in the schedules

At certain class numbers in the schedules instructions are provided to use table 7
persons. You find the following instructions at some places of the schedule:

Add to base number xxxx , notation -09 -99 from table 7

For example at the following schedule numbers you will find instruction to add from table 7.

704 Special topics in fine and decorative arts

Centre for Distance Education 1.9.8 Acharya Nagarjuna University

704.04 - .87 History, and description with respect to kinds of persons

Add to base number 704 notation 04-87 from table 7.
390.4.1 customs of people by occupation
Add to base number 390.4 notation 09-99 from table 7.
305.6.1 Religious groups
Add to base number 305.6 the numbers following -2 in notation
21-29 from table 7.
Examples:

a) Customs of Judges
390.4 costumes of people by occupation
- 343 Judges (table 7 )
390.4 + -343 = 390.434 3

b) Customs of Doctors

390.4 costumes of people by occupation

390. 4 + 61 Doctors (table 7) = 390.461

c) Hindus in Pakistan
305.6 Religious groups
945 Hindus in -2945 of table 7 omitting 2 by direction
0 interposing 0 by direction at 305.6
5491 Pakistan
305.6 + 945 + 0 + 5491 = 305.694 505 491

d) Doctors as artists
704 History and description with respect to kinds of persons
Add to base number 704 notation 04-87 from table 7
-61 Doctors (table 7)
704 + 61 = 704.61

[Link] Using table – 7 through Standard Subdivisions

DDC provided provision to add notation of table – 7 through standard subdivision

notation of -024 and -088 if required by the document to be classified. The instructions are given
as follows:

a) -024 Works for specific types of users

Add to base number -024 notations 03-99 from table 7.

Examples

i. Mathematics for Librarians 510.240 92

51 Mathematics (base number for mathematics)
-024 Works for specific types of users
-092 Librarians (table 7)
ii. Statistics for Doctors 310.246 1
Library Classification Practice 1.9.9 Use of Tables 5 & 7

31 Statistics
-024 Works for specific types of users
-61 Doctors
b) -088 Occupational and religious groups
-088 09 -08899 Specific Occupational and religious groups
Add to base number -088 notations from table 7.

Examples
i. Contribution of Buddhists to medicine 610.882 943
61 Medicine (base number
-088 Specific Occupational and religious groups (base
number)
-294 3 Buddhist (table 7)

ii. Cartoons drawn by poets 741.508 881

741.5 Cartoons
-088 Specific Occupational and religious groups (base number)
-81 Poets (table 7)

[Link] Using table – 7 in conjunction with other tables

DDC 20th edition gave provision to add notation of table 7 through table 2 (Areas) and
table 3A.

a) Use of table 7 through table 2

At following notations of table 2 provisions is given to add notation from
table 7.
-17 Socioeconomic regions
-176 Regions where specific religions predominate
-1762 -1769 Other religions
Add to base number -176 the numbers following -
29 in 292-299 from table 7.

Examples

i. Economic conditions of Buddhist countries 330.917 643

330.9 Economic situation and conditions

330.91-.99 Geographical treatment
Add to base number 330.9 notations 1-9
from table 2.
-1762 – 1769 other religions (table 2)
Add to base number -176 the numbers
following -29 in 292-299
-2943 Buddists (table 7)
330.9 + 176 + 43 = 330.917 643
ii. Compensation for labour in Sikh countries
331.29 Historical and geographical treatment of compensation
Add to base number 331.29 notation 01-99 from
table 2
-1762 – 1769 other religions (table 2)
Centre for Distance Education 1.9.10 Acharya Nagarjuna University

Add to base number -176 the numbers

following -29 in 292-299
-294 6 Sikhism

Hence the number is 331.29 + 176 + 46 = 331.291 764 6

b) Use of table 7 in conjunction with table 3C

At following places of table 3C provision is given to add table 7 notations

-352 Specific kinds of persons

Add to base number -352 notations 03-99 from table 7
-9204-9279 persons of specific occupational …
Add to -92 notations 04-79 from table 7.
-929 persons occupied with geography, history …
Add to -929 the numbers following -9 in notation 91-
99 from table 7.

Example
i. Critical Treatment of women in English Drama
82 English (base number
-2 Drama (table 3B)
-091-099 Literature displaying special features…
Add to -09 notations -1-9 from table 3C
-352 Specific kinds of persons (table 3C)
Add to -352 notations 03-99 from table 7
-042 Women (table 7)
Hence the number is 82 + 2 + 09 + 352 + 042 = 822.093 520 42

1.9.4 Summing up
This lesson explained with examples the use of tables 5 and 7. Table 5 notations are
enumerated for racial, ethnic and national groups. These numbers are being used for extending
the numbers from the schedule whenever there are instructions. Table 7 is being used by the
numbers from certain places of the schedule and in classifying the documents which requires
treatment of persons. The rules and procedure to build class number with these tables is clearly
explained with examples.
Library Classification Practice 1.10.1 Web Dewey

UNIT - I
Lesson – 10
Web Dewey
STRUCTURE

1.10.1 Introduction
1.10.2 Key features of Full Version of Web Dewey include
1.10.3 Abridged Web Dewey

1.10.1 INTRODUCTION
Dewey Decimal Classification is available in the WEB in two versions namely Full
Version and Abridged Version One can experience the power of Dewey on the web! Now you
can have web-based access to an enhanced version of the Dewey Decimal Classification
(DDC) database through Web Dewey.

1.10.2 Key features of Full Version of Web Dewey include

¾ An easy-to-use, browser-based interface that allows you to search the DDC (and related
terminology) efficiently and navigate intuitively
¾ Thousands of Relative Index terms and built numbers not available in the print DDC
¾ Library of Congress Subject Headings (LCSH) that have been intellectually mapped to
Dewey headings by DDC editors
¾ Selected LCSH mappings from the new OCLC Forest Press publication, People, Places
& Things
¾ LCSH that have been statistically mapped to Dewey numbers from records in World Cat
(the OCLC Online Union Catalog)
¾ Links from mapped LCSH to the LCSH authority records
¾ Quarterly updates, incorporating the latest changes to the Classification and new LCSH
mappings, index terms, and built numbers
¾ An annotation capability, which allows you to add your own notes into Web Dewey to
reflect local classification practices
Web Dewey is available on an annual subscription basis. You may start your
subscription at any time of year. Prices will be less for OCLC cataloguing service users.
Centre for Distance Education 1.10.2 Acharya Nagarjuna University

If your library uses OCLC cataloging services, choose from Web Dewey (OCLC
Cataloging Services Edition)

¾ Single User (For use by one staff member in your library) $225/year
¾ Site License (For use by an unlimited number of staff members in your library) $500/year
¾ If your library does not use OCLC cataloging services, choose from:
¾ Web Dewey Single User (For use by one staff member in your library) $275/year
¾ Site License (For use by an unlimited number of staff members in your library) $575/year

System Requirements:

¾ 300 MHz Pentium II;

¾ 64MB RAM;
¾ display resolution of 1024 x 768;
¾ latest version of Microsoft Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator

1.10.3. Abridged Web Dewey

Abridged version of DDC is also available in the WEB. Experience the power of Dewey
on the web! Now you can have web-based access to an enhanced version of the 13th abridged
edition of the Dewey Decimal Classification (DDC) database through Abridged Web Dewey.

Key features of Abridged Web Dewey include:

¾ An easy-to-use, browser-based interface that allows you to search the DDC (and
related terminology) efficiently and navigate intuitively
¾ Thousands of Relative Index terms and built numbers not available in the print
version of the DDC
¾ Library of Congress Subject Headings (LCSH) that have been intellectually
mapped to Dewey headings by DDC editors, including many from the Forest
Press publication Subject Headings for Children
¾ Mappings between abridged Dewey numbers and subject headings from the
latest edition of H.W. Wilson's Sears List of Subject Headings
¾ Links from mapped LCSH to the LCSH authority records
¾ Quarterly updates, incorporating the latest changes to the Classification and new
LCSH mappings, index terms, and built numbers
¾ An annotation capability, which allows you to add your own notes into Abridged
Web Dewey to reflect local classification practices
Library Classification Practice 1.10.3 Web Dewey

¾ Abridged Web Dewey is available on an annual subscription basis, according to

the table below. You may start your subscription at any time of year.

Abridged Web Dewey (OCLC Cataloging Services Edition)

¾ Single User (For use by one staff member in your library) $65/year
¾ Site License (For use by an unlimited number of staff members in your library)
$130/year
¾ If your library does not use OCLC cataloging services, choose from:
¾ Abridged Web Dewey Single User (For use by one staff member in your library)
$75/year
¾ The License (For use by an unlimited number of staff members in your library)
$150/year

System Requirements

¾ 300 MHz Pentium II;

¾ 64MB RAM; display resolution of 1024 x 768;
¾ latest version of Microsoft Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator
 UNIT – 2: COLON CLASSIFICATION PRACTICE

The “Classification practice” paper of the [Link]. Course of Acharya Nagarjuna

University includes two units. The unit -1 deals with DDC (Dewey Decimal
Classification) and unit – 2 deals with CC (Colon Classification)

The Unit - 2 explains the practice of classifying the documents according to

Colon classification. This unit comprises 10 lessons and followed the sequence of main
classes as given in the schedule of CC. The examples are clearly explained with notes
for easy understanding of the lessons. Assignments and list of books for further reading
have been given at the end of each lesson for the use of students.
Library Classification Practice 2.1.1 Introduction to Colon Classification

UNIT - II
Lesson – 1:
Introduction to Colon Classification (6th edition)
2.1.0 Objective
This lesson explains the candidate about the origin, the structure, the notational system
of Colon Classification. It also explains the division of knowledge conceived by
[Link]. The postulation of fundamental categories and subject analysis followed in
Colon Classification is discussed.

Structure

2.1.1 Introduction
2.1.2 The Structure
2.1.3 Notational system
2.1.4 Basic concepts of C.C., useful in construction of Class Numbers,
such as: Division of Universe of knowledge, Main Classes, Facet,
Isolate, Array, Chain, Five Fundamental Categories
2.1.5 Subject analysis, Synthesis, Latent facet
2.1.6 Postulate approach in classification of documents
2.1.7 Summary
2.1.8 Technical terms
2.1.9 Self Assessment Questions
2.1.10 Reference books
2.1.11 Abbreviations used in all the lessons in this book

2.1.1 Introduction
The Process of assigning the class number to a document is classifying or classification.
It is nothing but translating the name of the subject of the document from a natural language to
the artificial language of ordinal numbers, forming classificatory language. There are many
schemes of Classification in existence for classifying the documents. Colon Classification is one
of the schemes of classification devised by Dr. S. R. Ranganathan in 1933. The sixth edition of
it was published in 1960. Its reprint published in 1963 and 1976.

This scheme is ‘analytico-synthetic’ because according to this scheme it is possible to

analyse the title of the given document into its constituent parts and then synthesize (combine)
the parts with their representative notational symbols into a compact class number.
Centre for Distance Education 2.1.2 Acharya Nagarjuna University

2.1.2 The Structure

The Colon Classification Schedule consists of three parts with an annexure pre-fixed as
detailed below:

Part 1: Describes the rules

Part 2: Describes the construction of Book Number, enumeration of summary of Main

Classes, Common Isolates, Time isolates, Space isolates, Language isolates,
Phase relations, The schedules of classification.

Part 3: Deals with schedules of classics and sacred books with special names Index to
the schedule is given immediately at the end of the schedule except for subjects Botany
and zoology for which index is placed adjacent to the subjects, Annexure is given at the
beginning which explains the changes incorporated in the 6th edition and its reprints.

2.1.3 Notational system

Notational System means the artificial language used in the classification schemes to
represent subjects in the universe of knowledge. There are broadly TWO types of notations
followed in classification schemes. One is pure notation and the other is mixed notation. In the
pure notation schemes either Arabic numbers or Roman alphabets are used. In the mixed
notation schemes both Arabic numbers and Roman alphabets with some special characters are
used. Colon Classification followed mixed notation system and uses the following as notation to
represent the subjects:

1) 10 Indo-Arabic numerals: 1 to 9 and 0;

2) 26 Capital letters of the Roman Alphabet; A to Z;
3) 23 small letters of the Roman alphabet: a to z except i,l,o
4) 2 Greek letters: ∑ (sigma), ∆ (Delta)
5) The connecting digits , ; : , . ' ( ) - ← →
The digits are written from left to right and read as ordinal numbers only. For instance,
the value of 22 should be read as two-two but not twenty two.

2.1.4 Basic concepts of CC

The Universe of knowledge consists of entities (universe of subjects). These entities may
be concrete or conceptual, that is, things or ideas.
The Universe of subjects is divided into three groups as: Natural and Applied Sciences;
Humanities; and Social Sciences. Each group comprises basic subjects.

Main Classes:
Each basic subject is represented as MAIN CLASS in the schedule. Some subjects are
divided first into CANONICAL CLASSES. A Main Class or Canonical Class is said to be Basic
Class or Basic Subject un the scheme of Colon Classification.

Facet:
A facet is the totality of divisions of a category formed by division based on a single train
of characteristics. Thus each Main class is further divided into facets by the application of a
single train of characteristics.
Library Classification Practice 2.1.3 Introduction to Colon Classification

Isolate:
Each division in a facet is called an isolate. The isolates in a facet are called foci. An
isolate is the ultimate division of knowledge in the Colon Classification scheme. Each isolate is
a focus or a qualifying concept or a characteristic. A characteristic is a differentiating quality or
an attribute. In a given context an isolate belongs to one and only one facet, thus to one
category and one Main class only.

Isolates are of two kinds namely Common isolates and Special isolates. Common
isolates are applicable to all main classes or subjects. These remain the same and applicable
for every subject. So the schedule of these isolates are given once for all in pages 2.5 and 2.6
of C.C. 6th edition

The special isolates unique for every subject which fit into some or all of the Five
fundamental categories are enumerated separately under each main class.

Array:
An array is a sequence of entities of equal rank. For example all the main classes form
an array. A group of isolates of a facet formed by division using single characteristic is also an
array.

Chain:
A chain is a sequence of isolates formed in successive subordination.

Fundamental categories
[Link] presumed that all the facets of any main class are the
manifestations of Five Fundamental categories. These are Personality, Matter, Energy, Space
and Time.

Each Fundamental category is preceded by a separate connecting symbol as detailed

below to avoid confusion in building class numbers and in arranging the books on the shelves:

Personality [P] , (comma)

Matter [M] ; (semicolon)
Energy [E] : (colon)
Space [S] . (dot)
Time [T] ‘ (inverted comma)

Identification of the categories

The Five Fundamental Categories are identified by a process of elimination. The
categories Space and Time are easy to identify and common to all subjects. These remain the
same whatever be the subject. They are enumerated once for all.

Time:
The fundamental category Time is the manifestation of millennium, century, decade,
years. Time also manifests the featured Time such as day, night, summer, winter, wet, dry,
stormy as second level.
The connecting symbol for Time facet is a single inverted comma (‘).
Example: U8’K’p8 Travelling in 17th century during snow Times
U Main class for Geography
8 [P] for Travel etc.
K [T[ for 17th century
Centre for Distance Education 2.1.4 Acharya Nagarjuna University

p8 [T2] for Snow Times.

Space:
Space isolates are the manifestation of the surface of the earth. These include
continents, countries, states, cities, etc. It also shows the physiographical features of the
surface of the earth such as deserts, rivers, lakes, oceans, hills, mountains etc. as second level
manifestation.

The connecting symbol to be used before space facet is a dot (.).

Example: Q4.44 Buddhism in India.
Q [MC] class for Religion
4 [P] for Buddhism
44 [S] for India

Energy:
Energy category covers certain aspects like problems, action, activities, operations,
processes, procedures, methods, functioning etc. This facet may appear more than once in
different rounds and levels in a subject.
The connecting symbol to be used before it is Colon (:)

Example: Q2:366 Rebirth in Post-vedic Hinduism

Q Main class for Religion
2 [P] for Post vedic Hinduism
366 [E] for Rebirth

Matter
Matter facet reflects substances, materials, properties etc. These facets may appear
more than once in a subject as manifestations in rounds and levels..
The connecting symbol to be used before it is semicolon (;)
Example: ND1;5:4 Design of Bronze Human figure
N [MC] Fine Arts
ND [CC] Sculpture
1 [P] for Human figure
5 [M] for Bronze
4 [E] for Design

Personality
After identifying and separating out the isolates of Time, Space, Energy, and Matter, the
remaining will be taken as Personality. (This is called the method of residue). These facets
may appear more than once as manifestations in different rounds and levels. Some times other
facets may work as attributes of Personality.

Personality category requires the connecting symbol comma (,). But the First level Personality
in every Round does not require comma.
Example: T45 Post graduate education
T [MC] Education
45 [P] for post graduation.

Example covering all the facets:

244;1512:2.44’O Organisation of Film Rolls in Newspaper offices in India in 20th
century
Library Classification Practice 2.1.5 Introduction to Colon Classification

2 [MC] for Library Science

44 [P] for Newspaper Office
1512 [M] for Film Rolls taken from [P] of Generalia Bibliography
2 [E] for Organisation
44 [S] for India
O [T] for 20th century.

2.1.5 Subject analysis

To assign Colon Class number to any given book/document the first step is to determine
the main class to which the subject falls. The next step is analysis of the title into its constituent
fundamental categories.

Synthesis
Synthesis is the process of fitting the identified categories in to the facet formula of the
main class.

Latent facet
For some documents the title as it appears on the title page a facet may be hidden. For
example, in the title “Wheat storage” storage is a secondary operation. It cannot take place
before harvesting is done. So the facet ‘harvesting’ is a hidden. This hidden face is known as
latent facet. While assigning the class number the hidden facet must be improvised at its proper
place in the facet sequence. So the the number for the title “Wheat Storage” is: J382:7:8

Agriculture wheat : Harvesting : storage

J [MC] 382[P] 7[E] 8[2E]

2.6 Postulate approach:

Postulate approach of classification of documents deal with step by step procedure

according to postulates coined by Ranganathan. Basic subject and all the fundamental
categories are to be identified first. Then the latent facets (that is, hidden facets) if any are to be
supplied.. Next they are all to be synthesized according to facet formula of the main class. In
the facet formula the terms are replaced by their isolate numbers preceded by their respective
connecting symbols.

Postulate approach in classification of documents

The postulate approach is applied in the process of determining the specific subjects
and their translation from Idea plane to Verbal plane and then to Notational plane. Classifying a
document consists of the following steps in succession:

Step 0 Raw title: Title as found in the document.

Example: Fundamentals of Threshing methods followed in Rice fields of Andhra
Pradesh

Step 1
Step 2 Kernel title: Removing all puffs and auxiliary words like ‘of’, ‘in’, ‘for’ etc., from
the Full title while retaining fundamental constituent terms. The above example
is written as:
Centre for Distance Education 2.1.6 Acharya Nagarjuna University

Harvesting Threshing Rice Andhra Pradesh

Step 3 Analysed title: This is to be derived from the kernel title by denoting the
Fundamental categories by their symbols.
The above example is written as: Harvesting (E) Threshing (2E) Rice (P)
Andhra Pradesh (S)

Step 4 Transformed title: This title is to be derived from the analysed title by re-
arranging the Main class and in the sequence of PMEST. The above example
is written as: Agriculture (BC) Rice (P) Harvesting (E) Threshing (2E) Andhra
Pradesh (S).

Step 5 Title in the standard terms: This is the title in which non-standard terms are
replaced by the terms adopted in the scheme of classification.

The above example is written as: Agriculture (BC) Rice (P) Harvesting (E)
Threshing (2E) Andhra Pradesh (S).

Step 6 Title in Facet numbers: In this step standard terms of the title are translated
into numbers as found in the classification schedules.
The above example is written as:
J(BC) 381(P) 7(E) 4(2E) 4416(S)

Step 7 Title in Class number: In this step symbols are removed and appropriate
connecting symbols are inserted according to facet formula.
For the above example the class number is: J381:7:4.4416

Step 8 Verification: The above class number is to be retranslated into natural

language by digit-by-digit interpretation in order to verify its correctness.
The above example: Fundamentals of Threshing methods followed in Rice
fields of Andhra Pradesh

J Agriculture
381 [P] for Rice
7 [E] for Harvesting
4 [2E] for Threshing
4416 [S] for Andhra
J381:7:4.4416 Fundamentals of Threshing methods followed in Rice fields
of Andhra Pradesh

2.7 Summary

Colon Classification is one of the schemes of classification for classifying the documents
for arrangement. It is an analytico-synthetic classification scheme devised by
[Link]. The notational system followed is of mixed type which consists of Indo-
Arabic numerals, capital and small letters of Roman Alphabets, Greek letters, and some
connecting symbols.
Library Classification Practice 2.1.7 Introduction to Colon Classification

The Universe of knowledge consists of universe of subjects from which Basic/main

classes and canonical classes are derived. The main classes are arranged following the
principle of increasing concreteness and increasing artificiality. Each subject will belong to one
and only one Main Class. Hence each book or document will belong to one and only one Main
Class. From main classes facets (PMEST) are derived and from facets isolates are derived.
Isolates are of two kinds as Common and Specific isolates. Common isolates are applicable to
all main classes and specific isolates belong to a particular subject.

All the facets are the manifestation of Five Fundamental Categories as Personality,
Matter, Energy, Space, and Time. Postulational approach is applied in the process of
constructing Colon Classification number.

2.8 Technical Terms

Analysis : Separation into parts.

Entity : A thing or an idea that exists.
Latent : hidden.
Physiographical : Description of natural phenomena.
Postulate : Assumption.
Residue : That which remains after successive taking out.
Synthesis : Combination of separate parts.
Totality : Sum of all items existing as at the time.

2.9 SELF ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS

Identify the Main Class and the different Fundamental Categories of the following titles:
1. Circulation of periodicals in Academic libraries in India.
2. Design of library buildings in England in 18th century.
3. Microforms in Indian National Library.
4. Fruit pests of North West India.
5. Social security systems for workers in UNO.
6. Transport in Mountains during rainy season.
7. Female education in Muslim countries.
8. Struggle for Freedom in India (1857 to 1947).
9. Holy Heart Elementary Kindergarten School, Amritsar.
10. Indian Agriculture in 1972.

2.10 Reference Books

1. Kaula, P.N.: A treatise on Colon Classification. Sterling Publishing Pvt. Ltd., New
Delhi, 1985.
2. Khanna, J.K. and Kapil, D.D.: Colon Classification. Ess Ess Publication, New Delhi,
1982.
3. Kumar, P.S.G.: Practical Classification, Volume one: Colon Classification,
Metropolital Book Co., New Delhi, 1978.
4. Mukhopadhya, Ajoy: Guide to Colon Classification Practice. Metropolital Book Co.,
Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 1976.
5. Ranganathan, S.R.: Colon Classification, 6th Reprinted edition Asia Publishing
House, Bombay, 1976.
Centre for Distance Education 2.1.8 Acharya Nagarjuna University

6. Satija, M.P.: Manual of Practical Colon Classification. Sterling Publishers Pvt., New
Delhi, 1984.

2.11 Abbreviations used in all the lessons in this book:

(P) or (P1) : 1st Round, 1st Level Personality facet.
(P2) : 1st Round, 2nd Level Personality facet.
P3) : 1st Round, 3rd Level Personality facet.
(P4) : 1st Round, 4th Level Personality facet.
(2P) : 2nd Round, 1st Level Personality facet.
(2P2) : 2nd Round, 2nd Level Personality facet.
(3P) : 3rd Round, 1st Level Personality facet.
(M) : 1st Round, 1st Level Matter facet.
(2M) : 2nd Round, Matter facet.
(3M) : 3rd Round Matter facet.
(E) : 1st Round Energy facet.
(2E) : 2nd Round Energy facet.
(3E) : 3rd Round Energy facet.
(S) : 1st Level Space facet.
(S2) : 2nd Level Space facet.
(T) : 1st Level Time facet.
(T2) : 2nd Level Time facet.
(AD) : Alphabetical Device
(CD) : Chronological Device
(GD) : Geographical Device
(MD) : Mnemonic Device
(SD) : Subject Device
(STD) : Super-imposition Device
(ACI) : Anteriorising Common Isolate
(EPCI) : Energy Posteriorising Common Isolate
(PPCI) : Personality Posteriorising Common Isolate
(BC) : Basic Class
(M.C.) : Main Class
(PRID) : Phase Relation Indicating Digits
Library Classification Practice 2.2.1 Round and Levels; Cluttering of

Lesson – 2

ROUNDS AND LEVELS; CLUTTERING OF

CONNECTING SYMBOLS; AND COMMON
SCHEDULES OF SPACE AND TIME
2.2.0 Objective :

After reading this lesson the student is enable to understand

- the concept of ‘Rounds and Levels’
- the cluttering of ‘connecting symbols’
- the Common Schedules of Space and Time including the concept of Latest Effective
Decade (LED)

Structure

2.2.1 Introduction
2.2.2 The Concept of Rounds and Levels
2.2.3 Cluttering of connecting symbols
2.2.4 Common Schedules of
[Link] Space isolates
[Link] Time isolates
2.2.5 Summary
2.2.6 Assignments
2.2.7 References

2.1 Introduction

Dr. S. R. Ranganathan presumed that any of the isolates in a subject will come under
any one and only one of the Five Fundamental Categories, namely, Personality, Matter, Energy,
Space and Time. But in some subjects the Fundamental Categories appear more than once. In
order to follow helpful sequence the concept of Rounds and Levels was developed.

2.2 Rounds

Personality, Matter, and Energy have rounds. After the First Round of these categories
if any of them still remain, the First Round Energy allows the Second Round Personality and
Matter. Therefore to allow the succeeding Rounds, the Energy Category should present in the
preceding Rounds. If the Energy category is not present, it should be assumed as though
Centre for Distance Education 2.2.2 Acharya Nagarjuna University

present and is to be supplemented. Thus the succeeding Rounds as 3rd, 4th and so on take
place. Space and Time categories appear in the last Round in any subject.
Illustration with examples

1 Hybridization of Culture in Royal Families of India = Y51:1:65

In the main class Sociology Energy [E] fact manifests in two rounds. In this example 51
is for [P] royalty, 1 is to denote (1E) culture and 65 is to denote (2E) Hybridization.

2 For the book titled ‘Audio-visual Teaching method of Algebra in secondary schools’
the number is {T2:3(B2),1}.

Here the isolate ‘Secondary schools’ belongs to the First Round Personality[P] of the
main class ‘T’ Education and Algebra is another manifestation of Personality introduced by the
Energy isolate ‘Teaching’[E] cum [2P]. So Algebra is a manifestation of the Second Round
Personality [2P] in this subject got by Subject Device (SD). Audio-visual is second round second
level personality manifests after first round energy and second round first level personality [2P2]

Levels
Levels are the steps of division within a fundamental category. The fundamental
categories, Personality and Matter may manifest themselves more than once in one and the
same Round within a subject. Similarly categories Space and Time manifests only in the last
Round but in two levels. These manifestations are called Levels.

The first manifestation of a Fundamental category within a Round is said to be its level 1
facet in that Round. Its second manifestation within that Round is said to be its level 2 in that
Round, and so on.

The successive manifestations of the Fundamental category Personality in Round 1 are

called by the respective names Round 1 Level 1 Personality Facet, Round 1 Level 2 Personality
Facet etc. The Fundamental Category Matter also manifests as Personality. There are no
levels in the case of the Fundamental Category Energy, since it can occur only once within a
Round.

Illustration with an example:

In the basic class literature Colon Classification envisages the First Round Personality
as having four levels. So the facet formula of the class is: O, [P], [P2], [P3] [P4] where O stands
for the main class Literature, P is Language facet: P2 is Form facet; P3 is Author Facet; and P4
is work Facet.

Examples
1. I3,11 Cell Structure in Bryophytes
I M.C. for Botany
3 [P] for Bryophyta
11 [P2] for cell (2nd level personality)

2. J:1:7 Soil Conservation

J M.C. for Agriculture
1 [E] for Soil
7 [2E] for Conservation (2nd round of energy)
Library Classification Practice 2.2.3 Round and Levels; Cluttering of

3. O 15,2D40,1 Sakuntala by Kalidasa

O M.C. for Literature
15 [P1] for Sanskrit language
2 [P2] for Form for Drama (2nd level Personality)
D40 [P3] for Author’s year of birth (3rd level Personality)
1 [P4] for Work number (4th level Personality)

4. L:423:31 Clinical diagnosis of Virus disease

L M.C. for Medicine
4 [E] for disease
23 [2P] for virus (2nd round P )
31 [2E] for clinical diagnosis (2nd round E)

5. Z44,211,2 Possession of land property in Indian law

Z M.C. for Law
44 [P] for India got by GD
211 [P2] for Land property (2nd level P)
2 [P3] for possession (3rd level P)

6. Y33:431:68 Charity homes for widows in Rural India

Y M.C. for Sociology
33 [P] for Rural
431 [E] for Widowhood
68 [2E] for Charity (2nd round E)

2.2.3 Cluttering of connecting Symbols:

In Colon Classification Scheme each Main Class has its own Facet formula. The Facet
formula is based on the Five Fundamental Categories, PMEST and their Rounds and Levels.
The facet formula differ from class to class and some times within a Main class itself.

Colon (:) alone is used as the connecting symbol for all the Five Fundamental
Categories up to 3rd Edition of Colon Classification. (Hence the system is called as Colon
Classification). The use of only one symbol for all the Fundamental categories created
confusion in the construction of class numbers. For instance “The Science of Diagnosis”,
denoted by the number L::3. The number for ‘diagnosis’ is 3 under [2E] cum [3P] in the Main
class Medicine (L). If the number is written as L::3 it indicates the absence of [E] [2P] which is a
violation of ‘Wall-Picture’ principle. According to ‘Wall-Picture’ principle, the [2E] cannot be used
without first using [E]. If the number is written alternatively as L:3 it represents “Human
Physiology”. This type of confused situation is called “Cluttering of Connecting Symbols”.

In order to avoid this problem separate connecting symbols as comma (,) for
Personality, Semicolon (;) for Matter, Colon (:) for Energy, a dot (.) for Space and Inverted
comma (‘) for Time facet are used from 4th edition of Colon Classification. Now the class
number for the Title: The Science of Diagnosis is L:4:3.

2.2.4 Common Schedules for Space and Time

Centre for Distance Education 2.2.4 Acharya Nagarjuna University

The isolates belonging to the categories of Space and Time remain the same for all the
subjects. Similarly Language isolates are the same for the Main class O ‘Literature’ and P
‘Linguistics’ and useful in construction of the Book Numbers.
Thus the Space Isolates, Time Isolates, and Language Isolates are enumerated
separately. The schedules of these isolates are applicable as such wherever required. While
most of the isolates are enumerated, there is provision to synthesis by certain devices to
construct numbers if necessary.

[Link] Space Isolates:

Space isolate is a common facet attachable to any main class. Its connecting symbol
is ‘.’ (that is Dot). Its isolates are enumerated in the pages 2.8 to 2.17 and page 26 in the
Annexure in the Colon Classification (CC). The rules for constructing or sharpening these
isolates are given in pages 1.51 to 1.53 and pages 20 to 23 in the Annexure of 6th edition of
CC.

Space isolates manifests in two levels (S1) and (S2).The isolates in (S1) are denoted
by numerical digits and (S2) isolates are denoted by small alphabets and numerical digits if
necessary.

The first Level division of the earth is Political (Asia, India, Andhra Pradesh); Zonal
(equitorial, tropical), Directional (East, South-East, West etc.) and Population administrative
units (Village, town or city). Digit 1 stands for the World as a whole, which is further divided by
zones and orientation. The digit 2 stands for mother country and the digit 3 for the Favoured
country. The digits 4 to 8 represent various continents which are further divided into countries
and states. The last digit 9 represents the various islands and the oceans. In addition to these
enumerated isolates, many more isolates can be constructed by Subject Devise (SD),
Chronological Device (CD), Super imposition Device (SID), Alphabetical Device (AD), and by
combination of (CD) and (SD), and by combination of (CD) and (SID), etc.

Examples under Subject Device (SD)

1. 1(W691) Communist Countries
1 [S] for world
(W691) [SD] for communistic countries where W is M.C. for Political
Science and 691 [P] for communism.

2. 44(J381) Rice growing states in India

44 [S] for India
(J381) [SD] for rice where J is M.C. for Agriculture and 381 is [P]
for rice.

3. 1(P111) English speaking countries

1 [S] for world
(P111) [SD] for English where P is M.C. for Linguistics and 111 is
[P] for Modern English language

Examples under Chronological Device (CD)

1. 1N19 League of Nations (established in 1919), got by (CD)

1 [S] for World
Library Classification Practice 2.2.5 Round and Levels; Cluttering of

N19 (T) for 1919 used as (CD) (Established in 1919)

2. 1N4 United Nations Organization (established in 1940s) got by (CD)

1 [S] for world
N4 [T] for 1940s used as (CD) (Year of establishment of UNO).

3. 43N67 Association of South East Asian Nations established in 1967

43 (S) for South East Asian nations,
N67 [T] for 1940s used as (CD) (Year of establishment of the
Association of South east Asian Nations).

Examples under Superimposition Device (SID)

1. 44-56 British India / got by (SID) where 44 (S) for India and 56 (S) for
Great Britain.

2. 1-56 British colonies in the world got by (SID) where 1(S) for world
and 56 (S) for Great Britain.

3. 6-53 French Africa got by (SID) where 6 is (S) for Africa and 53(S) for
France.

Example under combination of (CD & SD) together

1N4(W691) Communist member countries of UNO.
1 [S] for world
N4 [T] for 1940s used as (CD) (Year of establishment of
UNO).
(W691) [P] for communist members got by (SD) where W is M.C.
for Political Science and 691 is (P) for Communism

Example under (SID) and (SD) used in succession

44-56(J381) Rice growing States in British India
44-56 (SID) for British India, where 44 is (S) for India and 56 is
(S) for Gt. Britain.
(J381) (SD) for Rice growing areas where J is M.C. for
Agriculture, and 381 (P) for rice.

Isolate Number for Population Cluster using Alphabetical Device (AD)

If an isolate number for population cluster is not enumerated it can be got by using Alphabetical
Device (AD). A dot (.) is used between the area number and the (AD).

Example: 4443.L Ludhiana (a city in East Punjab)

4416.H Hyderabad (a city in Andhra Pradesh)
4471.B Bhuvaneswar ( a city in Orissa)

Sub-division of geographical area by Orientation:

A geographical area can be subdivided further by orientation. In the Space schedule the
World 1 is divided by orientation(north, south, east, west etc) denoted by numbers 19A to 19Y).
Using these numbers any geographical area number can be constructed by omitting 1 and
inserting dot (.) between geographical area and orientation number.
Centre for Distance Education 2.2.6 Acharya Nagarjuna University

Examples
5.9B East Europe
4443.9D Middle Punjab
4443.A.9B East Amritsar (in Punjab)
Note: If the orientation division of any area is given by enumeration, it need not be got by
synthesis. For example, North America is enumerated as 71. So getting a number to it
by synthesis as 7.9S is wrong.

Isolate number for a greater Metropolitan city:

Isolate number for a greater Metropolitan city is to be got by the division of the country
itself but not from the division of the State to which it belongs.

Examples:
44.M Mumbai
44.M.9X Inside Mumbai
44.K Kolkatta
44.K.9Y Outside Kolkatta
4416.H.9R North-west Hyderabad
Note: Use the schedule for Space isolates marked as ‘After 1956’ for India

Second Level Space (S2)

The Second Level of Space (S2) representing physical features of the earth comes after
the First Level space. Its isolates are enumerated in page 26 of the Annexure. The indicator
digit (connecting symbol) for (S2) is also the dot (.).

Examples:
U2855.44.f Rainfall in Indian forests
U8.r Sea travels
G:12.g7 Fauna and Flora of Mountains
G:12.44.f Fauna and Flora of Indian forests.

The Second Level Space (S2) may be sharpened by Alphabetical Device (AD) in the
case of specifically named physical features.
Examples:
U8.4.g7H Travels in Himalaya mountains
I:13.44.g1G Natural history of Plants in Gangetic Valley
U.44.p1K Geography of Krishna River

Space Isolates used as Personality facet:

Space isolates impersonate as Personality Isolates in Canonical Classes NZ to NR, V History,

and Z Law, and also in common isolates, whenever a geographical isolate officiates as
Personality Facet, its indicator digit must be changed to comma from dot.
Example: V4411.M History of Madras city. Z44 for Indian Law

Time Isolates
Library Classification Practice 2.2.7 Round and Levels; Cluttering of

Time facet occurs in two levels (T1) and (T2). (T1) is the chronological Time period and
(T2) is the cyclical Time known as Featured Time such as day, night, winter etc. Isolates for
both the levels of Time are enumerated in the schedule.
(T1) is denoted by Roman Capitals followed by Indo-Arabic digits.
A denotes Geological times (ages)
B-C denotes Before Christ (B.C.) era
B Represents the period from 9999BC to 1000 BC; and
C Represents the time from 999BC to 1 BC.
D Represents the first thousand years, that is, 1 to 999AD, from this digit D onwards the
present era, namely, AD era started.
E Stands for the eleventh century.
From this E onwards each digit represents a century.
K The Seventeenth, while the twentieth Century is denoted by N.
Colon Classification measures time only upto a particular year but not the particular
month and day.

From digits E to YC each letter stands for century and represented by three digits. The
first digit (alphabetical letter) represents the Century, the first numerical digit after the alphabetic
letter denotes the decade and the last digit the particular year. For example, the year 1526 is
denoted by J26 where

J stands for the 16th century 1500 - 1599

J2 stands for the 3rd decade of the 16th century: and
J26 stands for 1526 AD.

Ranganathan used the concept of Effective Decade and the digits are 1,3,5,7,and 9.

Examples:
The 1801 AD is indicated as M01;
The year 1800 AD as M8 and
Nineteen twenties (1920s) as N2.
Eighteenth Century as L

But in the case of D which represents the first millennium AD year is indicated by four
digits in total. That is, first one is alphabet (D) and three numerical digits. The first digit denotes
the millennium, the second digit (that is, the first numerical digit) the century, third the decade,
and fourth the exact year.

Examples:
212AD is indicated as D212
5 AD is denoted as D005; and
110 AD is denoted as D110; and
10 AD is denoted as D010 and so on.
The sixth century is indicated as D5, and the 10th century by D9. D65 represents sixth
decade of the Seventh century AD.

B.C. Time-Era:
B.C. Time is denoted by the method of complement. To get a number for BC time the
actual numbers are to be subtracted from the higher numerical limit denoted by the digit 9.

B stands for 9999 – 1000 BC

Centre for Distance Education 2.2.8 Acharya Nagarjuna University

C stands for 999 – 1 B.C.

D stands for 1 – 999 AD

For example, to denote 1580 BC subtract this number from 9999, then the resultant
number, that is, B8419 (9999-1580=8419) represents the BC 1580.
To denote 477 BC = 999-477 = C522
To denote 12 BC = 99-12 = C87.
To denote 9 AD = D009
18 AD = D018
475 AD = D475.
Latest Effective Decade (LED)

Normally the effective unit to measure social change is presumed to be a generation. A

generation consists of two decades. Dr. S.R. Ranganathan named a period of two decades as
an ‘effective decade’. He denoted the decades by the digits 1,3,5,7, and 9 respectively. These
are called the Effective Decade Numbers. The following table explains the using of Effective
Decade.

Years of the Natural or LED for BC LED for AD

century actual Decade

0 – 19 0 or 1 0 1
20 – 39 2 or 3 2 3
40 – 59 4 or 5 4 5
60 – 79 6 or 7 6 7
80 – 99 8 or 9 8 9

Second Level Time Facet (T2):

(T2) stands for the featured time, that is, seasonal, metrological or diurnal times as
winter, snow, day, night etc. The indicator digit for (T2) is the same as that of (T1), that is,
inverted comma or apostrophe (‘).
Example: U2855’N81’n7 Rainfall in Winter season of 1981.

Geological periods:

In the case of Palaentology, Palaeobotany or Palaeozoology Time facet should be taken

from ‘H5 Stratigraphy’ but not from the Time isolates enumerated in CC. In this case H5 is to be
replaced by A.

Example: H6’A23 Silurian Palaeozoology.

Time isolates as Personality facet

Time isolates also function as Personality facet for some Anteriorising Common Isolates.
For example “Bibliography on Taxation brought up to 1997” is represented by X72aN97 (here
N97 is for 1997 taken as Personality facet hence inverted coma as connecting symbol is not
used)

Common Schedules of Language Isolates: These will be dealt with in “0” Literature class
and “P” Linguistics class).
Library Classification Practice 2.2.9 Round and Levels; Cluttering of

2.4 Summary

Every facet of a subject will belong to any of the Five Fundamental Categories, namely,
(P) Personality facet, (M) Matter facet, (E) Energy Facet, (S) Space facet, and (T) Time facet.
They are to be represented in the ‘class number’ in a sequence. The concept of Rounds and
Levels will help to arrange them in a sequence.

Personality, Matter and Energy facets have Rounds. After the 1st Round is completed,
still if any of the categories remain, the 1st Round Energy allows the 2nd Round (P) and (M).
therefore to allow the succeeding Rounds, the (E) facet should present in the preceeding
Round, and the process go on until and the categories exhaust. Space and Time categories
appear in the last Round in any subject.

Levels are the steps of division within the Fundamental categories (P), (M), (S) and (T)
have levels.

Cluttering of connecting symbols means confusion in the application of connecting

symbols in respect of PMEST. Until the 3rd edition of CC only colon “:” is used as a connecting
symbol for all the Categories, that is, PMEST. This lead to confusion in the construction of
Class numbers. With the introduction of Comma, Semi colon, dot, inverted comma respectively
for (P), (M), (S), (T), and Colon foe (E), the problem is solved.

Space and Time isolates remain the same to all the subjects.
Language isolates are the same for 0 Literature and P Language.

2.5 Assignments

Identify the main classes and the different Fundamental categories and the Rounds and
levels to which the categories belong in the following titles:

1. Circulation of Newspapers in University libraries in India, in 1959.

2. Audio-visual method of teaching Physics in Secondary Schools in Andhra Pradesh,
in 1999.
3. Charles Dicken’s novel: The great expectations, (English novel, pub. In 1812).
4. Dostoevski: Crime and Punishment (Russian fiction).
5. Parliamentary Government in India, 1968.
6. Treatment of Asthama.
7. 18th Century economic geography of India.
8. Cold storage of fish.
9. Indian law of trusts.
10. Classification of reference books in university libraries in India, during 20th century.
11. Floral geography of South Indian mountains.
12. Asthma in Hyderabad in the winter of 1984.
13. Aerodromes construction in India in 1940.
14. Preventive measures for fungus pests of grapes.
15. Hindu law of succession.
Centre for Distance Education 2.2.10 Acharya Nagarjuna University

2.6 Reference Books:

1. Kaula, P.N.: A treatise on Colon Classification. Sterling Publishing Pvt. Ltd., New
Delhi, 1985.
2. Khanna, J.K. and Kapil, D.D.: Colon Classification. Ess Ess Publication, New Delhi,
1982.
3. Kumar, P.S.G.: Practical Classification, Volume one: Colon Classification,
Metropolital Book Co., New Delhi, 1978.
4. Mukhopadhya, Ajoy: Guide to Colon Classification Practice. Metropolital Book Co.,
Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 1976.
5. Ranganathan, S.R.: Colon Classification, 6th Reprinted edition Asia Publishing
House, Bombay, 1976.
6. Satija, M.P.: Manual of Practical Colon Classification. Sterling Publishers Pvt., New
Delhi, 1984.
Library Classification Practice 2.3.1 Devices, Systems and Specials

UNIT II
Lesson – 3
Devices, Systems and Specials
2.3.0 Objective :
The objective of this lesson is to enable the candidate to understand the different
devices which are meant for sharpening the isolates or to create altogether new isolates, and
how to apply them to classify documents by Colon Classification. The lesson also enables the
candidate to understand the concept of Systems and Specials and their usage.

Structure
2.3.1 Introduction
2.3.2 Devices
[Link] Chronological Device (CD)
[Link] Geographical Device (GD)
[Link] Subject Device
[Link] Super-imposition Device (SID)
[Link] Mnemonic Device (MD)
[Link] Alphabetical Device (AD)
[Link] Classic Device
2.3.3 Systems and Specials
[Link] Systems
[Link] Structure of system’s number
[Link] Analysis of systems
[Link] Favoured System
[Link] Systems appear in the following main classes
[Link] Specials
2.3.4 Assignments
2.3.5 References

2.3.1 Introduction:
Colon Classification provides certain devices which enable the scheme to become an
analytico-synthetic scheme. The devices enable the classifier to form or accommodate new
isolates or to individualise enumerated isolates as and when required.
Centre for Distance Education 2.3.2 Acharya Nagarjuna University

2.3.2 Devices:

Colon Classification provided the following devices to coin numbers for new subject
ideas:
1. Chronological Device (CD)
2. Geographical Device (GD)
3. Subject Device (SD)
4. Super-imposition Device (SID)
5. Mnemonic Device (MD)
6. Alphabetical Device (AD)
7. Classic Device (CLD)

[Link] Chronological Device (CD) It is the device for forming an isolate or sharpening a host
focus in the form of an isolate or an array isolate with the help of Chronological Characteristic.

It consists of using time isolates given in the schedule of CC. It uses period of origin or
birth or first invention or discovery or initiation or occurrence or commencement of a particular
subject.

The places where (CD) is to be applied are indicated in the rules part and in the
schedules of CC. This device is used for the Systems facets, Authors in Literature, Artificial
Languages, Religious sects, Styles in Fine Arts and for some of the Common Isolates etc.

The Chronological number is to be worked out to the first or first two or the first three
digits of the year forming the epoch. In certain cases it is to be got by Latest Effective Decade
(LED). In that case the decade number is to be used. (The LEDs are given in the schedule
under the sub-heading “Time Isolates”). These are to be added simply to the host class or a
host isolate as it is.

Examples
1. 2:51N3 Colon Classification (Published in 1933)
2 M.C. for Library Science
51 (E) for Classification
N3 (CD) for (2P) Decade of publication.

2. Cm44111,N62 Journal of Physics (Started in 1962 from Madras)

C M.C. for Physics
m (ACI) for Journal
44111 (S) for (P) got by (GD) for Madras.
N62 (T) for (P2) for 1962 got by (CD)

3. LL Homeopathy system of medicine (1700s)

L System for Homeopathic medicine, where L is M.C. for
Medicine.
L L is (P) got by (CD) for 1700s

4. NA44,J Mughal Architecture (1500s)

NA Canonical Class for Architecture in ‘N’ Fine Arts
44 (P)) for India got by (GD)
J (P2) for 1500s got by (CD)
Library Classification Practice 2.3.3 Devices, Systems and Specials

5. 0111,2J64,H Hamlet of Shakespeare (Shakespeare was born in 1564)

O M.C. for Literature
111 Language isolate for English Literature, as (P1)
2 Form of literature for drama as (P2)
J64 (P3) for 1564 (date of birth of Shakespeare) got by (CD)
H (P4) for Hamlet Got by (AD)

6. Q29M8 Arya Samaj

Q M.C. for Religion
29 (P) for Other Hindu sects
M8 (P2) for Arya Samaj got by (CD) since it is started in
1880s

[Link] Geographical Device (GD): This device uses geographical characteristics such as
continent, country, state, etc. for the formation of new isolates. The space isolates to be used
are enumerated in the schedule along with separate index. This device is used for Personality
facets in main classes History and Law, for Dialect and Jargon in main class Language, for
Style in main class Fine Arts. Geographical Device is also used with some of the Anteriorising
Common isolates and some other places as stated in the schedules.

Examples
1. V44 Indian History
V M.C. for History
44 (P) for India got by (GD)

2. Z44 Indian Law

Z M.C. for Law
44 (P) for India got by (GD)

3. V44,7:2 Constitution of Indian Judiciary

V M.C. for History
44 (P) got by (GD) for India
7 (P2) for Judiciary
2 (E) for Constitution

4. Y7931:1 Culture of Philippines

Y M.C. for Sociology
7931 (P) got by (GD) for Philippines. As 74-79 got by GD
1 (E) for customs

5. Rm4451,N56 Journal of Philosophy (started in 1956 in Delhi)

R M.C. for Philosophy
m (ACI) for Periodicle
4451 (P) for Delhi got by GD as per facet formula of m (ACI)
N56 (P2) for 1956 got by CD

6. Y773:414 Drug habits among American people

Y M.C. for Sociology
773 (P) for American people got by (GD) under Territorial division
Centre for Distance Education 2.3.4 Acharya Nagarjuna University

74-79
414 (E) for Drug habits.

[Link] Subject Device: Subject Device involves in borrowing of an isolate idea enumerated in
one main class and using it in another main class. The isolate or subject thus borrowed is
enclosed in circular brackets and is attached to the host subject with an appropriate connecting
symbol.

Subject Device has also been used as Energy isolate where there is an application of
one subject over another. For example the subjects such as Mathematics, Philosophy, Law,
Sociology which are applied over another subjects are taken as methodologies.

CC uses this device to individualize, some substances in organic chemistry, some

buildings in Architecture, some subjects in Sculpture, special views in Metaphysics, subjects in
teaching techniques of Education, Industries in Economics and some other places as instructed
in the schedules and rules part.

Examples
1. 24(Z) Law libraries
2 M.C. for Library Science
4(Z) (P) for other libraries to be got by (SD) where 4 is amplified by
M.C. Z for law

2. Z(Q6) Christian Law

Z M.C. for Law
(Q6) (SD) For Christianity where Q is M.C. for Religion and 6 is [P] of
Christianity.

3. S841(L) Psychology of doctors

S M.C. for Psychology
8 (P) for social to be divide as in Y sociology
41 (P) for profession
L M.C. for Medicine obtained by SD for Doctors

4. T:(R) Philosophy of Education

T M.C. for Education
(R) (SD) for Philosophy. (Usually the M.C. R for Philosophy forms
Energy (SD) as it is taken as methodologies involving action or
problem. There is an instruction in the for foci in [2P] got by SD

5. T:3(B) Teaching of Mathematics

T M.C. for Education
3 (E) for teaching techniques
(B) (2P) for Mathematics

[Link] Super-imposition Device (SID): The focus of subject may be distributed over more
than one isolate of the same facet. Two such different isolates from the same facet can join
together, but without becoming a complex class. For example in the Main Class Sociology, the
isolate for “Urban women” is not enumerated. But both “Urban” and “Women” are enumerated
separately as different isolates in the Personality facet of Sociology. There is no relationship
Library Classification Practice 2.3.5 Devices, Systems and Specials

between the two except that they complement one another to form an isolate “Urban women” in
the above example. So the ‘Phase relation’ cannot be applied here. In such cases Super
Imposition Device is used.

This device is to connect two or more isolate ideas belonging to the same universe of isolates
by a hyphen (-). There is nothing wrong to construct isolate number by (SID) involving three or
more isolates, even though it is not mentioned either in rules part or anywhere in CC.

Superimposition of isolate ideas is restricted to Personality facet alone. Therefore it cannot be

used in other rounds and levels of Personality and in Matter, Energy, Space and Time
categories.

Examples

1. Y12-33.44 Urban youth in India

Y M.C. for Sociology
12 (P) for youth
- Symbol for (SID)
33 (P) for urban
44 (S) for India

2. Y12-33-49 Urban working class youth

Y M.C. for Sociology
12 [P] of Youth.
- Symbol for (SID)
33 (P) for urban
- Symbol for (SID)
49 (P) for working class

3. V1-56 History of British Empire

V M.C. for History
1 (S) for world acting as (P),
- Symbol for (SID)
56 (S) for Great Britain

4. Y12-31:414 Drug habits among rural youth

Y M.C. for Sociology
12 (P) for youth
- Symbol for (SID)
31 (P) for Rural
414 (E) for drug habits.

5. T4-9(Y54):3,8 Higher education through correspondence for military

persons
T M.C. for Education
4 (P) for Higher education
- Symbol for (SID)
Centre for Distance Education 2.3.6 Acharya Nagarjuna University

9(Y54) (P) for military persons obtained by (SD) under (P) for 9
other classes.
8 (2P2) for correspondence courses

6. L9C,12-85 Eye tissues of children

L9C Special for child in Medicine
12 (P) for Tissue .
- Symbol for (SID)
85 (P) omitting 1 in 185 for eye

[Link] Mnemonic Device (MD): Mnemonic means to remember. Mnemonic device means that
when the same concept occurs in different parts of the schedule, it can be denoted by the same
digits. So, we can use digits which may not be there in the schedule for formation of a focus.
[Link] calls them ‘seminal mnemonics’. These isolates are discussed in page
1.32 of CC 6th edition.

Examples

1. K:3 Animal physiology

K M.C. for Animal
3 (E) for Physiology
2. I:3 Plant physiology
I M.C. for Botany
3 (E) for Physiology .

3. L:3 Human Physiology

L M.C. for Medicine
3 (E) for Physiology

4. K:4 Animal disease

K M.C. for Zoology
4 (E) for Disease

5. L:4 Human disease

L M.C. for Medicine
4 (E) for disease

6. Y:4 Special pathology

Y M.C. for Sociology
4 (E) for pathology

[Link] Alphabetical Device (AD): The Alphabetical device involves using of the first or the first
two or the first three etc. initial letters in capitals of the name of the entity or concept to form an
isolate or subdivision. It is used in case of proper names, trade names etc. which are
internationally accepted. Alphabetical Device is used to denote population cluster. For example,
Bombay(4435B), Visakhapatnam(4416V), Hyderabad (4416H) etc.

Examples
1. D5125H Hercules cycle
D M.C. for Engineering
5125 (P) for Cycle
Library Classification Practice 2.3.7 Devices, Systems and Specials

H (AD) to represent Hercules Company make by using the first

letter in Hercules Company.

2. D5125HE Hero-Honda cycle

D M.C. for Engineering
5125 (P) for Cycle
HE (AD) using the first two letters of the name of the Company:
Hero-Honda, so as to distinguish between the companies
Hercules and Honda.

3. D5125HER Hero cycle

D M.C. for Engineering
5125 (P) for Cycle
HER (AD) using the first three letters of the names of the
Companies so as to distinguish among the companies
whose names begin with the same first letter.

4. J381B Basamati rice

J M.C. for Agriculture
381 (P) for Rice
B (AD) for Basamati.

5. J381T Tilaru Rice

J M.C. for Agriculture
381 (P) for Rice
T (AD) for Tilaru.

6. 0111,2J64,H Shakespeare’s Hamlet

0 M.C. for Literature
111 (P1) for English Language
2 (P2) for Drama.
J64 (P3) for 1564 date of birth of Shakespeare
H (AD) for Hamlet

[Link] Classic Device: According to Ranganathan a Classic work is the one which deals with
some special subject. Such works occur in several versions, adaptations, and translations.
These classics will usually brought out in print even after long time of its original publication.
Sacred works and works of literature are separately treated and hence not classified as
classics.

This device is used to bring together

- different editions of a classic and
- different editions of each of its commentaries
The letter small ‘x’ is used to represent Classic Device in the notational plane.

Examples
1. Sarangadeva Sangeeta ratnakara NR44x1,1
NR Music
NR44 Indian Music
NR44x 1 x is for Classic Device and 1 is for known composer
NR44x1,1 the last 1 is for the work Sangeeta Ratnakara
Centre for Distance Education 2.3.8 Acharya Nagarjuna University

2.3.3 Systems and Specials

[Link] Systems

Certain subjects have been of great concern of man right from the very beginning of
human society. Such subjects are considered by different persons from different points of view
and at different times and places. As a result various schools of thoughts developed on the
subjects which are termed as ‘systems’. For example in medicine different systems such as
Ayurveda, Siddha, Unani, Homeopathy etc. came into existence. The purpose of all these
systems is one and the same, that is, curing of diseases and thereby maintaining good health.
But the methods of their approach differ from system to system.

[Link] Structure of system’s number:

System facets are obtained by Chronological Device. The chronological number is

attached directly to the basic class number without any connecting symbol. The ‘generalia
system’ class is represented by the letter ‘a’ and it comes before all other main classes. The first
system in the century is indicated by one digit, that is, up to decade digit. The third system in
the same century and the same decade is represented by three digits, that is, by the exact year.

Examples
XA Systems of Economics in general

XM Cooperative Economics (The concept of cooperation came into

existence in 19th century. Hence it is represented by the century digit
M).

XM2 Socialism. (Here the originator of the idea was Karl Marx, born in
1818. So it is denoted by the digit M2 which means 1820’s)

XN17 Communism. (This system originated in 1917. Therefore it is

represented by the digits N17 which means 1917).

[Link] Analysis of systems

Systems always belong to first round Personality facet of a basic class.

Systems facet comes before all other facets of the subject.

Example
LL185:4:6 Homeopathic treatment of eye disease
LL System under Medicine for Homeopathy
185 (P1) for eye
4 (E) for disease
6 (2E) for treatment

Rule: If a System facet, a Special facet, and a Personality facet appear in a class number, the
system isolate number comes first next the special isolate and then the Personality isolate. But
a comma is to be used as a connecting symbol before the special isolate number and the
Personality isolate number. While adding special isolate to system isolate coma (,) is to be
inserted before special isolate. Basic Class number is to be omitted while the systems and
specials number is used.
Library Classification Practice 2.3.9 Devices, Systems and Specials

Example
LL,9C,185:4:6 Homeopathic treatment of children eye disease
LL System for Homeopathy to be taken as [P1]
9C Special under Medicine for children to be taken as [P2]
185 [P1] for eye under Medicine (here to be taken as [P3]
4 (E) for disease under Medicine
6 (2E) for treatment under Medicine.

[Link] Favoured System:

Favoured system is the system in which the majority of documents are produced or in
which the library has more documents. In other words favoured system is the one which has
the highest literary warrant at a particular point of time. For instance, in Ancient India there were
many documents on Ayurveda, but none on Allopathy. But today the position is reversed. Now
there are a very few number of documents on Ayurveda. Thus in the light of ‘literary warrant’
Allopathy is the ‘favoured system’ in modern times where as Ayurveda was the favoured system
in ancient times.

In order to secure the first place for the ‘favoured system’, the focus in the system facet
is omitted.

Example
L35:4261:6 Allopathic treatment for Malaria will come before
LL35:4261:6 Homeopathic treatment for Malaria will come after

If a document deals with two or more systems, the focus in the system facet is denoted
by the digit A and the document comes before the documents which deal with a single system.

Example
LA,9F,45:4:6 Homeopathic and Unani treatment for females lungs.
LA Systems under the M.C. for Medicine (When more than
one system is involved, they are to be represented by “A”).
here LA represents Homeopathy and Unani. A acts as
[P1].
9F Special for Female acts as [P2]
45 [P1] for lungs, taken as [P3]
4 [E] for disease
6 [2E] for treatment

[Link] Systems appear in the following main classes

B Mathematics C Physics
J Agriculture L Medicine
S Psychology T Education
V History X Economics

[Link] Specials

With the development of knowledge certain sub-areas of a subject become classes of

specialisation on an account of social necessity or intensive research study. All issues relating
Centre for Distance Education 2.3.10 Acharya Nagarjuna University

to them are sought together; produced mostly in one document and often referred to as a group.
This feature of knowledge is termed as specials. For example, there are specials in Medicine
as ‘child medicine’ ‘old age medicine’, ‘female medicine’ etc. The field of study is confined to
those problems that are peculiar to the group concerned. In medicine the numbers for special
are got by using alphabetical device (AD).

Example

L9C Child
L9F Female

The specials appear in the following main classes.

B Mathematics C Physics
E Chemistry G Biology
J Agriculture L Medicine
X Economics
Special facet comes before all the facets but it succeeds the system facet.
For example: LL,9C,2:4:6 Homeopathic treatment of the diseases of digestive organ
of children.

2.3.4 Assignments

Classify the following titles, involving different Devices, Specials and Systems:
1. Biography of [Link]
2. Homeopathic medicine
3. William Shakespeare (Born in 1564)
4. UNO (Established in 1940s).
5. History of Great Britain
6. Indian community
7. European Architecture
8. Indian Law
9. Law libraries
10. Christian law
11. Computer
12. Agricultural economics
13. Muslim society
14. Urban youth
15. Urban working class youth
16. Veins of arms
17. British Empire
18. Juvenile delinquency
19. Eye tissue of children
20. BPT rice

2.3.6 References

1 Kaula, P.N.: A treatise on Colon Classification. Sterling Publishing Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi,
1985.
Library Classification Practice 2.3.11 Devices, Systems and Specials

2 Khanna, J.K. and Kapil, D.D.: Colon Classification. Ess Ess Publication, New Delhi,
1982.
3 Kumar, P.S.G.: Practical Classification, Volume one: Colon Classification, Metropolital
Book Co., New Delhi, 1978.
4 Mukhopadhya, Ajoy: Guide to Colon Classification Practice. Metropolital Book Co., Pvt.
Ltd., New Delhi, 1976.
5 Ranganathan, S.R.: Colon Classification, 6th Reprinted edition Asia Publishing House,
Bombay, 1976.
6 Satija, M.P.: Manual of Practical Colon Classification. Sterling Publishers Pvt., New
Delhi, 1984.
Library Classification Practice 2.4.1 Common Isolates (CIs)

UNIT – II
Lesson – 4
COMMON ISOLATES (CIs)
4.0 Objective:
The objective of this lesson is to enable the candidate to understand the concept of
Common Isolates and how to apply them in classifying the documents whenever necessary.

Structure :
1. Meaning of Common Isolates
2. Types of Common Isolates:
2.1 Anteriorising Common Isolates (ACIs)
[Link] ACIs applicable before (S)
[Link] ACIs applicable after (S)
[Link] ACIs applicable after (T)
2.2 Posteriorising Common Isolates (PCIs)
[Link] Energy PCIs
[Link] Personality PCIs
3. Model questions/Assignments
4. Books for reference;

2.4.1 Meaning of Common Isolates:

An Isolate is one of the divisions of a facet. It is a ‘focus’ or a qualifying concept. For
example in a compound subject like “Treatise on coal mining” the terms ‘treatise’, ‘coal’ are
isolates, and the term ‘mining’ is the main class. ‘Foci’ is the plural of ‘focus’. Isolates are of two
kinds, namely, Special isolates and Common isolates.

The special isolates relate only to the host class or a few closely related subjects or
classes. A common isolate is an isolate idea denoted by the same isolate term and represented
by the same isolate number irrespective of the subject in which it appears. Thus common
isolates are common to all main classes, facets etc.

2.4.2 Types of common Isolates:

Common isolates are of two types. They are (1) Anteriorising Common Isolates (ACI),
and (2) Posteriorising Common Isolates (PCI).

Both the types of common isolates are represented by the lower case letters of Roman
alphabets.

[Link] Anteriorising Common Isolates (ACI):

Anteriorising common isolates are added to the host class number directly without any
connecting symbol. Some of these isolates have their own facet formulas.
Centre for Distance Education 2.4.2 Acharya Nagarjuna University

Anterior means prior or before. The documents having Anteriorising common isolates
are placed before all other regular documents of the host class. These documents are
approach materials on the host class. They are therefore consulted for specific information or
for a casual purpose before the books on the subject area are consulted.

Anteriorising Common Isolates are further divided into three categories as detailed
below:

[Link].1 ACIs applicable before (S)

Number Term Facet Formula Explanation

a Bibliography a[T] T is time to be worked out to Latest
Effective Decade (LED)
c Concordance
d Table
e Formula
f Atlas f[T] T is worked out to LED
k Cyclopaedia, k[P],[P2] P is personality to be got by (GD),
and P2 by (CD) epoch or origin
m Periodical, Journal m[P],[P2] P is to be got by (GD) country or
locality of origin of the parent body if
sponsored by it.
P2 by (CD) epoch of origin.

Note: If the same agency sponsors two or more associated periodicals with the
same class number, the class numbers for the second, third, etc., should
be individualised from that of the first by adding the digits 1,2, etc.,
respectively

To represent a cumulative index, the digit ‘b’ should be added after the facets
attached to ‘m’. Eg: Em73,N07b Chemical Abstracts (F.1907),
Quinquennial Index.

n Serial, year book, n[P],[P2] P is to be got by (GD) geographical area

Annual of purview, and P2 by (CD) epoch of
origin.

p Conference p[P)], [P2] P is to begot (GD) and P2 by (CD). Year

Proceedings to be worked out to 3 digits if it is an
isolated area or epoch of origin if it is
periodically held.

v History v[S].[T] S is to be got by (GD) geographical area of

purview, and T by (CD) worked out to LED.

w Biography General w[S],[T] S is to be by (GD) and T by (CD).

Individual w[P] P is to be got by (CD) upto 3 digits if single
or LED if collected.

Autobiography w[P],1 P is to be got by (CD)

ana w[P],2 P is to be got by (CD)
Library Classification Practice 2.4.3 Common Isolates (CIs)

Letters w[P],4 P is to be got by (CD)

x Works: Collection or selection(anthologies)

General x[S,[T]
Individual X[P] P is got by (CD) upto 3 digits if single, or
LED if collected.
y1 Programme of Instruction
y2 Syllabus
y3 Synopsis
y4 Scope
y7 Case study Same as w
y8 Digest, manual
guide

Examples:
1. JaN7 Bibliography of Agriculture brought upto 1970s
J M.C. for Agriculture
a ACI applicable before (S) for bibliography
N7 [T] for 1970s.

2. U25f1N4 Atlas of world oceans, 1942

U M.C. for Geography
f ACI applicable before (S) for Atlas
1 [S] for World
N4 [T] for 1942

3. Em73,M79 Journal of American Chemical Society, Founded in 1879

E M.C. for Chemistry
m ACI applicable before (S) for Journal
73 [S] for America
M79 [T] for 1879, the year of foundation.

4. W44,N17—M69 Indian National biography 1869-1917

W M.C. for Political Science
44 [P] got by (GD) for India
N17 [T] for 1917.
-- Backward arrow to indicate duration
M69 [T] for 1869.

5. 2:51N33y4 Scope of Colon Classification

2 M.C. for Library Science
51 [E] for Classification
N33 [CD] for 1933, year of publication of CC.
y4 ACI applicable before (S) for scope

6. O111,1xN32 Anthology of English poems (the youngest author born in 1932)

O M.C. for Literature
111 [P1] for English language
1 [P2] for poetry
x ACI applicable before (s) for collection (anthology),
N32 [P] for 1932, (year of birth of the youngest author).
Centre for Distance Education 2.4.4 Acharya Nagarjuna University

7. O15,2D040x Collected works of Kalidasa

O M.C. for Literature
15 [P] for Sanskrit literature
2 [P2] for drama
D040 [P3) got by (GD) data of birth of Kalidas, 40AD
x ACI Collected work

[Link].2 Anteriorising Common Isolate applicable after Space facet:

Number Term Facet Formula

r Administrative
report:
s Statistics, if S[T] T is to be got by (CD) up to three digits.
periodical

Examples:
T9(Y31).44r Administrative report on rural education in India.
T M.C. for Education
9 [P] for extension of other classes
(Y31) (SD) for Rural class (where Y M.C. for Sociology, and
31 is (P) for Rural)
44 [S] for India
r (ACI) applicable after (S) for administrative report.

T48:894.44sN5 A periodical statistics on Research fellowships in India

4 in 1954.
T M.C. for Education
48 [P] for research
894 [E] for research fellowship
44 [S] for India
s (ACI) applicable after (S) for statistics.
N54 [T] for 1954.

2.4. 2.1.3 Anteriorising Common Isolate applicable after Time facet.

Number Term Facet Formula

s Statistics (if stray), Commission
report
t Commission report
t4 Survey
t5 Plan
t6 Ideal
v Source material
v5 Literature
v6 Tradition
v7 Archaeology etc. As in the Main Class V for History.
v8 Archive As in the Main Class V for History.
Library Classification Practice 2.4.5 Common Isolates (CIs)

Examples:
1. T3.42’N71s Statistics of educated adults in Japan in 1971
T M.C. for Education
3 [P] for adults
42 (S) for Japan
N71 (T) for 1971
s (ACI) applicable after (T) for statistics (stray).

2. 234.44’N65t4 Survey of University libraries in India in 1965

2 M.C. for Library Science
34 [P] for University Libraries
44 [S] for India
N65 [T] for 1965
t4 (ACI) applicable after (T) for survey

3. D7’Mv Source material for the study of Nuclear Engineering

during 19th century
D M.C. for Engineering
7 [P] for Nuclear Engineering
M [T] for 19th century
v (ACI) applicable after (T) for source material

4. R’Nv6 Philosophical traditions of 20th Century

R M.C. for Philosophy
N [T] for 20th Century
v6 (ACI) applicable after (T) for tradition

Note: The (P1), (P2) or (T) wherever given in the facet formulas of some of the (ACI)s are
to be worked out as: Generally the (P) or (P1) is to be got by (GD), and for (P2) or
(T) by (CD). But if the facet formula contains only (P1) alone, it is to be got by (CD)
with minimum digits unless stated otherwise.

Use of more than one ACIs: Whenever needed, more than one Anteriorising Common
Isolate can be used in succession eg: BaN7v44 History of bibliography on mathematics in India
brought upto 1970’s. In the case of biographies, if the Time facet is already included in the class
number, it may not be repeated. eg:O111,2J64w Biography of Shakespeare.

[Link] Posteriorising Common Isolates (PCIs)

Purpose: The purpose of the posteriorising Common isolates is to sharpen the host
class and to subdivide it further. These isolates require connecting symbols for their attachment
to the main class numbers.

Posterior means placed behind. The documents having Posteriorising common isolates
are placed after the host class documents which do not have these isolates.

Types: The PCIs are of two types as: Energy posteriorising common Isolates (EPCIs)
and personality posteriorising common Isolates (PPCIs).
Centre for Distance Education 2.4.6 Acharya Nagarjuna University

[Link].1 Energy Posteriorising Common Isolates (EPCIs)

Number Term
b1 Calculating
b2 Designing
b6 measuring
c1 Weighing
f Investigation
f2 Observation
f3 Experiment
f4 Discussion
g Criticism
p drafting
r reporting
u surveying

The connecting symbol for Energy Posteriorising Common Isolates is colon (:).

Examples:
1. X729:1:b1 Calculating indirect taxes on consumption
X M.C. for Economics
729 [P] for indirect Taxes
1 [E] for consumption
b1 (EPCI) for Calculating.

2. M73;3:b2 Designing Silk cloth

M7 for Textile under M.C. M for Useful Arts
3 [P] for cloth
3 [M] for Silk
b2 [EPCI] for designing

3. 213.44,d,N03:g National Library of India: a critical study.

2 M.C. for Library Science
13 [P] for National Library
44 [S] for India
d (PPCI) for Institution.
N03 [P2] got by (CD) for 1903
g [EPCI] for criticism

4. E196:296:f Radio Isotope investigations

E M.C. for Chemistry
196 [P] for Isotopes
296 [E] for Radio Chemistry
f (EPCI) for investigation

5. C:f3 Experimental Physics

C M.C. for Physics
F3 (EPCI) for experimental

6. NA44,J.445244:u Surveying the Moghal Architecture in Agra District

Library Classification Practice 2.4.7 Common Isolates (CIs)

NA M.C. for Architecture

44,J [P1] and [P2] put together got by (GD) and (CD)
respectively for Indian style of Moghal Architecture
445244 [S] for Agra
u [EPCI] for surveying

[Link].1 Personality Posteriorising Common Isolates (PPCIs)

Number Term
b Profession
d Institution
e Educational (in which the subject, represented by the
host class, is taught)
e2 Lower
e4 Higher
f Investigating (Institution/body)
f2 Observational
f3 Experimenting
f4 Discussional
f7 Yogic (Asrama)
g Learned society
h Industrial body
k Commercial body
w Administrative department of Government

Personality Posteriorising Common Isolates need “,” comma as their connecting symbol.
Normally these isolates are to be added after space facet. Thee isolates have a facet formula of
their own as:, (CI), [P], [P2] : [E]. Where CI is Personality Posteriorising Common Isolate (PPCI)
; (P) is to be got by (AD) if localised body, or by (CD) preceded by 9 if non-localised body. The
(P) should be preceded by a comma. When require (P2), (E) and (T) are to be got as in the
Main Class “V History”. (P2) and (E) are enumerated in page 2.108, and (T) is to be worked out
to LED.

Examples:
1. L.44,b Medical profession in India.
L M.C. for Medicine
44 [S] for India
b (PPCI) for profession

2. A,dn1.N81 World Directory of Scientific institutions

A M.C. Science
d [PPCI] for Institution
n [ACI] for applicable before (S) for directory
1 [S] for World
N81 for 1981

3. T2.4436,e2,N7t4 Survey of Higher Secondary Schools in Punjab in

1970s.
T M.C. for Education
2 [P] for Secondary Education
Centre for Distance Education 2.4.8 Acharya Nagarjuna University

4436 [S] for Punjab

e2 (PPCI) for lower level (Secondary) school
N7 [T] for 1970
t4 [ACI] for applicable after (T) for survey

4. D6,8(b).44,f3 Experimenting with computers in India

D M.C. for Engineering
6 [P] for Mechanical Engineering
8(B) Got by (SD) for computers (where 8 is (2P) for
extension for other machinery by (SD) and B is M.C.
for mathematics)
44 [S] for India
f3 (PPCI) for experimenting

5. X8(A).44,h,N5t5 Planning of industrial organisations in India in 1950s

X M.C. for Economics
8(A) [P] for Industry
44 [S] for India
h (PPCI) for Industrial body
N5 (T) for 1950s
t5 (ACI) applicable after (T) for Plan.

6. F182.44,k,TAT Tata Iron and Steel works

F M.C. for technology
182 [P] for Iron
44 [S] for India
k (PPCI) for commercial body
TAT (AD) for TATA

2.4.3 Summing Up:

This lesson explained the concept of common isolates and types of common isolates and their
use with examples. These isolates are nothing but standard subdivisions (table -1) of DDC. The
colon classification identified two types of common isolates. These are Anteriorising and
Posteriorising common isolates. CC also gave facet formula to build numbers as required.

2.4.4 Assignments :
1. Astronomical tables.
2. Concordance of Byrons poems
3. Formulae for manufacturing medicines.
4. Encyclopedia Americana (1829).
5. Philosophical transactions of Royal Society of London (1700s).
6. Statesman’s Year Book (London, 1800).
7. Biography of [Link] (Born:1892).
8. Syllabus of Post-graduate courses
9. Administrative report of University Library.
10. Statistics of demography: a periodical
11. India, University Commission Report, 1919.
12. Literature on Indian Presidency:1951-1980.
13. Philosophical traditions of 20th century.
Library Classification Practice 2.4.9 Common Isolates (CIs)

14. Measuring cloth.

15. Observation of stars.
16. Criticism of Shakespeare (Born: 1564).
17. Weighing gold.
18. National Library of India: a critical study.
19. Library profession in India.
20. Comments on Indian Constitution.

2.4.5 Reference Books:

1. Kaula, P.N.: A treatise on Colon Classification. Sterling Publishing Pvt. Ltd., New
Delhi, 1985.
2. Khanna, J.K. and Kapil, D.D.: Colon Classification. Ess Ess Publication, New Delhi,
1982.
3. Kumar, P.S.G.: Practical Classification, Volume one: Colon Classification,
Metropolital Book Co., New Delhi, 1978.
4. Mukhopadhya, Ajoy: Guide to Colon Classification Practice. Metropolital Book Co.,
Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 1976.
5. Ranganathan, S.R.: Colon Classification, 6th Reprinted edition Asia Publishing
House, Bombay, 1976.
6. Satija, M.P.: Manual of Practical Colon Classification. Sterling Publishers Pvt., New
Delhi, 1984.
Library Classification Practice 2.5.1 Phase Relations

Lesson – 5
Phase Relations
2.5.0 Objective

The objective of this lesson is to enable the candidate to understand the concept of Phase
relations and their application in classifying complex classes.

Structure

2.5.1 Meaning of phase relation

2.5.2 Kinds of relations
2.5.3 Levels of relations
2.5.4 Worked out examples
2.5.5 Summary
2.5.6 Assignments
2.5.7 Reference books

2.5.1 Meaning of Phase Relations

The combination of two or more subjects, basic or compound, or isolates giving rise to
complex subjects is called Phase relation. The device used to construct a Complex class is
known as Phase Relation Device. Phase is therefore a part of complex subject. It denotes a
single subject. The primary subject of exposition in a complex subject is called the First phase
and subject affecting the exposition of the First phase is called the Second Phase.

2.5.2 Kinds of Phase Relations

There are five kinds of relations or interactions between the involved phases. They are as
stated below:

a) General Relation
The relation that are not covered by the other relations such as Bias, Comparison,
Difference and Influencing, comes under General relation. Generally this relation is
identified with the presence of the word “and”.
Eg: Mathematics and Physics

b) Bias Relation
When the exposition of a phase is biased towards another phase, it is called Bias
relation. The phase which is treated in a biased manner comes first and then comes the
phase towards which the first phase has kept in view. Generally it is indicated by the
presence of the words: ‘for’, ‘in’, ‘biased’, etc.
Eg. Mathematics for Physics
Centre for Distance Education 2.5.2 Acharya Nagarjuna University

c) Comparison relation
When the phases involved in the relation are compared with each other, it is
called a comparison relation. This phase relation can be identified with the presence of the
word ‘compare’.
Eg. Mathematics compared with Physics

d) Difference relation
This relation involves the exposition of the difference between the concerned
phases. This phase relation is identified by the presence of the words: “difference
between” etc.
Eg. Difference between Mathematics and Physics

e) Influencing relation
If one phase is influencing the exposition of the other, it is known as Influencing
relation. Influenced phase comes first and then the influencing phase.
Eg. Geopolitics (Political science as influenced by Geography)

2.5.3 Levels of relations

In order to make the class numbers brief, each of the above five relations are identified
in three levels. The phase relations at the main class (subject) or facet or the isolate, are called
as Inter-subject relation, Intra-facet relation, and Intra-array relation respectively.

1. Intra-subject relation: This is the first level relation and is between two subjects. It is
called Inter subject relation.
2. Intra-facet relation: This is the second level relation and is between two isolates of the
same facet of the same subject. It is called Intra-facet relation.
3. Intra-Array relation: This is the third level relation and is between two isolates of the
same array of the same facet of the same subject. It is called Intra-array relation.

Connecting symbols for the five phases at the three levels:

Each of the five phase relations have separate connecting symbols of small letters of Roman
alphabets preceded by zero. Each letters is used to indicate particular nature of relation. These
symbols are shown below:

Nature of Introducing
Inter0subject Intra-facet Intra-Array
Relation words

General And 0a 0j 0t

Bias for, in, biased 0b 0k 0u

Compare
Comparison 0c 0m 0v
between
Difference
Difference 0d 0n 0w
between
Influence,
Influencing 0g 0r 0y
effects
Library Classification Practice 2.5.3 Phase Relations

2.5.4 Worked out examples under each of the five relations at the
three levels:
1. Inter-subject general Phase Relation:

1. L0aR635 Yoga and Health

L M.C. for Medicine representing health.
0a Phase relation indicating digits
R6 Canonical division of RMC for Philosophy
35 [P] under R6 for Yoga

2. B0aX Mathematics and Economics

B M.C. for Mathematics
0a Phase relation indicating digits
X M.C. for Economics

2. Inter-subject bias relation

1. B0bX Mathematics for Economics
B M.C. for Mathematics
0b Phase relation indicating digits
X M.C. for Economics

2. S0bL Psychology for Doctors

S M.C. for Psychology
0b Phase relation indicating digits
L M.C. for Medicine (representing doctors)

3. Inter-subject comparison relation

1. C0cE Physics compared with Chemistry
C M.C. for Physics
0c Phase relation indicating digits
E M.C. for Chemistry

2. K0cL:4 Comparison of diseases of man and Animal

K M.C. for Zoology (animals)
0c Phase relation indicating digits
L M.C. for Medicine
4 [E] for disease

4. Inter-subject difference relation

1. D0dF Difference between Engineering and Technology
D M.C. for Engineering
0d Phase relation indicating digits
F M.C. for Technology

2. V0dW Difference between History and Politics

V M.C. for History
0d Phase relation indicating digits
W M.C. for Political Science
Centre for Distance Education 2.5.4 Acharya Nagarjuna University

5. Inter-subject influencing relation

1. N0gA Influence of Science on Arts
N M.C. for Fine Arts
0g Phase relation indicating digits
A M.C. for Science

2. Q2:4140gR43 Influence of Social ethics on Hindu worship

Q M.C. for Religion
2 [P] for Hinduism
414 [E] for worship
0g Phase relation indicating digits
R4 Canonical division for Ethics under Philosophy
3 [P] for Social ethics

6. Intra-facet general phase relation:

1 24(MV41):20j8 Organisation and administration of army library
2 M.C. for Library Science
4 [P] for extension of other kinds of libraries
MV41 For Military science under M for Useful Arts
2 [E] for Organization
0j Phase relation indicating digits
8 [E] for Administration

2 Z44,40j5 Relation between Law of Torts and Crime in India

Z M.C. for Law
44 [P1] for India got by (GD)
4 [P2] for Torts
0j Phase relation indicating digits

5 [P2] for Crime

7. Intra-facet bias relation:

1 2:510k7 Classification biased towards Reference Service
2 M.C. for Library Science
51 [E] for Classification
0k Phase relation indicating digits
7 [E] for Reference Service

2. L:20k3 Physiological anatomy

L M.C. for Medicine
2 [E] for Morphology (anatomy)
0k Phase relation indicating digits
3 [E] for Physiology

8. Intra-facet comparison relation:

1 2220m34 City library compared to University library
2 M.C. for Library Science
22 [P] for City Library
0m Phase relation indicating digits
34 [P] for University Library
Library Classification Practice 2.5.5 Phase Relations

2. X8(A):2.580m73 Production in Soviet industries compared with

American industries
X M.C. for Economics
8(A) [P] for Industrial Economics
2 [E] for production
58 [S] for Russia
0m Phase relation indicating digits
73 [S] for USA (America)

9. Intra-facet difference relation:

1 E:220n235 Difference between Analytical Chemistry and extractive

Chemistry
E M.C. for Chemistry
22 [E] for Solution
0n Phase relation indicating digits
235 [E] for Colloids

2. V44,10n21:3 Difference between the functions of President and

Prime Minister in India.
V M.C. for History
44 [P] for India
1 [P2] for Head of the State (President)
0n Phase relation indicating digits
21 [P2] for Prime Minister
3 [E] for function

10. Intra-facet influencing relation:

1 B940r2 Influence of moon on planets
B9 Canonical class for Astronomy under B Mathematics
4 [P] for Planet under B9
0r Phase relation indicating digits
2 [P] for Moon under B9

2. O111,2J640rD4 Influence of Kalidas on Shakespeare

0
O M.C. for Literature
111 [P1] for English
2 [P2] for Drama (Both the authors are generally
considered as dramatists)
J64 [P3] for 1564 year of birth of Shakespeare obtained by
(CD).
0r Phase relation indicating digits
D40 [P3] for 40 AD year of birth of Kalidas obtained by
(CD)

11. Intra-Array General relation:

1 D65,470t5:85 Telegraphy and Television service
Centre for Distance Education 2.5.6 Acharya Nagarjuna University

D M.C. for Engineering

65 [P] for Electronics
47 [P2] for Telegraphy
ot Phase relation indicating digits
5 [P2] for Television (4 omitted since it has come in 47)
85 [E] for Repair (Service)

2. R110t2 Deductive and inductive logic

R1 Canonical division for Logic under R Philosophy
1 For Inductive logic under R1
0t Phase relation indicating digits
2 Derived from 12 for Deductive logic under R1 omitting
initial 1.

12. Intra-Array bias relation:

1 V44,310u2:3 Functions of Lok Sabha for Rajya Sabha in India
V M.C. for History
44 [P1] for India got by (GD)
31 [P2] for First House (Legislature)
0u Phase relation indicating digits
2 [P2] for 2nd House derived from 32 omitting the initial 3).
3 [E] for functions

2. Y35ou1:1 City culture for rural people

Y M.C. for Sociology
35 [P] for City (people)
ou Phase relation indicating digits
1 [P] for Rural people derived from 31 omitting the initial 3
1 [E] for culture

13. Intra-Array comparison relation:

1 V4416,310v2:3 Powers of Legislative Assembly and Legislative
Council of Andhra Pradesh: a comparison.
V M.C. for History
4416 [P1] got by (GD) for Andhra Pradesh
31 [P2] for First House
0v Phase relation indicating digits
2 [P2] for 2nd House derived from 32 omitting the initial
3).
3 [E] for Powers

2. R6310v5 Sankhya compared with Yoga

R6 Canonical Class for Philosophy
31 [P] for Sankhya under R1.
0v Phase relation indicating digits
5 [P] for Yoga derived from 35 omitting the initial 3.

14. Intra-Array difference relation:

1 2130w5 Difference between National Library and State Library
2 M.C. for Library Science
13 [P] for National Library
Library Classification Practice 2.5.7 Phase Relations

0w Phase relation indicating digits

5 [P] for State library derived from 15 omitting the initial 1.

2. Y310w5 Difference between rural folk and city folk

Y M.C. for Sociology
31 [P] for rural people
0w Phase relation indicating digits
5 [P] for city people omitting the initial digit 3.

15. Intra-Array influencing relation:

1 Q410y2 Influence of Mahayana on Hinayana
Q M.C. for Religion
41 [P] for Hinayana
0y Phase relation indicating digits
2 [P2] for Mahayana omitting the initial digit 4.
2. Y310y3:356 Influence of urban customs on rural customs
Y M.C. for Sociology
31 [P] for Rural
oy Phase relation indicating digits
3 [P] for Urban omitting the initial digit 3.

356 [E] for customs

2.5.5 Summary
Generally a subject is one phased if it consists of only a single main class or
compound class. It is two phased if it brings into relation two basic classes or basic class
and compound class. The combination of two or more subjects gives rise to complex
subjects. This is called Phase relation device. There are five kinds of phase relations
namely, General, Bias, Comparison, Difference, and Influencing relations.
Again each of these five relations take place at three levels - subject, facet, and
array. These are respectively called as Inter-subject (Phase), intra-facet and intra-array.
Each relation has its own symbols indicated by Roman smalls preceded by 0 (Zero).

2.5.6 Assignments
1. Relation between Political Science and Economics
2. Relation between Mathematics and Physics
3. Mathematics for Doctors
4. Chemistry for Engineers.
5. A Comparative study of Science and Arts.
6. Comparative study of History and Political Science.
7. Influence of Science on Arts
8. Influence of Economics on Politics
9. Reference service and documentation.
10. China and England in 19th century.
11. Physiological anatomy
12. Democracy in world state
13. Reference service compared with documentation.
14. Constitution of earth and marks: a comparative study.
Centre for Distance Education 2.5.8 Acharya Nagarjuna University

15. Comparison of Quantum Physics and wave mechanics

16. Difference between Reference service and documentation
17. Difference between Hinduism and Buddhism
18. Influence of Communism on nationalism
19. Relation between God and faith
20. Cytology and Histology

2.5.7 References
1. Kaula, P.N.: A treatise on Colon Classification. Sterling Publishing Pvt. Ltd., New
Delhi, 1985.
2. Khanna, J.K. and Kapil, D.D.: Colon Classification. Ess Ess Publication, New Delhi,
1982.
3. Kumar, P.S.G.: Practical Classification, Volume one: Colon Classification,
Metropolital Book Co., New Delhi, 1978.
4. Mukhopadhya, Ajoy: Guide to Colon Classification Practice. Metropolital Book Co.,
Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 1976.
5. Ranganathan, S.R.: Colon Classification, 6th Reprinted edition Asia Publishing
House, Bombay, 1976.
6. Satija, M.P.: Manual of Practical Colon Classification. Sterling Publishers Pvt., New
Delhi, 1984.
Library Classification Practice 2.6.1 Examples from Main Classes :

Lesson – 6

EXAMPLES FROM MAIN CLASSES: GENERALIA,

LIBRARY SCIENCE AND MATHEMATICS
2.6.0 Objective
The objective of this lesson is to enable the candidate to understand how to classify the
documents belonging to generalia class, general bibliography, library science, mathematics, etc

Structure

2.6.1 Generalia class with worked out examples

2.6.2 Generalia bibliography, with worked examples
2.6.3 Library Science with worked out examples
2.6.4 Mathematics, with worked out examples
2.6.5 Assignments
2.6.6 Books for reference

2.6.1 Generalia class:

Generalia class accommodates documents relating to subjects which cannot be put into
any other single main class enumerated in the schedule of Colon Classification scheme. The
notation for Generalia Class is Roman small alphabet letter ‘z’ unlike that of others which are
represented by Roman capital alphabets.

The Generalia class includes documents of three types as:

(1) Documents dealing with several subjects belonging to a specific geographical area:
The isolate number is to be got by (GD).
eg. z4 Orientology (The specific area under study is Asia).
eg: z44 Indology (the specific area under study is India)

(2) Documents dealing with several subjects by a person who is considered as a class
because of his contribution or impact on society: In these cases the z is to be
sharpened by (AD).
eg. zG Gandhiana.
eg: zP Platoana

(3) Documents whose subject matter cannot be considered to go into a single basic
subject are classed with Generalia. Whenever the document to be classified deals
with many subjects and does not require the amplification with either (GD) or (AD)
and calls for (ACI) the digit z is omitted from the class number.
Centre for Distance Education 2.6.2 Acharya Nagarjuna University

eg: n44,M Manorama yearbook

k73,L Encyclopaedia Americana

2.6.2 Generalia bibliography:

The schedule of z Generalia class with enumerated isolates should be fitted to the digit
“a “ for Generalia Bibliography”.

A bibliography is a list of documents. Its facet formula is: a[P1], [P2] [P3], [P4].
P1 stands for 1st Round, 1st Level Personality here representing material such as
books, newspapers, periodicals, etc. These are enumerated.
P2 is 1st Round, 2nd Level Personality facet representing the issuing authority
whether Bookseller, or a publisher etc. These are enumerated.
P3 is 1st Round, 3rd Level Personality facet. It is to be got by (CD) or (AD)
depending upon [P2].
If [P2] is 1, [P3] is for area to be got by (GD), and [T] is for Period to be worked
out to Least Effective Decade (LED).
If the Isolate Number in [P2] is 2, the [P3] for country is to be got by (GD), and
the [P4] for origin is to be got by (CD);
If the isolate number in [P2] is 3 or 4, [P3] for Publisher or Bookseller to be
obtained by (AD);
If the [P2] is 5, [P3] for country is to be got by (GD), [P4] for origin by (CD); and
when the isolate number is Union Catalogue, [P3] for Geographical area covered
is to be obtained by (GD).
P4 is 1st Round, 4th Level Personality facet and depends on [P2] and got by (CD) if
required as stated above.

Examples:

1. a46,156,N78 British Union catalogue of Periodicals, 1978

a M.C. for Generalia Bibliography
46 [P] for Periodicals
1 [P2] for Union catalogue.
56 [P3] by (GD) for Britain
N78 [P4] representing time, 1978

2. zG:(Y) Social thought of Mahatma Gandhi

z M.C. for Generalia
G [P] got by (AD) for Gandhi due to his impact on society
(Y) (SD) used as (E) for social thought (Here the (SD) is used as
per the provision under Rule 05833 in page 1.31 of CC.)

3. z44,N69t5:g Critical study of India’s 4th Five Year Plan, (1969).

z M.C. for Generalia. (Five Year Plans deal with many
subjects, that is, many aspects of development of society)
44 [S] for India got by (GD) to act as (P).
N69 [T] for 1969 (year of commencement of the 4th Five Year
Plan).
t5 ACI applicable after (T) for Plan.
g EPCI for criticism/critical appraisal.
Library Classification Practice 2.6.3 Examples from Main Classes :

4. a14,144m,N58 Indian National Bibliography

a M.C. for generalia bibliography
14 [P] for books
1 [P2] for list of publications in a geographical area.
44 [P3] for India got by (GD) since [P2] is represented by 1.
m ACI applicable before [S]
N58 [P2] for 1958 date of publication of m (ACI)

5. a46,156 British Union Catalogue of Periodicals

a M.C. for Generalia bibliography
46 [P] for periodicals
1 [P2] for Union Catalogue, obtained by Enumeration
Device.
56 [P3] got by (GD) for Britain.

6. a46,256117 Current periodicals available in the Cambridge University

Library
a M.C. for Generalia bibliography
46 [P] for Periodical
2 [P2] for Library catalogue
56117 [P3] got by (GD) for Cambridge.

7. a12-333,24113 A catalogue of Kannada Manuscripts in Mysore

Research Institute Library.
a M.C. for Generalia bibliography
12 1st level [P] for manuscripts
3 1st level [P] for extension of language (connected with
super imposition device
33 Kanerese language taken from language isolates
2 2nd level [P] for library catalogue
4413 [P3] got by (CD) for Mysore.

8. z46m56,M Journal of Royal Asiastic Society of Great Britian, 19th

century.
z M.C. for Generalia class
46 [P] for Periodical (Journal)
m ACI for periodical
56 [P1] for Great Britain got by (GD)
M [P2} is got by (CD) for 19th century.

2.6.3 Library Science [2]

Library Science is concerned with the collection of documents dealing with
different disciplines, processing them and organising them in a helpful sequence on the shelves
of the library so that readers can make use of them to their best advantage and thus help
dissemination of knowledge in the society. Its facet formula is: 2[P];[M]:[E][2P]
2 is M.C. for Library Science
[P] is the type of library
Centre for Distance Education 2.6.4 Acharya Nagarjuna University

[M] is the kind of document (Its isolates are the same as that of [P] for
Generalia Bibliography
[E][2P] deal with different problems of organisational, administrative,
technical procedures, and processes etc.

Examples:
1. 234.44’P04 University Libraries in India, in 2004.
2 M.C. for Library Science
34 [P] for University
44 [S] for India.
PO4 [T] for 2004

2. 23:4 Cooperation in Academic libraries

2 M.C. for Library Science
3 [P] for Academic Libraries
4 [E] for cooperation.

3. 234;12:55 Cataloguing of Manuscripts in University libraries

2 M.C. for Library Science
34 [P] for University Libraries
12 [M] for manuscripts taken from [P] of Generalia class
z..
55 [E] for cataloguing

4. 236;1512:55M7 Cataloguing of microfilms in Research libraries

according to Cutter’s Rules for Dictionary Catalogue.
(Date of Publication of the code was 1870).
2 M.C. for Library Science
36 [P] facet for Research Libraries
1512 [M] for film rolls (here micro-films),
55 [E] for cataloguing
M7 (CD) for 1870 the year of publication of Cutters code.

5. 234;14:51N3,9(X).56’N8 Classification of Printed books in Economics

according to Colon Classification system in
University libraries of United Kingdom in
1980s.
2 M.C. for Library Science
34 [P] University Library
14 [M] for Printed books (taken from [P] of z Generalia
class)
51 [E] for classification
N3 (CD) for 1930 to sharpen [E] facet for Colon
Classification the year of publication of Cutters code.
9(X) [2P] for subject classified obtained by (SD).
56 [S] isolate for Great Britain
N8 [T] for 1980s.

6. 24(A):97 Documentation in Science libraries.

2 M.C. for Library Science
4 [P] for extension for other libraries by (SD)
Library Classification Practice 2.6.5 Examples from Main Classes :

(A) [P] for Science Libraries,

97 [E] for documentation

7. 213-4(A);46:1.44 Selection of periodicals in the National Science

Library of India.
2 M.C. for Library Science
13 [P] National Library
4(A) (SD) for Science Library (where 4 is [P] for extension of
other libraries and A is for Science)
1 [E] for selection
44 [T] for India.

8. 2:(Y:3) Social functions of libraries.

2 M.C. for Library Science
(Y:3) (SD) for social function (Where Y is M.C. for Sociology
and 3 is [E] for functions (activities).

9. 2k73,N74 Encyclopaedia of Library and Information Science, 1974

2 M.C. for Library & Information Science
k (ACI) applicable before [S] for encyclopaedia
73 (S) for 73 act as [P1]
N74 (T) isolate for 1974 (here as [P2].

10. 2wM92,1 Autobiography of [Link] (born in 1892).

2 M.C. for Library Science
w (ACI) applicable before space isolate for autobiography
M92 [P1] for 1892 got by (CD) as per facet formula
1 (P2) As per facet formula of (ACI) for Autobiography.

2.6.3 Mathematics [B]

Mathematics is a science of space and numbers. It deals with quantity, form, measurement,
and arrangement. Arithmetic, algebra, trigonometry, geometry etc., are its branches. The main
class mathematics is divided canonically. Its canonical classes are:

B1 Arithmetic
B2 Algebra
B3 Analysis
B4 Other methods
B5 Trigonometry
B6 Geometry
B7 Mechanics
B8 Physico-mathematics
B9 Astronomy

Some of these canonical classes and some of the divisions of these classes have their
own facet formulas.
Centre for Distance Education 2.6.6 Acharya Nagarjuna University

Examples:
1. B13:1 Elementary arithmetical method
B1 Arithmetic
B13 Integer (Theory of numbers)
1 [E] for elementary arithmetical method.

2. B161:2 Algebraic method for Hyper complex prime number.

B16 Complex and hyper-complex number
1 [P] for Prime number
2 [E] Algebric method

3. B23:1 Numerical solution of Algebric equations.

B23 Theory of equation
1 [E] for Sollution

4. B331,1,6 Sixth order ordinary Linear equations

B33 Differential and integral equations
1 [P] for ordinary
1 [P2] for linear
6 [P3] for sixth order

5. B62:3 Differential plane geometry

B6 Geometry
2 [P] for plane
3 [E] for differential

6. B6M,1:5 Non-Euclidean descriptive line geometry

B6M System for Non-Euclidea Geometry
1 [P] for line or linear geometry
5 [E] for Descriptive

7. B78:15 Archimedes’ principle of gases.

B7 Mechanics
8 [P] for gas
15 [E] for Archimedes.

8. B9:165.44 Indian standard time.

B9 Astronomy
165 [E] for Standard Time
44 [S] for India.

9. B92:57 Lunar eclipse

B9 Canonical division for Astronomy
2 (P) for Moon (Lunar)
57 [E] for eclipse .

10. B97:5212 Planetary system and the dip of horizon.

B9 Astronomy
7 [P] for Planetary system
Library Classification Practice 2.6.7 Examples from Main Classes :

5212 [E] for Dip of horizon..

2.6.4 Assignments

1. Bibliography of bibliographies.
2. n56,M8
3. Bibliography of bibliographies.
4. Stateman’s Year Book (Started in 1885).
5. Oxford catalogue of Reference books.
6. Catalogue of maps published in India.
7. Encyclopaedia Americana (1800s).
8. Indian Book Review.
9. Librarianship in U.K.
10. Religious libraries.
11. Reference service.
12. Documentation work in University Libraries.
13. Cataloguing of books.
14. Methods of issuing of book in libraries.
15. Circulation of Newspapers in libraries.
16. Book selection in University libraries
17. Maintenance work in Public Libraries
18. Library Cooperation
19. Cataloguing of Manuscripts in Religious Libraries in India.
20. Theory of Equations.
21. Astrophysics
22. Complex integration of two variables.
23. Partial differential equations.
24. Foundations of projective geometry.
25. Study of Indian Standard Time.
26. Special invariant and the cubic ternary algebra.
27. Numerical solution of ordinary linear differential second order equations.

2.6.6 Reference Books:

1. Kaula, P.N.: A treatise on Colon Classification. Sterling Publishing Pvt. Ltd., New
Delhi, 1985.
2. Khanna, J.K. and Kapil, D.D.: Colon Classification. Ess Ess Publication, New Delhi,
1982.
3. Kumar, P.S.G.: Practical Classification, Volume one: Colon Classification,
Metropolital Book Co., New Delhi, 1978.
4. Mukhopadhya, Ajoy: Guide to Colon Classification Practice. Metropolital Book Co.,
Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 1976.
5. Ranganathan, S.R.: Colon Classification, 6th Reprinted edition Asia Publishing
House, Bombay, 1976.
6. Satija, M.P.: Manual of Practical Colon Classification. Sterling Publishers Pvt., New
Delhi, 1984.
Library Classification Practice 2.7.1 Examples from Main Classes of ..

Lesson – 7

EXAMPLES FROM MAIN CLASSES OF

PHYSICAL SCIENCES
2.7.0 Objective :
The objective of this lesson is to enable the candidate to understand how to classify the
documents dealing with Physics, Engineering, Chemistry, Technology, Geology, Mineralogy and
Useful Arts.

Structure :
2.7.1 Introduction
2.7.2 Physics: meaning and worked out examples
2.7.3 Engineering: Meaning and worked out examples
2.7.4 Chemistry: meaning and worked out examples
2.7.5 Technology: meaning and worked out examples
2.7.6 Geology: meaning and worked out examples
2.7.7 Mining: meaning and worked out examples
2.7.8 Useful Arts: meaning and worked out examples
2.7.9 Assignments
2.7.10 Books for reference

2.7.1 Introduction
Physical sciences generally include Physics, Engineering, Chemistry, Technology,
Geology, Mineralogy, Meteorology etc. These sciences are concerned with matter without life.

2.7.2 Physics [C]

Physics deals with matter and energy. It studies force, motion, heat, light, sound,
magnetism, radiation, atomic structure etc. It is sub-divided into Canonical classes as:
C1 Fundamentals
C2 Properties of matter
C3 Sound
C4 Heat
C5 Light, Radiation
C6 Electricity
C7 Magnetism and
C8 Cosmic hypothes
C9
Centre for Distance Education 2.7.2 Acharya Nagarjuna University

Some of these canonical classes have their own facet formulas.

Besides the canonical divisions, Physics has Systems and Specials.

Examples:

1. C215,8 Structure of glass

C2 Canonical Division for Properties of matter
15 [P] for glass
8 [P2] for structure

2. C315:7 Acoustic property of Audible-sound

C3 Canonical division for Sound
1 [P] for Audible sound
7 [E] for acoustics

3. C4:7 Textbook on Thermodynamics

C4 Canonical Division for Heat
7 [E] for Thermodynamics

4. C56:3 Spectroscopy of Infra-red radiation

C5 Canonical Division for Radiation
6 [P] for Infra red
3 [E] for spectroscopy

5. C6248:4 Multiphase Thermo electricity

4
C6 Canonical Division for Electricity
248 [P] for Multiphase
44 [E] for Thermo electricity

6. C75:8 Studies on the nature of terrestrial magnetism

C7 Canonical Division for Magnetism
5 [P] for Terrestrial
8 [E] for Nature

7. C9B3:3 Nuclear spectroscopy

C9B3 Special for Nuclears under Physics
3 [E] for spectroscopy (foci taken from C5 by direction)

8. C54:55 Defraction of gamma rays

C5 Canonical division for Radiation
4 [P] Gamma rays
55 [E] for diffraction

9. C3:21 Velocity of Sound

C3 Canonical Division for Sound
21 [E] for velocity

10. C3:2;(E191) Propagation of sound through metals

Library Classification Practice 2.7.3 Examples from Main Classes of ..

C3 Canonical Division for Sound

2 [E] for propagation
E M.C. for Chemistry
191 [P] for Metal

11. C,f3 Practical Physics

C M.C. for Physics
f3 [PPCI] for Experiment here for practical.

2.7.3 Engineering [D]

Engineering is an applied science. Ranganathan has placed the applied sciences

immediately after basic sciences. Hence after physics, engineering was given. Engineering
discipline involve the planning, design, construction of railroads, bridges, dams, canals,
buildings, machines, electrical systems etc.
Its facet formula is: D(P), (P2):(E)(2P)

Examples:
1. D3:32 Strength of building materials
D M.C. for Engineering
3 [P] for Building
32 [E] for strength of material

2. D33,6:7 Constructing brick roofs

D M.C. for Engineering
33 [P] for brick
6 [P] for roof under 3 building
7 [E] facet for construction.

3. D41534,5:7 Constructing of broad gauge railway curves

` D M.C. for Engineering
41534 [P] under Rail Rod (415) for Broad gauge (41534)
5 [P2} for curve
7 [E] for construction.

4. D43,8:2 Surveying of aerodrome

D M.C. for Engineering
43 [P] facet for airway
8 [P2] for aerodrome under 43
2 [E] for surveying.

5. D513 Automobile Engineering

D M.C. for Engineering
513 [P] for automobile (Drawn by mechanical power)

6. D5151,66:8 Tram car roof repair

5
D M.C. for Engineering
5151 [P] for tram car
Centre for Distance Education 2.7.4 Acharya Nagarjuna University

66 [P2] for roof

85 [E] facet for repair

7. D523,6:4 Drawing for the body of steam boat

D M.C. for Engineering
523 [P] for steam boat
6 [P2] for body
4 [E] for drawing.

8. D6,78:4 Design in servomechanism

D M.C. for Engineering
6 [P] for mechanical engineering
78 [P2] for Servomechanism under (P) 6
4 [E] for Design.

9. D65,8(B) Computer (electronic)

D M.C. for Engineering
65 [P] for Electronic
8(B) [P] for Computer under 8(1) other machinery

10. D85:(G) Biology of water supply

D M.C. for Engineering
85 [P] for water supply
G M.C. for Biology

2.7.4 Chemistry [E]

Chemistry is the science that deals with characteristics of simple substances (elements),
the changes that take place when they combine to form other substances, and the laws of their
behaviour under various conditions. In short it studies the structure and composition of
substances in nature. It is divided into Inorganic Chemistry, Organic Chemistry, Physical and
Analytical Chemistry.
Its facet formula is: E(P):(E)(2P)

Terminology
In constructing class numbers for Inorganic compounds, it is better to understand the
following terms:

Element Number: The Element number consists of the Group number plus period
number in Periodic table. The group of digits following the initial digit ‘1’ may be termed
as element number. Thus every element has an element number consisting of two digits
or three digits. If the element number runs to three digits or more, the third digit will be
‘9’.
Eg. 1. Full element No. of Hydrogen is 110 ( the second 1 is to represent
group and third digit ‘0’ is its number in the periodic table. So the numbers
after the initial ‘1’ is the element number. 110 is full element number.
2. Full element No. of Zinc is 123

Substance number: Substance number is Personality Isolate numbers enumerated in

the schedule to accommodate documents on the chemistry of specific elements.
Library Classification Practice 2.7.5 Examples from Main Classes of ..

Usually it consists of three digits and in some cases 5 digits. The second digit in the
numbers of the subdivisions of the substance division represents the group to which it
belongs in Periodic table, and the 3rd digit is period number in the Periodic table.
Eg.: Chromium is 162. (Here the digit 6 is for 6th Group in the Periodic table,
and 2 is the period of Chromium in the Periodic table. So 62 is element number
and 162 is full element number

Periodic table: An arrangement of the chemical elements in order of their Atomic

Numbers and the elements having similar properties full into Groups of related elements.
Periodic Number: The third digit is Period number in the period table. The
vertical and horizontal rulings in the periodic table give rise to 90 cells. Each cell usually
accommodates one element, but sometimes there may be more.
Valency number: The Group number is valency number.

Construction of numbers
Oxide, acid and salt numbers are to be constructed with the aid of the element
numbers given under Inorganic substances.
In case of oxide of an element, its substance number will consist of digit 2 plus
the number of the constituent element whose hydroxyl or basic oxide forms the primary
subject matter of the book.
In case of acids and salts, the substance number consists of the digit 3 and 4
respectively plus by the full element number of the constituent element.

Examples
1. E:2 Physical Chemistry
E M.C. for Chemistry

2. E9G Biochemistry
E9G Special under Chemistry

3. E:3 Analytical Chemistry

E M.C. for Chemistry
3 [E] for Analytical Chemistry

4. E:296 Nuclear Chemistry

E M.C. for Chemistry
296 [E] for Nuclear and Radio Chemistry

5. E:1 General Chemistry

E M.C. for Chemistry
1 [E] for General Chemistry

6. E:24 Thermo Chemistry

E M.C. for Chemistry
24 [E] for Chemical Thermodynamics

7. E198:213 Chemical Kinetics of Gases

E M.C. for Chemistry
198 [P] for Gas
213 [E] for Chemical kinetics
Centre for Distance Education 2.7.6 Acharya Nagarjuna University

8. E5:24 Chemical Thermo dynamics of organic substances

E M.C. for Chemistry
5 [P] for Organic Substances
24 [E] for Chemical Thermo dynamics

9. E9G,68:3 Biochemical analysis of carbohydrates

3
E9G Special for Biochemistry under Chemistry
68 [P] for Carbohydrates
3 [E] for Analysis

10. E129:215 Valency of radium

E M.C. for Chemistry
129 [P] for Radium
215 [E] for Valency

11. E6892,3:22 Solution of organic acid in starch

E M.C. for Chemistry
6892 [P] for acid
3 [P2] for organic acid
22 [E] facet for solution

2.7.5 Technology [F]

Technology is the science of the mechanical and industrial arts. But here its scope is
limited to chemical technology, that is, the mass of industrial production of chemicals and their
byproducts.
Its facet formula is : E(P):(E)(2P)
(P) is the substance facet. Its isolates are those of (P) facet of Chemistry
besides some enumerated isolates
(E) cum (2P) are problem and process facets. The isolates for problem facet are
to be taken from the Main class E for Chemistry.

The digits following 8 in the Energy facet of chemistry are to be taken as problem in
Technology. There may be different industrial processes for a single problem. Suppose if a
book requires problem isolates as well as process isolates, the process isolate should be added
first and there after the problem isolate. The two isolate numbers i.e. process and problem
isolates are to be separated by ‘:’ (colon). The process isolate is to be got by (AD). For
example,
F210:A:35 ABC process of water distillation and
F210:X:35 XYZ process of water distillation.
Water is treated as Hydrogen Hydroxide, that is, H(OH).
Therefore substance number of water is 2+10 = 210.

Examples

1. F54:7 Fermentation of Alcohol.

F M.C. for Technology
54 [P] for Alcohol
7 [E] for Fermentation. (Taken from E:87). As per Rule F22 in
Library Classification Practice 2.7.7 Examples from Main Classes of ..

page 1.77 of C.C.

2. F(E) Industrial Chemistry

3. F555:92 Filtration of petroleum.

F M.C. for Technology
555 [P] for Petroleum
92 [E] for filtration (taken from E:892).

4. F(J711) Rubber Technology

F M.C. for Technology
J M.C. for Agriculture
711 [P] for Rubber.

5. F527:95 Painting and Colouring on Celluloid

F M.C. for Technology
527 [P] for Celluloid
95 [E] for Painting and Colouring.

6. F551:2 Hydrogenation of Coal.

F M.C. for Technology
551 [P] for Coal
2 [E] for Hydrogenation

7. F61,5:35 Industrial Distillation of Nitro Paraffins

F M.C. for Technology
61 [P] for Paraffin taken from [P] chemistry
5 [P] for Nitrogen from 150 (P) of M.C. E Chemistry
35 [E] for Distillation taken from 835 of (E) of M.C. E for
Chemistry.

8. F547(J374):7 Fermentation of Grape wine.

F M.C. for Technology
547 [P] for Wine
J M.C. for Agriculture
374 [P] for Grapes
7 [E] for Fermentation taken from (E)87 from E Chemistry

9. F:96 Glass blowing technology

F M.C. for Technology
96 [E] for Glass blowing taken from (E) 896 of E Chemistry.

10. F110-5594 Hydrogen bomb

F M.C. for Technology
110 [P] for Hydrogen taken from (O) of M.C. E Chemistry.
5594 [P] for Bomb (explosives)

11. F611,281:2 Industrial dehydration of Methyl ether

F M.C. for Technology
611 [P] for Methane taken from E Chemistry
Centre for Distance Education 2.7.8 Acharya Nagarjuna University

281 [P2] for ether taken from (P2) of E Chemistry

2 [E] for Dehydration taken from (P) 82 of E Chemistry omitting
8.

2.7.6 Geology [H]

Geology is the science that deals with earth’s crust, its layers and their history. It
is divided into 8 canonical divisions and some of them have their own facet formulas.
(P) and (E} cum (2P) vary according to the canonical division. Normally
(P) is substance or the kind of earth’s surface, and
(E) cum (2P) is the geological process and problems.

In the case of H1 Mineralogy.

(P) is the same as (P) of E Chemistry and isolates in (E) are enumerated.

In the case of H6 Paleontology

the (P) facet is the same as (P) of K Zoology.
Books on Paleobotany are to be classified in I Botany.
In Paleontology (T) is always necessary. But the isolate numbers for (T) are to be taken
from H5 Stratigraphy replacing H5 by A.
Examples:
H5 = A
H51 = A1
Mesozoic Age = A3
Recent times = A55.

Paleozoic Hydrozoa: Here Paleozoic is the Time, to be taken from H5.

Hydrozoa is a zoological species to be taken from (P) of K Zoology.
H641’A2 Paleozoic Hydrozoa
H6 Canonical division for Paleontology under Geology.
41 [P] Hydrozoa taken from K Zoology
A2 derived from H52 (H5=A) for Paleozoic era
In the case of H7 for Economic Geology.
Its (P) and (E) are the same as that of H1 Mineralogy.
eg.
H74.44Q7 Salt deposit of Pakistan.
H7 Canonical division for Economic Geology Under H Geology. This
is to be amplified by the digit 4 taken from (P) of E Chemistry.
4 (P) for salt from (P) of E Chemistry
44Q7 (S) for Pakistan.

Examples:
1. H1191:12 Natural history of metals
H1 Canonical division for Minorology in H Geology
191 [P] of Chemistry for metals
12 (E) for natural history.

2. H211:16 Genesis of volcanic rock

H2 Canonical division for Petrology under H Geology
Library Classification Practice 2.7.9 Examples from Main Classes of ..

11 [P] of Volcanic rock

16 (E) for genesis taken from (E) of H1 for Mineralogy by
direction in the schedule

3. H411.53 Volcanoes of France

H411 Volcano (under canonical division for Dynamic Geology)
53 [S] for France

4. H55.4.g7H:12 Natural history of quaternary stratigraphy in Himalayan

mountains
H55 Quaternary Stratigraphy
4 [S] for Asia (Since Himalayas are boarded by India,
China, Nepal, Tibet, etc.)
g7 (S2) for Mountains.
H (AD) for Himalayas
12 [E] for natural history taken from ‘G’ Biology by
direction in H1 Mineralogy

5. H6945’A34 Remains of the dinosaurs of the Cretaceous age

H6 Canonical division for Paleontology
945 [P] of dinosaurs taken from (P) of K Zoology
A34 (T) for Cretaceous period derived from H534..

6. H7182:16.4473 Genesis of Iron deposits in Bihar.

H7 Canonical division for Economic Geology
182 [P] of Iron taken from (P) of E Chemistry
16 (E) for genesis taken from (E) of Mineralogy
4473 [S] for Bihar

7. H69797’A55 Fossils of recent primates

H6 Canonical division for Paleontology
9797 [P] of Primates taken from K Zoology,
A55 (T) for recent times derived from H555 (H5=A)..

2.7.7 Mining [HZ]

Mining is concerned with ores and their extraction from the mines by different
operations. It is applied Mineralogy involving the processes of digging ores from mines and the
subsequent processes of separating the required mineral from its impurities.

Its facet formula: HZ(P),(P2): (E)(2P)

(P) is the ore. It forms substance facet to be taken from (P) of E Chemistry.
(P2) is the part of the work
(E) cum (2P) form the processes involved in mining.

Examples
1. HZ:53 Ventilation facilities in mines.
HZ M.C. for Mining
53 [E] for Ventilation
Centre for Distance Education 2.7.10 Acharya Nagarjuna University

2. HZ161:13 Drilling of Sulphur mines

HZ M.C. for Mining
161 [P] for Sulphur taken from (P) of E M.C. for Chemistry
13 [E] for drilling

3. HZ182,3:45 Floods in the tunnel of iron mines

HZ M.C. for Mining
182 [P] for Iron taken from E chemistry
3 [P2] for tunnel
45 [E] for flooding

4. HZ118,4:55 Lighting the underground roads of Iron Mines

HZ M.C. for Mining
118 [P] for Gold taken from (P) of E Chemistry
4 [P2] for underground roads
55 [E] for lighting

5. HZ148,3:18 Timbering the tunnels of lead mines

HZ M.C. for Mining
148 [P] for Lead taken from (P) of Chemistry
3 [P2] for tunnel
18 [E] for timbering

6. HZ161,5:24.55 Screening of the underground vehicle in the Sulphur

mines in Germany
HZ M.C. for Mining
161 [P] for Sulphur taken from (P) of Chemistry
5 [P2] for underground vehicle
24 [E] for screening
55 [S] for Germany

7. HZ:4.56 Accidents in Mines in U.K.

HZ M.C. for Mines
4 [E] for Accidents
56 [S] for U.K.

8. HZ.44(Z) Indian Mining Code

HZ M.C. for Mining
44 [S] for India
(Z) (SD) for code got by Z for Law (here for Code).

2.7.8 Useful Arts [M]

The Main Class M for Useful Arts is a miscellaneous class. It complements Engineering,
Technology and Mining. Making of miscellaneous types of tools, machines and instruments go
into this main class. Sports, indoor games are also its parts.

The schedules of M7 for Textiles and MJ7 Rope making are all illustrative and on this
analogy the isolates for other branches of Useful Arts may be formed.
Library Classification Practice 2.7.11 Examples from Main Classes of ..

The schedules from M3 for Domestic Science to M98 Packing at the end of the first
column of page 2.88 of CC are revised and are provided in page 27 of the Annexure.

Examples
1. M73;1:3 Cotton cloth weaving.
M7 for Textiles under Useful Arts
3 [P] for cloth
1 [M] for cotton
3 for [E] weaving. (Note: the numbers are taken from
the revised schedule given in annexure)

2. M72;7:1 Jute rope spinning

M7 Textiles under the M.C. M Useful Arts
2 [P] for rope
7 [M] for Jute
1 [E] for spinning.

3. MA3.44 Cooking in Indian hotels

MA for Home and Hotel science
3 [P] for cooking
44 [S] for India

4. M7;7:7.44Q71B Washing of jute in Bangladesh

M7 for Textiles under M Useful Arts
7 [M] for Jute
7 [E] for washing
44Q71B [S] for Bangladesh got by (AD)..

5. M73;3:3 Weaving of silk cloth

M7 for Textiles under M.C. for Useful Arts
3 [P] for cloth
3 [M] for silk
3 for [E] weaving.

6. M74;2:4 Knitting of wool

M7 for Textiles under Useful Arts
4 [P] for knit fabric
2 [M] for wool
4 [E] for knitting .

7. M7;1:2 Cotton ginning

M7 for Textiles under Useful Arts
1 [M] for cotton
2 [E] for ginning.

2.7.9 Assignments: The following titles are to be classified according to CC, 6th edition.
1. Sold State Physics
2. Transmission of sound.
3. Theory of electrical conduction.
4. Nuclear fission.
Centre for Distance Education 2.7.12 Acharya Nagarjuna University

5. Spectroscopy of infra-red rays.

6. Repair of diesel engines.
7. Design of Television set.
8. Translating machines.
9. Solid State Chemistry.
10. Distillation of Sulphur.
11. Analysis of Air.
12. Electrometallurgy.
13. Filtration method in textile industry.
14. Artificial production of diamonds.
15. Prospecting of the sand stone.
16. Mathematical crystallography.
17. Genises of diamond.
18. Earthquakes in Japan.
19. Canozoic aves.
20. Drilling the tunnels in mines.
21. Accidents in coal mines.
22. Silk weaving.
23. Woolen carpets of Persia.
24. The art of cookery.
25. Mountain climbing.

2.7.10 Reference books:

1. Kaula, P.N.: A treatise on Colon Classification. Sterling Publishing Pvt. Ltd., New
Delhi, 1985.
2. Khanna, J.K. and Kapil, D.D.: Colon Classification. Ess Ess Publication, New Delhi,
1982.
3. Kumar, P.S.G.: Practical Classification, Volume one: Colon Classification,
Metropolital Book Co., New Delhi, 1978.
4. Mukhopadhya, Ajoy: Guide to Colon Classification Practice. Metropolital Book Co.,
Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 1976.
5. Ranganathan, S.R.: Colon Classification, 6th Reprinted edition Asia Publishing
House, Bombay, 1976.
Library Classification Practice 2.8.1 Examples from main Classes..

Lesson – 8

Examples from Main Classes of Biological

Sciences
2.8.0 Objective
The objective of this lesson is to enable the candidate to understand how to classify the
documents dealing with Biology, Botany, Agriculture, Zoology, Animal Husbandry, Medicine,
Pharmacognsy.

Structure :
2.8.1 Introduction
2.8.2 Biology
2.8.3 Botany
2.8.4 Agriculture
2.8.5 Zoology
2.8.6 Animal Husbandry
2.8.7 Medicine
2.8.8 Pharmacognosy
2.8.9 Assignments
2.8.10 References

2.8.1 Introduction
Biological sciences include Biology, Botany, Agriculture, Zoology, Animal Husbandry,
and the related disciplines, Medicine and Pharmacognosy etc. These sciences are concerned
with matter with life.

2.8.2 Biology [G]

Biology is a discipline concerned with the study of living things – plants and animal life.
Its facet formula is G[P]:[E][2P]

[P] is the kind of life.

[E] [2P] is the biological problem of life.
Centre for Distance Education 2.8.2 Acharya Nagarjuna University

[2M] is also there when the focus in the [E] facet is 33 or 341 or 345, or 346. The [2M] is
the same as the [P] of E Chemistry. If further isolates are required in [2M], they can be
got by (SD).

Ex: 1. G12:33E;150 Chemical affects of nitrogen on Tissues.

2. G12:33E;(F56) Chemical affects of drugs on Tissues

Again in case of energy isolates from 12 to 18 or 5 and its subdivisions [S] space
isolates is to be added.

Ex: G:12.44 Fauna and Flora of India.

Examples:

1. G:64 Hybridization
G M.C. for Biology
64 [E] facet for Hybridization.

2. G91 Microbiology
G M.C. for Biology
91 [P] facet for Protista (Microbiology).

3. G:12.44 Fauna and flora of India

G M.C. for Biology
12 [E] facet for Fauna and flora
44 [S] for India

4. G:33;94 Metabolism of fat

G M.C. for Biology
33 [E] facet for Metabolism.
94 [2M]for fat taken from [P] of E Chemistry.

5. G.881:7 Biology of hair growth

G M.C. for Biology
881 [P] for hair (taken from [P} of L. Medicine)
7 [E] for growth (development).

6. G9B:671 Abiogenesis of the embryo

G9B Special for Embryo.
671 [E] for Abiogenesis

7. G:5 Bio-ecology
G M.C. for Biology
5 [E] facet for ecology

8. G9E,12:54 Tissues of old age and its prevention of diseases

G9E Specials for Old age under G Biology
12 [P] for tissue.
54 [E] for Prevention of disease.
Library Classification Practice 2.8.3 Examples from main Classes..

9. G18572:7;92 Development of alkaloid in nosal duct.

G M.C. for Biology
18572 [P] for nosal duct taken from [P] of L Medicine..
7 [E] for development
92 [2M]for alkaloid

10. G95574 Limonology

G M.C. for Biology
95574 [P] for Limonology.

2.3 Botany [I]

Botany is the branch of Biological sciences concerned with the study of plant and
vegetative life. Its facet formula is: I(P), (P2):(E)(2P)

[P] is kind of plant, the natural group. It is enumerated with a special index provided
immediately after the schedule.

[P2] is the part or organ of the plants. Its isolates are enumerated. If further required,
they can be taken from [P] of L Medicine.

[E] [2P] denotes the life processes. The isolates are same as those of [E] [2P] of G
Biology,

[2M] With regard to application of [2M] the procedure is the same as stated under G
Biology in this respect.

Examples:

I23 Mycology – a text book.

I M.C. for Botany
23 [P] for Fungi (Mycology)

I:11 Plant taxonomy

I M.C. for Botany
11 [E] for taxonomy (Nomenclature) taken from G Biology.

I5,16.4498.g7 Wild flowers of the Ceylon hills

I M.C. for Botany
5 [P] for flowering plants
16 [P2] for flower
4498 [S] for Ceylon
g7 [S2] for hills

I:33;150 Nitrogen metabolism in plants

I M.C. for Botany
33 [E] for Metabolism
150 [2M] for Nitrogen taken from [P] of E Chemistry
Centre for Distance Education 2.8.4 Acharya Nagarjuna University

I,4 Respiratory system in plants

I M.C. for Botany
4 [P2] for Respiratory system taken from [P] of L Medicine.

I42:2 Morphology of ferns

I M.C. for Botany
42 [P] for ferns (filicineae)
2 [E] for Morphology (anatomy)

I:8 Paleobotany
I M.C. for Botany
8 [E] for Paleobotany

I3:8’A55 Fossils of recent Bryophyta

I M.C. for Botany
3 [P] for Bryophyta
8 [E] for Paleobotany (fossils of Plants trees)
A55 [T] for Recent or Holocene taken from (E] of G Geology
(H555 = A55).

I22:12.44 Indian Algae.

I M.C. for Botany
22 [P] for Algae (sea-weeds)
12 [E] Natural history taken from [E] of G Biology. (This facet is
used on the analogy of the example given in the Rules part
for I Botany. P.1.83).

I12:33E;161 Chemical effect of sulphur on plant tissues.

I M.C. for Botany
12 [P] isolate for tissue taken from [P] of G Biology
33E [E] isolate for Chemical effect
161 [M] isolate for sulphur taken from [P] of E Chemistry.

2.4 Agriculture [J]

Agriculture is the science, art, or occupation of cultivating the soil to make crops grow. It
is concerned with the study of Economic plants, their Plantation and harvesting etc.
The facet formula is J[P]:[E][2P]:[2E]
[P] Plant.
[E] [2P] Problem
[2E] Operation.

The [P] isolates are enumerated on the basis of Group notation device.

Accordingly the 1st digit in [P] isolate is taken from the utility array part of plant, that is,
the use to which the produce is put like food, intoxicant, decoration, etc. The 2nd digit is taken
from array part of the plant like fruit, flower, stem, leaf, root or the whole plant for the purposes
noted in the utility array. The 3rd digit is got by ‘favoured category device’. For the most
favoured substance 1 is to be used and for 2nd favoured substance, the digit 2 is used. For
Library Classification Practice 2.8.5 Examples from main Classes..

example, the class number for Rice is J381. (Where J=Agriculture; 3=Food utility; 8=seed (part)
and 1=most favoured seed food.

Energy occurs in Agriculture in two rounds. The 1st Round [E] is the agricultural
problems and [2P] is a part or extension of the [E]. [2E] cum [3P] stand for the secondary
agricultural problems and processes or operation.

Each isolate in [E] has its own special [2P]. There is no need to use comma between [E]
and [2P] isolates.

Again each [2P] has its own set of [2E] isolates.

Examples

J1 House plants (Horticulture).

J M.C. for Agriculture
1 [P] for House plants.

J:1 Principles of soil science

J M.C. for Agriculture
1 [E] for soil.

J:4 Plant diseases

J M.C. for Agriculture
4 [E] for diseases.

J:1:7 Soil conservation

J M.C. for Agriculture
1 [E] for Soil
7 [2E] for conservation

J341:74:84 Cold storage of Potatoes

J M.C. for Agriculture
341 [P] for Potato
7 [E] for Harvesting
4 [2P] of Part Array [P] for stem
84 [2E] for cold storage.

J311:4:6.44.9W Treatment of diseases of sugarcane plants in North

Eastern India.
J M.C. for Agriculture
311 [P] for Sugarcane
4 [E] for disease
6 [2E] for treatment.
44 [S] for India
9W North Eastern part (taken from space isolate 19W omitting
‘1’)

J388:93;1129 Effect of ammonia in physiology of pulse plants

Centre for Distance Education 2.8.6 Acharya Nagarjuna University

J M.C. for Agriculture

388 [P] for pulse plans
93 [E] for Physiology
1129 [2M] for Ammonia taken from [P] of E Chemistry

J93:24:3 Application of fertilizer in vegetable growing.

J M.C. for Agriculture
93 Utility array of [P] for vegetable
2 [E] for manure
4 [2P] for fertilizer
3 [2E] for application.

J9S,37943:7:97.73 Soilless farming of tomato in USA

J9S Special for soilless farming in M.C. J for Agriculture
37943 [P] for tomatoes
7 [E] for Harvesting
97 [2E] cum [3P] for use
73 [S] for USA

J561:34:5 Transplanting rose stems

J M.C. for Agriculture
561 [P] for roses
3 [E] for Propagation
4 [2P] for stem taken from Part array of [P]
5 [2E] for 3 of [E] for transplantation.

2.5 Zoology [K]

Zoology is a branch of Biology that deals with Animal life.

The facet formula is:K[P]:[E][2P]

(P) is the kind of animal. (An alphabetical index of all the Personality isolates are
given immediately after the schedule).

(P2) is the body organ. Its isolates are same as the [P] of L Medicine. In case
the terms do not match exactly, the analogues terms are to be
used (eg. ‘arms’ can be used for ‘wings’.

[E] cum [2P] denotes life process. These are the same as that of G Biology.
[2M] may be required in case of [E] for 3 and its subdivisions.
When the focus in [E] is 12 to 18 or 5 [S] is to be added immediately.

Examples

K92 Text book on Pisces (fishes).

K M.C. for Zoology
92 [P] for Pisces or fishes
Library Classification Practice 2.8.7 Examples from main Classes..

K1:2 Morphology of invertebrates.

K M.C. for Zoology
1 [P] for invertebrates
2 [E] for Morphology take from [E] of G Biology. (Ecology)

K:5 Animal behaviour (habits).

K M.C. for Zoology
5 [E] for behaviour taken from [E] of G Biology

K9:66 Evolution of vertebrates

K M.C. for Zoology
9 [P] for Vertebrata
66 [E] for evolution taken from [E] of G Biology

K1,2 Digestive organs of invertebrate animals

K M.C. for Zoology
1 [P] for invertebrate
2 [P2] digestive organ taken from [P] of L Medicine

K96:3 Physiology of Aves

K M.C. for Zoology
96 [P] for Aves (birds)
3 [E] for Physiology taken from [E] of G Biology

K96:332;161 Catabolism of sulphur in birds

K M.C. for Zoology
96 [P] for Aves or birds
332 [E] for Catabolism taken from [E] of G Biology
161 [2M] for Sulphur taken from [P] of E Chemistry

K96:58.4.g7H’n7 Migration of birds in Himalayas in Winter

K M.C. for Zoology
96 [P] for Aves
58 [E] for migration taken from [E] of G Biology
4 [S] for Himalayas (as they lay by the boarders of India, China,
Tibet etc.)
g7 [S2] for Mountains
H (AD) for Himalayas
n7 (T2) for Winter

K9,11:677 Cellular Biology of Vertebrate regeneration and repair

K M.C. for Zoology
9 [P] for Vertebrata
11 [P2] for Cell (cellure) taken from [P] of L Medicine
677 [E] for regeneration taken from [E] of G Biology

K96,185:33E;151 Chemical effect of Phosphorous on eyes of birds

K M.C. for Zoology
96 [P] for birds
Centre for Distance Education 2.8.8 Acharya Nagarjuna University

185 [P2] for eyes taken from [P] of L Medicine

33E [E] for Chemical effects
151 [2M] for Phosphorous taken from [P] of E Chemistry.

2.8.6 Animal Husbandry [KZ]

Animal husbandry is the science of domesticating animals for some economic or some
esthetic uses. It is concerned with the problem of domestic animals especially their breeding,
feeding and diseases

Its facet formula is: KZ [P],[P2]:[E][2P];[2M]:[2E][3P].

[P] is kind of animal. Many isolates are enumerated and the others care to be
formed by combining the isolates of utility and part array schedules on the same
lines as those of [P] of J Agriculture.
[P2] is the body organ of the animals. It is same as [P] of L Medicine.
[E] is for Problems and techniques of animal husbandry. These isolates have then
different [2P] isolates and [2E] isolates.
[2P] is extension of [E]
[2E] cum [3P] of KZ:7 are the same as [2E] cum [3P] of J:7 (Agricultural harvesting)
[2P] for KZ:1 is to be got by (SD)
[2M] may be required in case of KZ:3. In that case the isolates are same as the [P] of
E Chemistry.

Examples:

KZ:96 Veterinary Medicine

KZ M.C. for Animal husbandry
96 [E] for Pharmacognacy (medicine)

KZ311:75 Cow’s butter milk

KZ M.C. for Animal husbandry
311 [P] for Cow
7 [E] for produce
5 [2P] for Butter milk
KZ442:1(J385):7 Administering corn feeding
KZ M.C. for Animal husbandry
442 [P] for horse
1 [E] for feeding
J M.C. for Agriculture
385 [2P] for Corn (obtained from [P] of J agriculture got by (SD)
7 [2E] for Administering

KZ:4:6 Text book of Veterinary Science

KZ M.C. for Animal husbandry
4 [E] for Disease
6 [2E] for therapeutics (treatment) taken from L Medicine

KZ:1.572 Feeding of cattle in Denmark

Library Classification Practice 2.8.9 Examples from main Classes..

KZ M.C. for Animal husbandry

2 [P] for cattle
1 [E] for Feeding
572 [S] for Denmark

KZ35:75:84.191 Coldstorage of eggs in Equatorial regions

KZ M.C. for Animal husbandry
35 [P] for Production
7 [E] for Produce
5 [2E] for egg
84 [2E] for Cold storage (taken from J Agriculture)
191 [S] for Equatorial regions

KZ541,45:421:6 Treatment of lung Tuberculosis in dogs

KZ M.C. for Animal husbandry
541 [P] for dog
45 [P2] for lungs taken from [P] of L Medicine
421 [E] cum [2P] for Tuberculosis, taken from [E] cum [2P] of L
Medicine
6 [2E] for treatment

KZ333:423:625.461 Radio therapy of Virus diseases in Arabian goats.

KZ M.C. for Animal husbandry
333 [P] for goats
423 [E] for Virus diseases
625 [2E] [3P] Radio therapy
461 [S] for Arabia.

2.8.7 Medicine [L]

Medicine is the study of the human body to prevent and cure human diseases and thus
maintaining and improving human health. Its facet formula is: L[P]:[E] [2P]:[2E][3P]

[P] is the body organ. The subdivision of its isolate are regional divisions
(morphological) and isolate numbers 2 to 8 denote functional division
(anatomical). In case the focus of a term is diffused over both the regional
and functional organs, there its isolate number is to be got by adding the
functional organ number to the regional organ number by (SID) device
eg. L185-83 Eye muscles.

[E] cum [2P] is the biological problems of human life (that is, working and failure of the
human mechanism).

[2E] cum [3P] is prevention or treatment or pathology of diseases

[2M] may be required in case of human physiology

Centre for Distance Education 2.8.10 Acharya Nagarjuna University

[3M] may be required in case of substances used for treatment.

Isolates for both [2M] and [3M] are to be taken from [P] of E Chemistry.

Whenever a main class digit is amplified by a system or special facet or both, a comma
precedes the [P]. Comma separates the system and special facets, if these appear
simultaneously in a title.

eg. 1) L9C,185:4:6 Treating eye diseases in Children.

2) LL,9C,185:4:6 Homeopathic treatment of eye diseases of Children.

Examples

L:2 Human anatomy

L M.C. for Medicine
2 [E] for anatomy (Morphology)

L:4 Human disease

L M.C. for Medicine
4 [E] for disease.

L:4:3 Diagnosis of disease

L M.C. for Medicine
4 [E] for disease
3 [2E] for diagnosis.

L:4:4 Human pathology

L M.C. for Medicine
4 [E] for disease (though this term is not mentioned in the
title, it is to be presumed as if existing according to Wall-
Picture principle of Facet sequence)
4 [2E] for Pathology

L:4:7 Surgery
L M.C. for Medicine
4 [E] for disease
7 [2E] for surgery

L32:4:6 Treatment of heart disease

L M.C. for Medicine
32 [P] for Heart
4 [E] for disease
6 [2E] for treatment (therapeutics)

L:4:97 First aid

L M.C. for Medicine
4 [E] for disease
97 [2E] for First aid.
Library Classification Practice 2.8.11 Examples from main Classes..

LD,72:4:6 Unani treatment of brain

LD for system for Unani in L Medicine
72 [P] for Brain
4 [E] for disease
6 [2E] for treatment (Therapeutics)
LA,9F,45:4:6 Homeopathic and Unani treatment for female lungs
LA for more than one system, Homeopathy and Unani are
involved here. Therefore they are substituted by the
letter A as per rule.
9F Special for female
45 [P] for lungs
4 [E] for disease
6 [2E] for treatment

LM,9C,134:47:624 Heat treatment of structural disorder in legs of

children according to Naturopathy
LM System for Naturopathy under L Medicine
9C Special for child under L Medicine
134 [P] for leg
4 [E] for Disease
7 [2P] for structural disorder
624 [2E] for Thermotherapy (Heat).

2.8.8 Pharmacognosy [LZ]

Pharmacognosy is the science of preparation and study of medicines and drugs. This is
divided into canonical classes as under:

LZ3 Pharmacology
LZ5 Pharmacopeia
LZ8 Pharmacy (Preparing and dispensing of medicines)

Facet formula for LZ3 is: LZ3[P]:[E][2P]

[P] Though not explicitly stated, it is the same as [P] of E Chemistry.

[E] is the action of the drug
[2P] is the body organ on which the drug acts. It is to be got by (SD).

eg.LZ3170:2(L214) Fluoride drug stimulation in teeth.

LZ3 is Pharmacology
170 is [P] isolate of E Chemistry
2 is [E] stimulation
L214 [P] for Tooth in L Medicine

Facet formula for LZ is LZ5[P1],[P2] where

[P1] stands for country to be got by (GD).

[P2] is kind or order.
Centre for Distance Education 2.8.12 Acharya Nagarjuna University

Examples

LZ3:2(L4) Drugs effecting respiratory system.

LZ3 is canonical division Pharmacology under LZ
Pharmacognosy.
2 [E] for effect (stimulation)
(L4) (SD) for (2P) (where L is M.C. for Medicine and 4 is for
(P) for Respiratory system

LZ3:91 Antibiotic action of medicine.

LZ3 Canonical division for Pharmacology
91 [E] for antibiotic action

LZ371:3(L51) Benzoids depression in kidneys..

LZ3 Canonical division for Pharmacology.
71 [P] for Benzenoid taken from [P] of E Chemistry
3 [E] for depression.
(L51) is (SD) for [2P] for Kidneys taken from [P] of L
Medicine.

LZ3153:5(L87) Irritation in human skin due to arsenic.

LZ3 Canonical division for Pharmacology.
153 [P] for Arsenic taken from [P] of E Chemistry
5 [E] for irritation.
(L87) (SD) for [2P] representing human skin taken from [P] of
L Medicine.

LZ3161:91(G12) Antibiotic action of Sulphur in the tissues.

LZ3 Canonical division for Pharmacology.
161 [P] for Sulphur taken from [P] of Chemistry
91 [E] for antibiotic action.
(G12) (SD) for [2P] representing human tissues taken from
[P] of G Biology.

LZ8.44,g,9N3 Indian Pharmaceutical Association (1932).

LZ8 Canonical division for Pharmacology.
44 [S] for India
g (PPCI) for Learned Association
I [AD]is to be added after (PPCI) in the case of localised
body.
N3 [T] for 1932, the date of establishment of the
Association works as [P2] by (CD)

LZ3.73,g,9M5 American Society for Pharmacology (1859)

LZ3 Canonical division for Pharmacology.
73 [S] for America
g (PPCI) for learned society/ association
9 is to be added in case of non-localised body
M5 [T] for 1859 used as [P2] got by (CD)
Library Classification Practice 2.8.13 Examples from main Classes..

2.8.9 Assignment
1. Biology of hair growth.
2. Photosynthesis
3. Metabolism of fat
4. Cell structure
5. Plant Ecology
6. Text book of Paleo-botany
7. Nervous system of plants.
8. Morphology of stem of roses
9. Physiology of the plantain flowers .
10. Virus diseases of apple crop.
11. Cotton diseases.
12. Jute carding.
13. Animal adaptation.
14. Insect morphology.
15. Skeleton of frog.
16. Elephant abodes in India.
17. Feeding of dog.
18. Dairying.
19. Inflammation of eyelids.
20. Eye muscles
21. Dental surgery
22. Lung surgery of female
23. Diagnosis of nose diseases.
24. Heart stimulations by calcium chloride.
25. Drug effects on respiratory system.

2.8.10 Reference Books:

1. Kumar, P.S.G.: Practical Classification, Volume one: Colon Classification,

Metropolital Book Co., New Delhi, 1978.
2. Mukhopadhya, Ajoy: Guide to Colon Classification Practice. Metropolital Book Co.,
Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 1976.
3. Ranganathan, S.R.: Colon Classification, 6th Reprinted edition Asia Publishing
House, Bombay, 1976.
4. Satija, M.P.: Manual of Practical Colon Classification. Sterling Publishers Pvt., New
Delhi, 1984.
Library Classification Practice 2.9.1 Examples from Main Classes ..

Lesson – 9

EXAMPLES FROM MAIN CLASSES OF

HUMANITIES
2.9.0 Objective
The objective of this lesson is to enable the candidate to understand how to classify the
documents dealing with Fine Arts such as Architecture, Town Planning, Sculpture, Painting,
Music etc., Literature, Linguistics, Religion, Philosophy, Spiritual experience and Mysticism, and
Psychology.

Structure:
2.9.1 Introduction
2.9.2 Fine Arts
2.9.3 Literature
2.9.4 Linguistics
2.9.5 Religion
2.9.6 Philosophy
2.9.7 Spiritual experience and Mysticism: Meaning and worked out
examples
2.9.8 Psychology
2.9.9 Assignments
2.9.10 References

2.9.1 Introduction
Humanities are those subjects which appeal to senses. These subjects include Fine
Arts, Linguistics, Literature, Philosophy, Religion, Spiritual experience and Mysticism,
Psychology etc..

2.9.2 Fine Arts [N]

Fine Arts are those which depend upon taste and appeal to the sense of beauty. These
include Painting, Drawing, Sculpture, Architecture, Music, Theatre etc. These are divided into
canonical divisions and some of them have their own facet formulas.

Every canonical division is first divided by style (that is, a characteristic mode of
presentation) then by utility and lastly, if necessary, by part.
Centre for Distance Education 2.9.2 Acharya Nagarjuna University

[P1] and [P2] are style facets got by (GD) and (CD) respectively.
[M] is the medium of art and is required only in Paintings, Sculpture and Music.
[E] cum [2P] represent the method or the process involved in a particular art.

NA Architecture

Architecture deals with designing and planning of houses, churches, schools, public and
business buildings etc.

Its facet formula is: NA [P1], [P2][P3], [P4]:[E]

[P1] and [P2] both put together constitute the Style and are denoted by (GD) and (CD)
respectively. (CD) to be worked out up to the Century digit only.

eg. 1 NA44,J Mughal Architecture (16th century).

2. NA44,M Indian architecture of Victorian era (19th century)

[P3] is kind of building. Some isolates are enumerated and the rest may be got by (SD)
[P4] is the part of the building.

Examples:

1. NA51,C Hellenic Architecture

NA Canonical division for Architecture
51,C [P1] and [P2] takes together for Hellenic.

2. NA44,E8(Q3),45 Architecture of pillars in Jain temples

NA Canonical division for Architecture
44 [P] for India.
E [P2] for 11th century
8(Q3) is [P3] for religious buildings of Jains.
45 is [P4] for pillars.

3. NA,234,995 Painted decoration of University library building

NA Canonical division for Architecture
234 [P3] for University Library building.
995 [P4] for painted decoration

4. NA44,J8T,65.445245 Beauty of Dome architecture of the Taj Mahal.

NA Canonical division for Architecture
44 [P1] for Indian.
J for [P2] for Moghul period
8 for [P3] for Sepulchral monument.
T (AD) for Taj Mahal
65 for [P4] for dome
445245 for [S] for Agra.

5. NA441,G37,45:8 Model castle pillars in Pallava architecture.

NA Canonical division for Architecture
441 [P1] for Dravidian .
G [P2] for Pallavas
Library Classification Practice 2.9.3 Examples from Main Classes ..

37 is [P3] for castle

45 is [P4] for pillars.
8 [E] for model

NB Town Planning

Its facet formula is:NB[P],[P2][P3],[P4]:[E]

[P3] stands for the regions of planning whether city, village or town etc.
[P4] stands for parts of [P3], that is, building to be planned.

The isolates in NB are closely parallel to NA Architecture.

Examples:

1. NB,5,66:3 Plan of city park.

NB Canonical division for Town Planning
5 [P3] for City.
66 [P4] for Park
3 [E] for plan

2. NB,5,3:3 Study of city landscape design.

NB Canonical division for Town Planning
5 [P3] for City.
3 [P4] for landscape
3 [E] for design/plan

3. NB56,M1,5:3 Planning of village markets in Victorian England.

NB Canonical division for Town Planning
56 [P1] for England got by (GD).
M [P2] for Victorian era got by (CD)
1 [P3] for village
5 [P4] for market
3 [E] for planning.

ND Sculpture

Sculpture is art of casting and moulding three dimensional figures.

Its facet formula is: ND[P],[P2][P3];[M]:[E][2P]

[P], [P2] put together represents style to be obtained by (GD) and (CD).
[P3] stands for figure, that is, the object to be cast. Some of its isolates can be got by
(SD).
[M] is the material in which casting is done.

Examples:

1. ND,9(Q) Iconography
ND Canonical division for sculpture,
9(Q) [P3] for Iconography
Centre for Distance Education 2.9.4 Acharya Nagarjuna University

2. ND41,18;3:4 Design of marble bust in Chinese Sculpture.

ND Canonical division for sculpture,
41 [P1] for Chinese
18 [P3] for bust
3 [M] for marble
4 [E] for design.

3. ND44,C71;5:5 Bronze coin casting in Buddhist India.

ND Canonical division for sculpture,
44 [P1] for Indian
C [P2] for Buddhist period
71 [P3] for Coin
5 [E] for casting (Making of cast).

NQ Painting

Its facet formula: NQ[P],[P2][P3];[M]:[E][2P]

[P1], [P2] and [P3] are the same as ND sculpture.

[M] is the medium or the surface on which painting is drawn.
[E] cum [2P] represent the method or various processes of paintings.

Examples

1. NQ44,3:3 Indian Fresco water color paintings.

NQ Canonical division for Painting
44 [P1] for Indian style.
3 [M] for Fresco.
3 [E] for water-colour

2. NQ42,216;3:4 Japanese Oil-colour Fresco Painting of mountains.

NQ Canonical division for Painting
42 [P1] for Japanese style.
216 [P3] for Mountains takes from (P3) of ND for sculpture.
3 [M] for Fresco
4 [E] for Oil-colour

3. NQ44,3;3:6 Indian distemper Fresco painting of landscape

NQ Canonical division for Painting
44 [P1] for Indian style.
3 [P3] for landscape taken from (P3) of ND for sculpture.
3 [M] for Fresco
6 [E] for distemper.

NR Music

Its facet formula is: NR[P1],[P2][P3];[M]:[E][2P]

[P1] and [P2] constitute the style.

Library Classification Practice 2.9.5 Examples from Main Classes ..

[P3] is the kind of Music

[M] is the musical instrument.
[E] cum [2P] means the technique of Music. These isolates are to be worked
out.

Examples

1. NR;91 Vocal music

NR Canonical division for music
91 [M] for Vocal

2. NR441:91 Carnatic Vocal music

NR Canonical division for music
441 [P1] Carnatic style
91 [M] for vocal

3. NR5,92 European Orchestra

NR Canonical division for music
5 [P1] European style
92 [P3] for Orchestral music

2.9.3 Literature [O]

Literature is the writings of a language which are kept alive by their beauty of style or
thought or emotional effect. It is one of the great creative and universal means of
communicating the emotional, spiritual, or intellectual concerns of mankind.

This class has only personality facets in four levels, first by language, then by the
divisions of form, author and work consecutively. The facet formula is: O[P1],[P2][P3],[P4]

[P1] stands for language of the literature. Its isolates are to be taken from
language isolates given in page 2.26 of CC.

[P2] stands for the form of literature, namely, drama, poetry, fiction etc.

[P3] stands for the author faces to be got by (CD). In case of an individual author
(CD) is to be got by the exact year of the birth of the author. In case of
anthologies (CD) is to be worked out to the LED covered by the year of
birth of the youngest author.

[P4] stands for the individual titles of the work of a given author. It may be got by
group notation or by (AD)

Work Number: If the number of works of an author is up to eight, then these may be
arranged in the sequence of their first publication dates as 1,2,3, up to 8.

Group Number Method: In case the number of works of an author is upto 65, then these
works are arranged in eight groups as shows below:
Centre for Distance Education 2.9.6 Acharya Nagarjuna University

Group
Item No.
No.
1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
2 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
3 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
4 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
5 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
6 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
7 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56
8 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64

Each work is to be denoted by at least by two digits from the above table. Thus the 3rd
work is denoted by 13; the 62nd work is denoted by 86.

If the number of works is more than 64 and up to 512, then all the works are divided into
eight groups of 64 works each. In this case each work is denoted by three digits. The first digit
stands for the group number, the 2nd for the subgroup and the 3rd for the item number in the
subgroups.

The first work is denoted by 111, the 2nd work by 112 and the 512 the work by 888.

Thus group number for work facet involves much of calculations and therefore it is better
to use (AD) for titles as [Link] himself suggested. For example, Shakespeare’s
Hamlet as: 0111,2J64, H.

Examples:

1. O152,1J32,H Hindi Poetry by Tulasi Das (Born in 1532)

O M.C. for Literature
152 [P1] for Hindi Language
1 [P2] for poetry (form of literature)
J32 [P3] Year of birth of Tulasidas, 1532 got by (CD)
H [P4] work Number got by (AD) being the first letter of the title.

2. O:g Literary criticism

O M.C. for Literature
g (EPCI) for criticism.

3. O111,3NO5,31 Mulk Raj Anand’s Morning face – a novel, (17th work)

He was born in 1905.
O M.C. for Literature
111 [P1] for English Literature
3 [P2] for novel (Fiction) (Form of literature)
No5 [P3] for year of birth of Mulk Raj Anand, got by (CD)
31 [P4] work number got by Group number method

4. O15,2D40,ABS Abhijnana Sakuntalam of Kalidas. (Kalidas was born

in 40AD).
Library Classification Practice 2.9.7 Examples from Main Classes ..

O M.C. for Literature

15 [P1] for Sanskrit Literature
2 [P2] for Drama (Kalidas is known for dramas)
D40 [P3] for 40 A.D. Year of birth of Kalidas
ABS (AD) for Abhijnana Sakuntalam.

5. O111,2J64,H:g(S Criticism of psychological aspects of Hamlet of

) Shakespeare
O M.C. for Literature
111 [P1] for English Literature
2 [P2] for Drama (Form of literature)
J64 [P3] for year of birth of Shakespeare, 1564
H [P4] (AD) for Hamlet (work number).
g (EPCI) for criticism
(S) (SD) for Psychology

6. O153,1xN5 Anthology of Punjabi poems (youngest poet was born

in 1947)
O M.C. for Literature
153 [P1] for Punjabi Language
1 [P2] for poetry
x (ACI) applicable before space for collection
N5 got by (CD) for 1947 (LED)

7. O157,3M76,D Devadas by Sharat Chandra (Born in 1876), 7th work

O M.C. for Literature
157 [P1] for Bengali literature
3 [P2] for Novel (form of literature)
M76 [P3] Year of birth of Sharat Chandra, 1876,
D [P4] work number got by (AD)

8. O111,3M62x Collected novels of Thomas Hardy (author was born in

1862).
O M.C. for Literature
111 [P1] for English Literature
3 [P2] for novels (form of literature)
M62 [P3] for 1862 got by (CD) for year of birth of the author
x (ACI) for collection

9. O168v History of Urdu literature

O M.C. for Literature
168 [P1] for Urdu Literature
v (ACI) for history

10. O152,1J34w Life of Tulasidas

O M.C. for Literature
152 [P1] for Hindi Literature
Centre for Distance Education 2.9.8 Acharya Nagarjuna University

1 [P2] for Poetry

J34 [P3] for 1534 got by (CD) for date of birth of Tulasidas
w (ACI) applicable before Space for biography

2.9.4 Linguistics [P]

Linguistic is the science of Language. Its facet formula is:P[P],[P2][P3]:[E][2P]

[P1] is the language concerned to be got from Language Isolates.

[P2] is Stage and Variant to be got by (CD), 9D Area, (Variant means the geographical
variations, that is, the different dialects of a language at a given or period. It is
denoted by 9D which further sharpened by (GD), that is, the area in which a
particular dialect is spoken. Stage of language means the changes taking place
in a given language from period to period. The Stage is to be got by (CD).

[P3] is linguistic element such as Isolated sound, Phoneme, Syllable, words, Phrases,
Clauses, sentences, Pieces of Composition, Punctuation and their divisions etc.

[E] cum [2P] as enumerated.

It is to be noted that if any of the Energy isolates from 4 to 58 takes place

together with the element number [P3], the number 3 is to be omitted. Eg. P111:4k English
dictionary (but not P111,3:4k).

Eg.2: P142:53 Coining new words in Russian Language (but not as P1242,3:53).

Bilingual dictionaries: In the class number only the first language in which the
words are given is considered as Personality. The language in which the meanings are
given is considered as the language of exposition which is represented in the Book
Number. Eg. P15:4k 111N62. (Here 111 for English and N62 for year of publication,
i.e., 1962).

Dictionaries of Special terms (jargons): A dictionary of Special terms of a

particular subject will go with the subject using the (ACI) k.

eg. 1. A:(P111)k for Dictionary of Science in English

2. W:(P111)k for English Punjabi dictionary of Political terms.

Note: If main purpose of a book is to give comparative account, :(G) should be

added to its Class number
eg: P3:(G) for Comparative study of Dravidian languages.

Note: Teaching of any language like teaching of any other subject will go to T
Education.
eg:T35:3(P111).56 for Teaching of English language to foreigners in England.
Library Classification Practice 2.9.9 Examples from Main Classes ..

Examples

1. P113,J:2 Grammar of Modern German

P M.C. for Linguistics
113,J [P] [P2] for Modern German.
:2 [E] for morphology of language which can be taken to be
grammar.

2. P35:4k Telugu dictionary

P M.C. for Language
35 [P1] for Telugu.
4 [E] for meaning.
k (ACI) for dictionary

3. P35:4k111N65 Telugu to English dictionary (Publication in 1965)

P M.C. for Language
35 [P1] for Telugu Language.
4 [E] for meaning.
k (ACI) for dictionary
111N65 (English, 1965 for Book No.)

4. P111,J,312 English proper noun.

P M.C. for Language
111,J [P1] [P2} for modern English.
312 [P3] for proper noun

5. P35,3:58 Borrowed words in Telugu

P M.C. for Language
35 [P1] for Telugu.
3 [P3] for words
58 [E] for Borrowing

6. P111:28’N English translation in 20th Century.

P M.C. for Language
111 [P1] English.
28 [E] for translation
N [T] for 19th century.

2.9.5 Spiritual Experience and Mysticism [∆]

Subjective knowledge is gained through a sort of inner experience. It is directly
disclosed from the cosmos or Universe without sense perception. It is beyond logical methods.
It is founded on faith rather than on reason. This kind of knowledge is generally classed with
magic, religion, and parapsychology. Similar the case with the main class “∆ spiritual
experience and mysticism”

Spiritual experience and mysticism is a subject of translocated sensation or inspiration of

any discipline. It is at the cross roads of sciences and Humanities.

Its facet formula is: ∆[P],[P2]:[E][2P]

Centre for Distance Education 2.9.10 Acharya Nagarjuna University

(P) is the kind of religion, the fold of spiritual and mystic experiences.
(P2) is the agency of such experiences.
[E] cum [2P] is the problem facet involves methods techniques and ultimate results of
mystic and occult experiences..

Examples

1. ∆:8 Occultism
∆ M.C. for Spiritual experience and mysticism.
8 [E] for Occultism.

2. ∆:834 Telepathy
∆ M.C. for Spiritual experience and mysticism.
834 [E] for Telepathy.

3. ∆:864.44 Indian Astrology

∆ M.C. for Spiritual experience and mysticism.
864 [E] for Astrology
44 [S] for India.

4. ∆2:864 Hindu Astrology

∆ M.C. for Spiritual experience and mysticism.
2 [P] for Hindu.
864 [E] for Astrology.

5. ∆,16:5 Vision of disembodied souls.

∆ M.C. for Spiritual experience and mysticism.
16 [P2] for disembodied souls.
5 [E] for vision

6. ∆6 Christian mysticism
∆ M.C. for Spiritual experience and mysticism.
6 [P] for Christianity.

7. ∆:8627 Palmistry
∆ M.C. for Spiritual experience and mysticism.
8627 [E] for Palmistry.

8. ∆7,11:893 Voice of God according to Islamic religions.

∆ M.C. for Spiritual experience and mysticism.
7 [P] for Islam
11 [P2] for God.
893 [E] for Voice

9. ∆6,12:87 Witchcraft of devils according to Christians

∆ M.C. for Spiritual experience and mysticism.
6 [P] for Christianity
12 [P2] for Devil.
87 [E] for Witchcraft
Library Classification Practice 2.9.11 Examples from Main Classes ..

10. ∆2y7M79 Life of Raman Maharshi (Born in 1879)

∆ M.C. for Spiritual experience and mysticism.
2 [P] for Hindu.
y (ACI) applicable before space for life case study)
M79 For 1879 got by (CD) Year of birth of author.

2.9.6 Religion [Q]

Religion deals with the ultimate nature of existences and relationships with in the context
of revelation, deity, worship.

Its facet formula is:Q[P]:[E][2P]

[P] is religion itself.

[E] cum [2P] Religions practices.

Examples:

1. Q2:4 Hindu Religions practices

Q M.C. for Religion
2 [P] for Hinduism
4 [E] for Religions Practices

2. Q6:1 Christian mythology

Q M.C. for Religion
6 [P] for Christianity
1 [E] for Mythology

3. Q4:366 Rebirth according to Buddhism

Q M.C. for Religion
4 [P1] for Buddhism
366 [E] for Rebirth

4. Q7:26 Muslim Religious tradition

Q M.C. for Religion
7 [P] for Muhammadanism
26 [E] for Tradition

5. Q7:2 Qaran
Q M.C. for Religion
7 [P] for Muhammadanism
26 [E] for scriptures

6. Q52:3 Babylonian theology

Q M.C. for Religion
52 [P] for Babylonian
Centre for Distance Education 2.9.12 Acharya Nagarjuna University

3 [E] for theology

7. Q6:427 Marriage rites of Christianity

Q M.C. for Religion
6 [P] Christian Religion
427 [E] for marriage rites

8. Q2:457 Hindu festivals

Q M.C. for Religion
2 [P] for Hindu Religion
457 [E] for Festivals

9. Q6:23 New Testiment

Q M.C. for Religion
6 [P] for Christianity
23 [E] for New Testiment. (Here 2 is further subdivided as
suggested in part 3 of the CC)

10. Q7:4198.461.M Pilgrimage to Mecca

Q M.C. for Religion
7 [P] for Muhammadanism
4198 [E] for Pilgrimage
461 [S] Arabia
M (AD) for Mecca

2.9.7 Philosophy [R]

Philosophy is a branch of learning that investigates and evaluates the ultimate nature of
existences and relationships through observation, speculation, reasoning, but not
experimentation. It is the study of truth or principles of all real knowledge.

It is divided into Canonical Divisions R1 to R8. Some of them have their own facet
formulas.

Various system of philosophy are placed in R6 to R8. R6 is reserved for favoured

system, that is, Indian Philosophy, and R7 for second favoured system. Philosophies of all
other nations are placed in R8, which is sharpened by (GD).

Philosophies of various subjects go with the subjects where R is applied as an [E] facet
got by (SD) eg: V:(R) Philosophy of history.

But Philosophical aspects of the theory of Religion will go with R3 Metaphysics and
further fitted with (P2) to be got by (SD).

eg.: R3,(Q6) Christian Philosophy.

Examples

1. R14 Symbolic logic

Library Classification Practice 2.9.13 Examples from Main Classes ..

R1 Canonical division for Logic in R Philosophy

R14 Symbolic logic.

2. R635 Yoga Philosophy

R6 for Canonical division for favoured system. Here it is for
Indian Philosophy.
35 [P1] for Yoga Philosophy under R6 for India Philosophy

3. R36 Teleology
R3 Canonical division under Philosophy
6 [P] for Teleology.

4. R4(Q6) Christian ethics

R4 Canonical division of Philosophy for ethics
(Q6) [P] for Christian

5. R65,5 Brahmasutra
R6 Canonical division for Indian Philosophy
5 [P] for Vedanta
5 [P2] for Brahmasutra

6. R61 Outlines of Hindu Philosophy

R6 Canonical division for Indian Philosophy
1 [P] for Hindu Philosophy.

7. R44(L) Ethics in Medical profession.

R4 Canonical division for ethics
4 [P] for professional ethics
(L) (SD) for Medical.

8. R5 Science of Aesthetics
R5 Canonical division for Aesthetics under R Philosophy

9. R65,6 Bhagvada Gita

R6 [CD] for Indian Philosophy
5 [P] for Vedanta
6 [P2] for Bhagvad Gita

10. R842 Japanese Philosophy.

R8 Canonical division for system of all other nations
42 got by (GD) by Japan.

2.9.8 Psychology [S]

Psychology is the science of human behaviour. It is concerned with study of mind and
behaviour, attitude etc.

Its facet formula is:S[P]:[E][2P]

Centre for Distance Education 2.9.14 Acharya Nagarjuna University

[P] is individual human being (such as child, adolescent etc. Certain isolates
in are to be got by (SID).
[E] cum [2P] Psychological activities and processes.
[2E] cum [3P] mostly relates to psychology. These are only for 2 and 3 in [E].

Examples

1. S1:43 Memory of Children

S M.C. for Psychology
1 [P] for Child
43 [E] for Memory

2. S38:5 Emotion of old people

S M.C. for Psychology
38 [P] for old people
5 [E] for emotion.

3. S2:7 Adolescent personality

S M.C. for Psychology
2 [P] for Adolescent
7 [E] for personality

4. S21-68:523 Joy of Blind Boy

S M.C. for Psychology
21 [P] for Boy
68 [P] for Blind
523 [E] for Joy

5. SM9:811 Psycho-analytic study of dreams

SM System for Psycho-analytic
811 [E] for dream

6. S:851 Hypnotism
S M.C. for Psychology
851 [E] for Hypnotism

7. SM9,65:75 Psycho-analysis of the criminal temperament.

SM9 System for Psycho-analytic
65 [P] for criminal
75 [E] for temperament

8. SNI,38:5 Emotions of old people according to behaviouristic

psychology.
SNI System for Behaviouristic
38 [P] for old age
5 [E] for emotion

9. S(L) Clinical Psychology

S M.C. for Psychology
L (SD) for clinical
Library Classification Practice 2.9.15 Examples from Main Classes ..

10. S12:255:3 Physiological Psychology of color sense among toddlers

S M.C. for Psychology
12 [P] for Toddler
255 [E] for color sense
3 [2E] Physiological

2.9.9 Assignments:
1. Location of University library building
2. Architecture of South Indian temples
3. Roman style of city theatre: a plan
4. Plan of city park
5. Buddhist iconography
6. Design of marble bust in Chinese sculpture
7. Mughal water colour paintings
8. Silver coins of the Mughal period
9. Italian Renaissance water colour landscape paintings on canvas
10. Collected works of Shakespeare (1564)
11. Geography in the works of Kalidasa
12. Poetic criticism
13. Yorkshire dialect
14. Punjab verbs
15. Worship in Brahmo-Samaj

2.9.10 Reference Books:

1. Kaula, P.N.: A treatise on Colon Classification. Sterling Publishing Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi,
1985.
2. Khanna, J.K. and Kapil, D.D.: Colon Classification. Ess Ess Publication, New Delhi, 1982.
3. Kumar, P.S.G.: Practical Classification, Volume one: Colon Classification, Metropolital Book
Co., New Delhi, 1978.
4. Mukhopadhya, Ajoy: Guide to Colon Classification Practice. Metropolital Book Co., Pvt.
Ltd., New Delhi, 1976.
5. Ranganathan, S.R.: Colon Classification, 6th Reprinted edition Asia Publishing House,
Bombay, 1976.
6. Satija, M.P.: Manual of Practical Colon Classification. Sterling Publishers Pvt., New Delhi,
1984.
Library Classification Practice 2.10.1 Examples from Main Classes …

Lesson – 10

EXAMPLES FROM MAIN CLASSES OF SOCIAL

SCIENCES
2.10.0 Objective :
The objective of this lesson is to enable the student by providing illustrative examples to
understand how to classify the documents dealing with the subjects Education, Geography,
History, Politics, Economics, Sociology and Law.

Structure
2.10.1 Introduction
2.10.2 Education: meaning and worked out examples
2.10.3 Geography: Meaning and worked out examples
2.10.4 History: meaning and worked out examples
2.10.5 Political Science: meaning and worked out examples
2.10.6 Economics: meaning and worked out examples
2.10.7 Sociology: meaning and worked out examples
2.10.8 Law: meaning and worked out examples
2.10.9 Assignments
2.10.10 References

2.1 Introduction
The subjects concerning the orderly investigation of the behaviour of man in the society
comes under the discipline Social Sciences. These include Education, Geography, History,
Politics, Economics, Sociology and Law.

2.2 Education [T]

In colon Classification the basic subject/main class Education is represented by “T”.
All the documents that deals with the technique of teaching and learning comprises basic
subject Education.

The facet formula is T[P]:[E][2P], [2P2]

[P] is for various types of educands, that is level or kind of students.

[E] is Educational techniques or problems
[2P] Covers subject taught to be got by (SD) besides the enumerated isolates.
Centre for Distance Education 2.10.2 Acharya Nagarjuna University

[2P2] is method or physical medium of teaching.

The class Education has systems. The facet formula for them is:

T[System], [P]:[ E] [2P],[2P2]

Examples:

1. T4.44 Higher Education in India

T M.C. for Education
4 [P] University
44 [S] India

2. T15:3(B):8 Teaching of Mathematics in Elementary Schools by

experiments
T M.C. for Education
15 [P] for Elementary schools
3 [E] for Teaching Technique
(B) [2P2] for Mathematics got by (SD).
8 (2P2) for experiment method.

3. T9(Y31):5,8 Diploma Courses for Rural People

T M.C. for Education
9(Y31) [P] Other classes got by SD (Y31) Rural in Sociology
5 [E] for Educational measurement
8 [2P2] for Diploma.

4. T4:6.44 Physical Education in Indian Universities

T M.C. for Education
4 [P] for University
6 [E] for Physical Education
44 [S] for India

5. T1:3,31 Teaching in mother tongue in pre-secondary schools

T M.C. for Education
1 [P] Pre-secondary schools
3 [E] for Teaching
31 [2P] for Mother tongue

6. TN1:2.4416 Curriculum in Montessori Schools of Andhra Pradesh

T M.C. for Education
TN1 Systems by GD for Montessori School
2 [E] for Curriculum
4416 [S] for Andhra Pradesh

7. T9(Y58).44 Education of Harizans in India during 16th century

T M.C. for Education
9 [P] for extension of other classes
(Y5927) [2P] for Harizans people, got by (SD) from sociology
44 [S] for India.
Library Classification Practice 2.10.3 Examples from Main Classes …

J [T] for 16th century

8. T:8E University Budgets

T M.C. for Education
8E [E] for Budget as n Economics

9. T9(Y31).44’N66 Rural education in India in 1966.

T M.C. for Education
9 [P] for extension of other classes
(Y31) (SD) for Rural Education got by (SD), (where Y is for
Sociology 31 for Rural)
44 [S] for India
N66 [T] for Time 1936

10. TL2,15:3(A),1 Audio-visual teaching of Natural Sciences for elementary

students in Kants’s Schools.
TL2 System for KANT’S SCHOOL
15 [P] for Elementary
3 [E] Teaching
(A) [2P2] for natural science got by SD
1 [2P2} for Audio-visual

2.3 Geography [U]

Geography is the science that deals with the features of the surface of the earth and its
inhabitants.

Its facet formula is: U(P),(S)’(T)

In the case of U6 Economic Geography and U8 Travels, [T] should be the (LED) covered.

Examples:

1. U47 Oceanography
U M.C. for Geography
25 [P] for Oceanography

2. U28:56 Weather conditions in Great Britain

U M.C. for Geography
281 [P] for Weather
56 [S] for Great Britain

3. U.4461 Geography of Assam

U M.C. for Geography
4461 for Assam.

4. U8.58 Expedition in Indian Ocean

Centre for Distance Education 2.10.4 Acharya Nagarjuna University

U M.C. for Geography

8 [P] for expedition
95 [S] for Indian Ocean

5. U5.53’N5 Political Geography of India brought upto 1850s

U M.C. for Geography
5 [P] for Political Geography
44 [S] for India
M5 [T] for 1850.

6. U641.44’N47 Trade Routes of India brought up to 1947.

U M.C. for Geography
641 [P] for Trade Routes
44 [S] for India
N47 [T] for 1947.

7. U2891.4416’N5 Weather Forecasting facilities in Andhra Pradesh in

1950s.
U M.C. for Geography
2891 [P] for Weather Forecasting
4416 [S] for Andhra Pradesh
N5 [T] for 1950s

8. U42.44’M Migration in India during 19th century.

U M.C. for Geography
42 [P] for Migration
44 [S] for India
M [T] for 19th century

9. U6415.44’O1 Rail Transport in India brought upto 2010

U M.C. for Geography
6415 [P] for Railway
44 [S] for India
O1 [T] for 2010(LED)

10. U5.44.fN5 Paleogeographic map of India in 1950

U M.C. for Geography
33 [P] for Paleogeography
44 [S] for India
f ACI applicable before space for Map (atlas)
N5 [T] for 1950

2.4 History [V]

Recording the chronological achievements of the past is known as History. It is
concerned with the study of the past events from which theories are derived. It becomes the
subject matter of Political Science. Therefore some times a confusion may arise between V
History and W Political Science. A theoretical aspect of constitution or a similar subject should
go into W Political Science and an historical account into V History class.

Its facet formula is: V[P],[P2]:[E][2P]’[T]

Library Classification Practice 2.10.5 Examples from Main Classes …

[P] is community to be got by (GD). It may further be sharpened by (SID) for

constructing space isolates for colonies of an empire in other parts of the world.
eg.44-56 British India. It can further be amplified by (SD) if necessary. Isolates
for near sovereign states are formed by (CD).

[P2] is the organ of the government.

[E] cum[2P] covers the activities, functions, and policies of the government.

[T] is for Time to be shown as the exact year. Two different points of time (span) are to
be represented by either forward or backward arrow. Normally the backward arrow
is used.

V:19 for Foreign Policy: It has its own facet formula as:V:19[P1], [P2]

V M.C. for History

19 [E] for Foreign relations/policy
[P1] is community to which the foreign policy is turned and it is to be
got by (GD)
[P2] is the subject of the foreign policy to be got by (SD)

Here [P1] and [P2] are telescoped. So if [P1] is absent there is no need to
put comma before [P2].

Note: See the revised rules in this regard in pages 24, 25, 26 and 28 of
the Annexure of Colon Classification.

Examples

1. V44 Indian History

V M.C. for History
44 [P] for India got by (GD).

2. V44:72 Indian Epigraphy

V M.C. for History
44 [P] for India got by (GD).
72 [E] for Epigraphy

3. V44,12:3 Functions of the Governors in India.

V M.C. for History
44 [P] for India got by (GD).
12 [P2] for Governor
3 [E] for Functions.

4. V44:1958 India’s Foreign Policy towards Russia

V M.C. for History
44 [P] for India got by (GD).
19 [E] for foreign relations
58 [2P] for Russia got by (GD)
Centre for Distance Education 2.10.6 Acharya Nagarjuna University

5. V1N4:3 The functions of UNO

V M.C. for History
1N4 [P] for UNO.
3 [E] for functions

6. V44:1944Q7(zM)’N65 Indo Pak War of 1965

V M.C. for History
44 [P] for India got by (GD).
19 [E] for foreign relations
44Q7 [P] for Pakistan got by (GD)
(zM) [P2] for war.
N65 [T] for 1965.

7. V73:1958,(zT)’N65 Disarmament talks between USA an USSR in 1985

V M.C. for History
73 [P] for USA got by (GD).
19 [E] for foreign policy
58 [P] for USSR got by (GD)
(zT) [2P2] for disarmament.
N85 [T] for 1985.

8. V44:44 Refugees in India.

V M.C. for History
44 [P] for India got by (GD).
44 [E] for Constituent States

9. V4416,32:91’N84 Assembly elections in Andhra Pradesh in 1984

V M.C. for History
44 [P] for India got by (GD).
32 [P2] for Second house in Legislature
91 [E] for elections
N84 [T] for 1984.

10. V44:19(zP) India’s Defence policy

V M.C. for History
44 [P] for India got by (GD).
19 [E] for foreign policy
(zP) [P2] for Defence

2.5 Political Science [W]

The main class Political science is the study of the state, government, politics, and
people either individually or in groups in relation to the State.
The facet formula is: W[P],[P2]:[E][2P]

(P) is the kind of State.

(P2) is the part or organ of the State. Its isolates are same as (P2) of V History.
[E] cum [2P] deals with activities, policies, and functions of the State. The isolates are
same as those of V History.
Library Classification Practice 2.10.7 Examples from Main Classes …

Examples

1. W6 Fundamentals of democracy
W M.C. for Political Science
6 [P] for democracy

2. W691v History of Communism

W M.C. for Political Science
691 [P] for communism
v (ACI) applicable before Space for History of the subject.

3. W64:48 Minority status in dictator Governments

W M.C. for Political Science
64 [P] for democracy
48 [E] for Minorities

4. W4:19 Constitution of monarchic governments

W M.C. for Political Science
4 [P] for Monarchy
2 [E] forConstitution

5. W4.44’J Kingship in india in 16th century

W M.C. for Political Science
4 [P] for Monarchy
44 [S] India
J [T] 16th century.

6. W691:91.44 Elections of Communist party of India

W M.C. for Political Science
691 [P] for Communism
91 [E] or Election
44 [S] for India

7. W,61:2.44 Constitution of Urban Local Governments in India

W M.C. for Political Science
61 [P2 for Local body
2 [E] for Constitution
44 [S] for India

8. W46:3(Q) State and religion in limited monarchies

W M.C. for Political Science
46 [P] for limited monarchy
3(Q) [E] for state and religion

9. W,8:91M.44 Proportional Representation in civil services in India

W M.C. for Political Science
8 [P2] for Civil Services
91M [E] for Proportional representation
44 [S] for India.

10. W4,1:(R) Philosophy of kingship

Centre for Distance Education 2.10.8 Acharya Nagarjuna University

W M.C. for Political Science

4 [P] for monarchy
1 [P2] for King (Head of the state)
(R) (SD) for Philosophy acting as [E].

2.6 Economics [X]

Economics deal with transport, commerce, international trade, industries, material
resources and their production, distribution and consumption. It also deals with office and
personal management. It has Systems and Specials.

Its facet formula is: X[P];[M]:[E][2P]

[P] is the business.

[M] is the medium of currency applicable only.
[E] cum [2P] covers economic problems and activities.

It is to be noted that some isolates such as Transport, Commerce appear both in

[P] and [E]. In such a case [P] stands for business of Transport, while [E] goes for methods,
techniques and other such problems.

Personnel Management: X;9 Personnel Management is divided into three sectors as:
Least concrete sector of 9
More concrete sector of 9
Still more Concrete sector of 9

If the isolates in the subject fall in more than one sector, then the latter sector should form the
earlier level and the common digits are to be omitted in the latter levels.

Example:

X8(F95):9B,9D,5 Employment of semi-skilled children in cosmetic industry.

Here :9B child labour form Still more concrete sector;

,9D from 99D for semi-skilled from more concrete sector
first 9 is omitted.
,5 from 95 for employment from Least Concrete Sector. The first 9 is
omitted.
Examples:

X8(D513) Coal industry

X M.C. for Economics
8(f551) [P] for coal industry
f M.C. for Technology;
551 [P] for coal.

Xv44’N6 Economic history of India in 1960

X M.C. for Economics
v (ACI) applicable before [S] for history
Library Classification Practice 2.10.9 Examples from Main Classes …

44 [S] for USA

N6 [T] for 1950.

3. X:731 Demand Theory

X M.C. for Economics
731 [E] for Demand Price

4 X61;1:7.44 Value of gold coins as money in India

X M.C. for Economics
61 [P] for money
1 [M] for gold
7 [E] for value.
44 [S] for India

5 X8(A):9.44 Labour problems in Indian industries

X M.C. for Economics
8(A) [P] for industries in general
9 [E] for labour problems
44 [S] for India

6 X755.1(Y:5)’N7 Foreign loans to India in 1970s

X M.C. for Economics
755 [P] for foreign loans
44 [S] for India
N7 [T] for 1970s.

7. X:979D Strikes
X M.C. for Economics
979D [E] for strikes

8 X;979D,6 Arbitration in strikes

X M.C. for Economics
979D [E] 979D for strikes (more concrete sector of 97)
6 from [E] 976 for arbitration (Least concrete sector of 97),
hence 9 and 7 are omitted. (sector nos are separated by
coma)

9 X:97K,9D,6 Arbitration in strike of National trade unionsl

X [BC] for Economics
97K [E]National Trade Unions (SMC of 97)
979D [E]Strike (MCS of 97) hence 97 omitted
976 [E]Arbitration (LCS of 97) hence 97 omitted

10. X:9F,9D,3 Wages of Semi-skilled women labour in India

9F [E] Female (SMCS of 9)
99D [E] semi-skilled (MCS of 9) hence common 9 omitted
93 [E] wages 9LCS of 9) hence common 9 omitted

11 X8(A):6.44’N3 Problems of Industrial finance in India in 1930s.

X M.C. for Economics
8(A) (SD) for industry
Centre for Distance Education 2.10.10 Acharya Nagarjuna University

6 [E] for financing

44 [S] for India
N3 [T] for 1930s.

2.7 Sociology [Y]

Documents that are concerned with the study of the society and its members constitute
the subject Sociology. Sociology deals with the collective behaviour of socially organised
groups. It also includes Culture, Civilization and Anthropology.

The facet formula is: Y[P]:[E] [2P]:[2E][3P]

[P] is community or social group. Some of its isolates are enumerated and others
can be got by (SID) and (SD).

[E] [2P] covers activities, traditions, social problems etc.

[2E] cum [3P] deals with secondary problems. It includes conservation, development,
etiology (That is the study of causes for pathology, biology, physiology and
physics), preservation and correction of social ills/evils),

4[E] has its own different (2E) cum [3P] isolates.

Examples

1. Y33 Urban sociology

Y M.C. for Sociology
33 [P] for urban

2. Y:1.44 Indian Culture

Y M.C. for Sociology
1 [E] for civilization or culture
44 [S] India

3. Y13:434 Poverty of Old persons

Y M.C. for Sociology
13 [P] for Old people
434 [E] for Poverty

4. Y74:2 Anthropometry of Mexicans

Y M.C. for Sociology
74 [P] for Mexicans got by (GD)
2 [E] for Anthropometry (that is measuring physical
characteristics

5. Y15-31:412 Tobacco habit of rural women

Y M.C. for Sociology
15-31 [P] got by (SID) for rural women (where 15 is [P] of Y for
women and 31 is [P] of Y for rural)
412 [E] for tobacco habits
Library Classification Practice 2.10.11 Examples from Main Classes …

6. Y31:7:7 Rural development

Y M.C. for Sociology
31 for rural
7 [E] for Personality (This is to be shown when [2E] is used).
7 [2E] for improvement (development).

7. Y:4355:67.4454 Relief measures for flood effected people of Orissa.

Y M.C. for Sociology
4355 [E] for flood
67 [2E] Relief work
4454 [S] for Orissa

8. Y:411:5(Z).4416 Prohibition of Alcohol by legislation in Andhra Pradesh

Y M.C. for Sociology
411 [E] for alcoholism
5 [2E] for prevention
Z (SD) for legislation where Z is M.C. for Law
4416 [S] for Andhra Pradesh

9. Y73(Q2):3411:63’N5 Naming of Hindus in South Africa, in 1950s.

Y M.C. for Sociology
73(Q2) [P] for Hindus obtained by (SD) (where Q is M.C. for
Religion and 2 is [P] for Hinduism under M.C. (Q) as
designed under (P)
3411 [E] for naming
63 [S] for South Africa
N5 [T] for 1950s.

10. Y73(Q7)-15,44.9S Status of Muslim women in South India.

Y M.C. for Sociology
73(Q7) [P] for Muslims got by (SD) as designed under (P) 73 for
Ethnological division.
44 [S] for India.
9G [S2] for South (taken fro 19G enumerated in the schedule
for southern world)

2.8 Law [Z]

Law treats the codified social, political and economic rules that society requires and by
which its members agree to live. It comprises all the principles, rules and enactments that are
applied in the courts and enforced by the power of the State. The documents that deals with the
above subject comes under the basic class Law.

Its facet formula is: Z[P],[P2],[P],[P4]:[E][2P]

Centre for Distance Education 2.10.12 Acharya Nagarjuna University

[P] is community over which a given law has jurisdiction. It is got by (GD) in case of
a nation and by (SD) in case of a cultural community.

[P2] and [P3] are named as Law I and Law II respectively.

For A War Law, B Land Law, C Naval Law and D Air Law, all the earlier divisions
of [P2] are applicable after A,B,C, and D.

[P3] isolates vary according to isolates of [P2].

[P4] isolates are only applicable to Z,7 [P2],7[P3].

[E] cum [2P] cover the problems of Z 98 [P2] for Legal documents.

It is to be noted that [P2] 4,5,6,91,92,93 and 95 have no [P3]; only Z,98 and its
sub-divisions have [P4] isolates.

Further it is to be noted that Law of a particular subject is to be classed with that

subject by (SD). eg. Library Laws as 2(Z).

Examples

1. Z44 Indian Law

Z M.C. for Law
44 [P] for India got by (GD).

2. Z44,3 Indian Contract Law

Z M.C. for Law
44 [P] for India obtained by (GD).
3 [P2] for contract law

3. Z(Q7),122 Muslim marriage law in India

Z M.C. for Law
(Q7) [P] for Muslims got by (GD).
122 [P2] for Marriage

4. Z(Q2),2,6 Hindu Law of Succession

Z M.C. for Law
(Q2) [P] for Hindu
2 [P2] for Property
6 [P3] for succession

5. Z1 International Law
Z M.C. for Law
1 [P] for world got by (GD).

6. Z44,75,15 Criminal Procedure Code of India.

Z M.C. for Law
44 [P] for India got by (GD).
75 [P2] for Criminal Proceedings
15 [P3] for criminal procedure
Library Classification Practice 2.10.13 Examples from Main Classes …

7. Z44Q7,A,5’N72 Trial of Pakistan war prisoners in 1972

Z M.C. for Law
44Q7 [P] for Pakistan got by (GD).
A [P2] for war
6 [P3] for prisoners of war
5 [P4] for trial.
N72 [T] for 1972

8. Z(Q6),985:1 Drafting of negotiable instrument in Christian Law

Z M.C. for Law
(Q6) [P] for Christian law got by (GD).
985 [P2] for negotiable instrument
1 [E] for drafting

9. Z73,2671,436 Exchange of goodwill in U.S. law

Z M.C. for Law
73 [P] for U.S. got by (GD).
2671 [P2] for Copyright Law
43 [P3] for exchange

10. Z44,9412,3 Admissibility of Circumstantial evidence in Indian Law.

Z M.C. for Law
(Q7) [P] for Muslims got by (GD).
9412 [P2] for Circumstantial
3 [P3] admissibility.

2.9 Assignments:
Classify the following titles by CC.

Basic education to Muslim students.

Curriculum for University education.
Audio-visual method of teaching.
Rain fall in Japan brought upto 1950s.
Trade routes in India.
A trek to the Himalayas.
Biography of USA.
Road map of India in 2001.
Travels in India.
History of India in 15th Century.
India’s non-alignment policy.
History of Indian National Congress.
Indian archives.
Ancient Greece Inscriptions.
Elections of 1968 in USA.
Indian democracy.
Human rights and fundamental freedom
Monopoly
Small scale textile industries in India.
Super-Bazaar: a new concept of departmental stores in Andhra Pradesh.
Competition in soap industry.
Rural development in India.
Centre for Distance Education 2.10.14 Acharya Nagarjuna University

Relief work to refugees.

Prohibition by legislation.
Gipsies: the forgotten of children.
Opium habit among Indian youth.
Hindu law of marriage.
Code of Civil Procedure.
Supreme Court of India.
International law on territorial waters.

2.10 Reference Books:

1. Kumar, P.S.G.: Practical Classification, Volume one: Colon Classification,
Metropolital Book Co., New Delhi, 1978.
2. Mukhopadhya, Ajoy: Guide to Colon Classification Practice. Metropolital Book Co.,
Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 1976.
3. Ranganathan, S.R.: Colon Classification, 6th Reprinted edition Asia Publishing
House, Bombay, 1976.
4. Satija, M.P.: Manual of Practical Colon Classification. Sterling Publishers Pvt., New
Delhi, 1984.